Isuzu D Max Owners Manual Combined 12 17my

BLACK PANTONE185C 23mm (0.
08)
PICTORIAL INDEX
VEHICLE INFORMATION
OWNERS AND IMPORTANT INFORMATION
DRIVERS MANUAL E
PRE-DRIVING OPERATIONS
AND ADJUSTMENTS
CONTROLS AND
INSTRUMENTS
OWNER’S AND DRIVER’S MANUAL

COMFORT AND
CONVENIENCE
SERVICE AND
MAINTENANCE
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
MAIN DATA
INDEX
E
No.TF-IE-1331E5
Printed in Thailand
2013
TF-IE-1331E5_4306960_Cover.indd 1 2013/01/24 9:01:39

BLACK 23mm (0.08)
Keep this Owner's Manual in the vehicle for handy reference

whenever needed.
• We recommend that you also read the separate instructions for the
equipment on your vehicle that was installed by your Isuzu Dealer.
• Your Isuzu Dealer will be glad to answer any questions you may have
about the information in this manual.
• Please leave this manual in the vehicle when you resell it – the next owner
will need it.
Notes on Reading This Manual

• Please read this manual carefully, especially the information in the
"IMPORTANT INFORMATION" section and the instructions and
information identified by the following symbol/letter combinations:
DANGER , WARNING , CAUTION , ADVICE and NOTE .
Among them, DANGER
, WARNINGand CAUTION are reminders
to be especially careful. Failure to follow or wrongly following the
associated instructions could result in personal injury or accidents. Please
read them thoroughly.
• Throughout this manual, illustrations are primarily based on right-hand
drive models.
Published: Apr., 2013 All rights reserved.
• Due to differences in vehicle specifications, the illustration used for
Printed: Apr., 2013
description may not match your vehicle. First Edition
• The contents of this manual are current at the date of issue, but may
differ slightly from your vehicle due to specification changes or other
modifications made thereafter. TFR/TFS
• The equipment that is mentioned in this manual may not be equipped OWNER'S AND DRIVER'S MANUAL
depending on the vehicle specifications. Please check your vehicle
specifications and read this manual. Issued by ISUZU MOTORS LIMITED
E-Solutions & Service Marketing Dept.
• This manual is applicable for vehicle in all countries except the USA and Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo, 140-8722 Japan
Canada. 131304-01K-x
• All rights reserved. This manual may not be reproduced in whole or in
part, without the permission in writing of ISUZU MOTORS LIMITED.
TF-IE-1331E5_4306960_Cover.indd 2 2013/01/24 9:01:43

Symbols Used in This Manual
DANGER
Failure to follow these instructions identified by this symbol could result in death or
serious injury to you and/or other people.
WARNING
Failure to follow these instructions identified by this symbol could result in a
fire inside your vehicle in addition to death or serious injury to you and/or other
people.
CAUTION
Failure to follow these instructions identified by this symbol could result in injuries
or an accident.
ADVICE
Failure to follow these instructions identified by this symbol could cause
malfunction or damage to your vehicle.
NOTE
This symbol identifies information that you need to know.
4510393_sec00_PICTORIAL INDEX.in1 1 2015/01/16 9:02:41

Abbreviations
This manual uses the following abbreviations, as interpreted below.
Abbreviations Description
ABS Anti-lock Brake System
Association des Constructeurs Européens d'Automobiles
ACEA
(Association of European Automobile Constructors)
API American Petroleum Institute
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
BS British Standards
CRS Child Restraint System
DIN Deutsche Industrie Normen
DPD Diesel Particulate Defuser
EBD Electronic Braking force Distribution
ELR Emergency Locking Retractor
ESC Electronic Stability Control
FMVSS Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
GAW Gross Axle Weight
GCW Gross Combined Weight
GVW Gross Vehicle Weight
JASO Japanese Automobile Standards Organization
JIS Japanese Industrial Standards
LLC Long Life Coolant
MID Multi-Information Display
MIL Malfunction Indicator Light
PM Particulate Matter
r/min revolutions per minute
SAE Society of Automotive Engineers
SRS Supplemental Restraint System
SVS Service Vehicle Soon
TCS Traction Control System
VIN Vehicle Identification Number
2WD Two Wheel Drive
4WD Four Wheel Drive
4510393_sec00_PICTORIAL INDEX.in2 2 2015/01/16 9:02:42

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL AND
HOW TO FIND A SPECIFIC TOPIC
0
● HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 0-2

● HOW TO FIND A SPECIFIC TOPIC 0-3
● CHAPTER DESCRIPTION 0-5
● PICTORIAL INDEX 0-6
● WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHT INDEX 0-14
● WARNING/CAUTION LABELS 0-21
4510393_sec00_PICTORIAL INDEX.in0-1 0-1 2015/01/16 9:02:42

0-2 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Chapter/section titles Chapter index tab

These titles are useful for getting the gist of Use this for quick access to
the content at a glance. your desired chapter.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION 2-21
Carrying Children
Using Seat Belts with Children
WARNING
• The vehicle's seat belts are designed for adults. If a seat belt touches a child's
neck or chin, or does not rest across his/her hip bone, use a child restraint
system (CRS) that is suitable for the child's height and weight. If the seat belt
is used as it is, it could apply intense pressure to the child's abdomen in the
event of a collision. A small child who is not able to sit up by him/herself must be
placed in a CRS.
• If the vehicle has a passenger airbag, do not fit a CRS facing rearward to the
front passenger seat. If the CRS fitted to the front passenger seat is facing
rearward, the impact on the CRS during deployment of the passenger airbag
could inflict life-threatening injuries on the child.
• When a child is in the vehicle, securely close and lock the doors before driving.
Seat Belts → Refer to page 3-48

Child Restraint System (CRS)
→ Refer to page 3-55
Do not Leave a Child Alone in the Vehicle
WARNING
• When you leave the vehicle, take
the child with you. If you leave the
child alone in the cab, the child
could interfere with things, causing
vehicle movement, a fire or some
other accident. Also, the cab inside
could become dangerously hot when
heated by the sun.
DANGER
Reference page
Refers you to a page (or
WARNING CAUTION
pages) of this manual that
ADVICE NOTE concerns the present topic
and that you should also
Symbols read.
See the preceding page for the meanings of these symbols.
All values in this manual are indicated primarily according to the International System of Units (or in SI
units) with the conventional metric values and American units indicated in parentheses.
Note: This page is shown only as an example. It is not intended to give you information on your particular
vehicle.

HOW TO FIND A SPECIFIC TOPIC 0-3
Use chapter/section titles as keys

Page 0-5
Search for the page describing the specific
topic by using the general table of contents
under CHAPTER DESCRIPTION, the
CHAPTER INDEX, and/or the TABLE
OF CONTENTS on the first page of each
chapter.
Use the pictorial indexes

Pages 0-6 to 0-13
If you do not know the name of the
switch or other device for which you need
information, locate the page describing it
by using the pictorial indexes.
Use device names as keys

Pages 9-1 to 9-3
If you know the name of the switch or other
device for which you need information,
locate the page describing it by using the
index at the end of this manual.
Use the Warning/Indicator Light

Index
Pages 0-14 to 0-20
If a warning or indicator light is illuminated,
you can use the WARNING/INDICATOR
LIGHT INDEX to find the page that
provides information on the light.
If you have a problem with your

vehicle
Pages 7-2 to 7-56
Refer to IN CASE OF EMERGENCY to
find measures to take.

0-4

CHAPTER DESCRIPTION 0-5
PICTORIAL INDEX ··································· 0-6
VEHICLE INFORMATION ···························· 1
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ······················ 2

Describes what you should know before you can operate the vehicle safely
and smoothly.
PRE-DRIVING OPERATIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS ·· 3

Shows the proper way to open/close the doors, windows and fuel tank filler
cap. Also explains how to adjust the mirrors, seats and steering including
how to correctly fasten the seat belts.
CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS ·············· 4
Explains how to start and stop the engine. Also describes various controls
and instruments.
COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE ··············· 5

Contains information on the air conditioning system, and other comfort and
convenience features.
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE·················· 6

Describes daily and periodic inspections and other vehicle care and
maintenance information necessary to keep your vehicle in good condition.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ························· 7

Enumerates possible emergency situations and describes the actions you
should take to deal with any one of them.
MAIN DATA ·················································· 8
INDEX··························································· 9

0-6 PICTORIAL INDEX
Interior
Right-hand Drive
1 2 1 3 4 5 1 6 7 1
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
No. Equipment Page No. Equipment Page
1 Air flow direction control tab 5-3 Windshield wiper and

7 4-71
windshield washer switch
2 Passenger's SRS airbag 3-67
3 Audio system ― Cup holder and small article

8 5-41
storage pocket (driver's side)
Small article storage pocket
5-37
4 (upper side of dashboard)
5-38
9 (driver's side)
Dashboard tray 5-37
Fuse box 7-43

5 5-34
(center of instrument panel) 10 Fuel lid opener 3-35
11 Engine hood release lever 6-10

Combination light control
6 4-66
switch
12 5-34
(lower part of driver's side)

PICTORIAL INDEX 0-7
Heater/manual air conditioner 5-4 Small article storage pocket

13 5-35
Automatic air conditioner 5-15 17 (passenger's side)
14 Cigarette lighter 5-30 Accessory socket 5-32
Small article storage pocket Cup holder and small article

15 (lower part of center of 5-34 18 storage pocket (passenger's 5-41
instrument panel) side)
16 Glove compartment 5-36

0-8 PICTORIAL INDEX
Left-hand Drive
1 2 3 1 4 5 6 1 7 1
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
1 Air flow direction control tab 5-3 7 Passenger's SRS airbag 3-67
Cup holder and small article

Combination light control
2 4-66 8 storage pocket (passenger's 5-41
switch
side)
Windshield wiper and Small article storage pocket

3 4-71 5-35
windshield washer switch 9 (passenger's side)
4 Audio system ― Accessory socket 5-32
10 Glove compartment 5-36

5-37
5 (upper side of dashboard) Heater/manual air conditioner 5-4
11
Dashboard tray 5-37 Automatic air conditioner 5-15
12 Cigarette lighter 5-30

6 5-34
(center of instrument panel)

PICTORIAL INDEX 0-9

13 (lower part of center of 5-34 5-38
17 (driver's side)
instrument panel)
Small article storage pocket Fuse box 7-43

14 5-34
(lower part of driver's side)
Cup holder and small article
18 5-41
storage pocket (driver's side)
15 Engine hood release lever 6-10
16 Fuel lid opener 3-35

0-10 PICTORIAL INDEX
Right-hand Drive
1 2 3 4 56 7
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Hazard warning flasher 9 Illumination control switch 4-75

1 4-70
switch
Remote control mirror switch
10 4-73
2 MID illumination control switch 4-23 (angle adjustment switch)
Steering wheel remote Retractable power mirror

3 5-47 11 4-74
control switch
Instruments, warning lights 4-10 Remote control mirror switch

4 12 4-73
and indicator lights 4-17 (left/right selector switch)
Cruise control resume switch 4-97 Horn button 4-73

13
Cruise control set switch 4-96 Driver's SRS airbag 3-67
5
Cruise control main switch 4-96
Heated seat switch (right
14 4-76
Cruise control cancel switch 4-98 front seat)
6 ESC OFF switch 4-106

Heated seat switch (left front
15 4-76
7 MID switch 4-21 seat)
8 Headlight leveling switch 4-68

PICTORIAL INDEX 0-11
Left-hand Drive
12 3 4 5 6 7
15 14 13 11 12 10 9 8
1 MID illumination control switch 4-23 Heated seat switch (right

8 4-76
front seat)
2 ESC OFF switch 4-106
Steering wheel remote Heated seat switch (left front

3 5-47 9 4-76
control seat)
Horn button 4-73

Instruments, warning lights 4-10
4 10
and indicator lights 4-17 Driver's SRS airbag 3-67
Cruise control resume switch 4-97 Remote control mirror switch

11 4-73
(angle adjustment switch)
Cruise control set switch 4-96
5
Cruise control main switch 4-96 Remote control mirror switch
12 4-73
(left/right selector switch)
Cruise control cancel switch 4-98
6 MID switch 4-21 Retractable power mirror

13 4-74
switch
Hazard warning flasher
7 4-70
switch 14 Illumination control switch 4-75
15 Headlight leveling switch 4-68

0-12 PICTORIAL INDEX
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 9 10 11
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12
3-26 12 Cup holder 5-40

1 Grips
5-43
13 Small article storage pocket 5-34
2 Tilt steering 3-45 14 Parking brake lever 4-81
3 Inside rearview mirror 3-46 Ashtray 5-33

15
4 Sun visor 5-29 Cup holder 5-40
5 Overhead console 5-28 16 Side airbag 3-67
6 Map lights 5-27 17 Seats 3-36
7 Ticket holder 5-29 18 4WD switch 4-113
8 Center console box 5-39

Gearshift lever (manual
4-82
9 Curtain airbag 3-67 transmission model)
19
10 Dome light 5-26
Selector lever (automatic
4-83
11 Seat Belts 3-48 transmission model)

PICTORIAL INDEX 0-13
Exterior
Except Projector Headlight Model
1
2
5,6 3,4
Projector Headlight Model

1
3,4 5,6
2
1 Outside rearview mirrors 3-47 7 Tires 6-51
2 Turn signal light 7-29 Turn signal light (front door

8 7-29
mounted type)
3 Front fog light 7-29
4 Daytime running light 7-29 Turn signal light (outside

9 rearview mirror mounted 7-29
5 Headlight 7-29 type)
6 Clearance light 7-29

0-14 WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHT INDEX
Warning/Indicator Light Index
Multi-Information Display (MID)

Warning Lights
Message Display indication Page
Low fuel (Displays when the "RANGE" screen is

4-55
selected)
Parking brake release 4-43
Light control OFF 4-56
Key remain 4-56

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHT INDEX 0-15
Indicator Lights
Message Unit Display indication Page
Kilometer 4-11
Odometer and trip meter
Mile 4-11
Kilometer 4-26
Fuel economy (numerical display)
Mile 4-26
Kilometer 4-26
Fuel economy (graphical display)
Mile 4-26
Kilometer 4-26
Fuel economy (average fuel economy)
Mile 4-26
Kilometer 4-27
Range (possible driving range)
Mile 4-27

Kilometer 4-27
Driving distance and average vehicle

speed
Mile 4-27
Elapse time ― 4-28
Select mode ― 4-29
Kilometer 4-47
Engine oil
Mile 4-47
Kilometer 4-48
Air cleaner element
Mile 4-48
Kilometer 4-49
Distance to maintenance
Mile 4-49

4-31
Service reminder OFF ― 4-32
4-33
DPD PM level ― 4-37
Progress of DPD regeneration ― 4-38

Instrument Panel
Warning Lights
Name Symbol Color Page
Malfunction indicator light (MIL) Amber 4-51
SVS indicator light Amber 4-52
Engine oil pressure warning light Red 4-46
Engine overheat warning light Red 4-46
Fuel filter warning light Amber 4-53
Water separator warning light Red 4-52
Low fuel warning light Amber 4-55
Generator warning light Red 4-50
Brake system/parking brake warning light Red 4-42
ABS warning light Amber 4-44
ESC warning light Amber 4-45
SRS airbag warning light Red 4-41
Seat belt warning light (driver seat) Red 4-39

Seat belt warning light (front passenger

Red 4-40
seat)
Door open warning light Red 4-56
Automatic transmission fluid temperature

Red 4-54
warning light
Check 4WD warning light Red 4-54
Check trans warning light Amber 4-53
Icy road warning light (model with MID) ― 4-55
Indicator Lights
Glow plug indicator light Amber 4-58
DPD operator regeneration indicator light Amber 4-61
High beam indicator light Blue 4-57
Light position indicator light Green 4-57
Turn signal indicator light – left Green 4-57
Turn signal indicator light – right Green 4-57
Front fog light indicator light Green 4-57

Rear fog light indicator light Amber 4-58
TCS OFF indicator light Amber 4-58
ESC OFF indicator light Amber 4-59
4WD indicator light ― 4-61
4WD low indicator light ― 4-61
Cruise control main indicator light ― 4-60
Cruise control set indicator light ― 4-60

WARNING/CAUTION LABELS 0-21
Warning/Caution Labels in Your Vehicle

• The warning/caution labels in your vehicle indicate very important instructions and
information that you should respect to ensure safe and proper use of the vehicle.
Be sure to read them before using the vehicle.
• If any of these labels are peeling or illegible due to wear or scratches, please
contact your Isuzu Dealer for a replacement.
• Some examples of warning/caution labels are indicated on the following pages,
but there are many others not shown. Also, the contents of these labels may vary
from model to model.
• The warning/caution labels indicated may be located differently in your vehicle.
Warning/Caution Labels – Cab Interior
1
3
2
2
4 4
No. Description
1 Tire air pressure (Driver's side)
2 Side airbag
3 Passenger's SRS airbag (Passenger's side)
4 Warning to avoid trapped hands in side access panel (Extended cab model)

0-22 WARNING/CAUTION LABELS
2
1
3
No. Description
1 2WD - 4WD selection
2 Passenger's SRS airbag
3 Accessory socket
4 Fuse

WARNING/CAUTION LABELS 0-23
Warning/Caution Label – Cab Exterior
No. Description
1 Fuel type
Warning/Caution Labels – Engine Compartment

4 5
3 2
No. Description
1 Battery
2 Engine coolant
3 Radiator cap
4 Exhaust emission
5 Engine maintenance

0-24 WARNING/CAUTION LABELS

VEHICLE INFORMATION 1
● Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Engine Number 1-2
4510393_sec01_VEHICLE INFORMATIO1-1 1-1 2015/01/16 9:03:22

1-2 VEHICLE INFORMATION
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Engine Number

The VIN and engine number are necessary for registering your vehicle. They are
also necessary when your vehicle undergoes official inspections. Provide your Isuzu
Dealer with these numbers when you are having the vehicle repaired or are ordering
replacement parts. The Dealer will be able to do the requested jobs more competently
and quickly.
VIN
VIN Location on Frame
The VIN is stamped on the right side center
part of the frame.
VIN Plate (Engine Compartment)

The VIN plate at the upper surface of the
radiator sill in the engine compartment
indicates information such as the VIN.

VEHICLE INFORMATION 1-3
VIN Plate (Front Left Side of
Windshield)
The VIN plate is located in the front left
side of the windshield.
ADVICE
• This VIN plate is equipped only on
models for the European market.
ID Plate
The ID plate at the left side of engine
compartment indicates the VIN together
with other information such as option
codes.

The VIN contains multiple pieces of information including the vehicle and engine model
codes as shown below.
M P A T F R 8 6 J E T 0 0 0 0 0 1
1 2 3 4 5
Section Description
1 World Manufacturer Identifier (WMI)
Model code
2 TFR86J: 4 × 2, Long wheel base, 4JK1 engine model
TFS86J: 4 × 4, Long wheel base, 4JK1 engine model
Model year code
E: 2014 model
F: 2015 model
3 G: 2016 model
H: 2017 model
J: 2018 model
K: 2019 model
4 Plant code
5 Production sequential number
ADVICE
• Interpretation of the VIN may differ depending on the market. For further details,
please ask your Isuzu Dealer.

VEHICLE INFORMATION 1-5
Option Codes
The ID plate also indicates option codes. These codes are three-digit, alphanumeric
codes, each assigned to a particular component of the vehicle.
You will be able to use these codes to identify the model or type of engine, transmission
or other components when your vehicle needs inspection and other services.
Option Option
Engine Transmission
Codes Codes
RDX 4JK1-TCY Hi-Power RNU AY6
MA1 TB-50LS
Option
Automatic air conditioner
Codes Option
Suspension
Air conditioner (cooler and Codes
C61
heater) 7YC 2WD High-Ride
G50 Rear, heavy duty
Option
Heater/manual air conditioner
Codes
Option
C42 Heater (without cooler) Other components
Codes
Air conditioner (cooler and Radio and CD/USB player
C60 UGQ
heater) with Bluetooth®
NW9 Traction control
K30 Cruise control
ADVICE
• There are more option codes than those indicated above. Depending on the
market, an option code may not be shown. For detailed specifications of your
vehicle, please ask your Isuzu Dealer.

Engine Number
Front The engine number is stamped on the right
side rear part of the engine block.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION 2
● Before Driving 2-2

● Carrying Children 2-21
● Driving 2-23
● Off-road Driving 2-41
● Automatic Transmission Model 2-42
● Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Model 2-46
● Stopping and Parking 2-49
● Cautions for Driving in Hot Regions 2-57
● Cautions for Driving in Cold Regions 2-58
● Staying Safe 2-62
● Preventing Breakdowns 2-66
● When to Visit Your Isuzu Dealer 2-69
● Using Tire Chains 2-72
● Diesel Particulate Defuser (DPD) 2-73
● Speed Limit Device 2-76
● Front Seat Belt with Pretensioner and SRS Airbag System 2-77
● Vehicle Data Collection 2-82
● Turbocharger 2-82
This chapter contains information and cautions that you

should observe for safe and comfortable vehicle operation.
Be sure to read it before using the vehicle.
4510393_sec02_IMPORTANT INFORMAT2-1 2-1 2015/01/16 9:03:57

2-2 IMPORTANT INFORMATION
Before Driving
Proper care and driving is important not only in extended service life of your vehicle,
but also in improved fuel and oil economy. Drive carefully and defensively.
Perform Daily (Pre-operation) Inspections
ADVICE
• For safe and comfortable driving,
keep record of the distances
driven and the condition of the
vehicle during operation. Perform
inspections at appropriate intervals,
and perform maintenance in
accordance with the findings of the
inspections. If an inspection reveals
an abnormality or there was an
abnormality the previous time the
vehicle was driven, have the vehicle
repaired by the nearest Isuzu Dealer
before it is driven again.
[1. Checking components that showed abnormalities during the previous

operation]
Check item Reference page
Checking components that showed abnormalities during the previous
6-16
operation
[2. Checks performed with the engine hood opened]

Fan belt looseness and damage 6-36
Engine oil level 6-20
Engine coolant level and radiator cap looseness 6-30
Power steering fluid level 6-79
Brake fluid level (For a manual transmission model, brake fluid doubles
6-46, 6-76
as clutch fluid.)
Windshield washer fluid level 6-82
Battery fluid level 6-87

[3. Checks performed in the driver's seat]
Brake pedal free play 6-48
Operation of meters, gauges and warning/indicator lights 4-10, 4-17
Engine startability, abnormal noise and color of exhaust gases 6-18
Parking brake lever stroke 6-51
Windshield washer fluid spray condition and windshield wiper
6-82, 6-83
effectiveness
Rearview mirror condition 3-46
Steering wheel free play and mounting condition 3-45, 6-78
Operation of horn and turn signal lights 4-67, 4-73
Fuel level 4-15
Operation of door locks 3-7, 3-15
[4. Checks performed during a walk around the vehicle]

Illumination, flashing or for stained or damaged lights 6-86
Suspension springs damage ―
Leakage of oil, engine coolant, fuel, brake fluid, and power steering fluid ―
[5. Checking wheels and tires]

Air pressure 6-52
Cracks and other damage 6-54
Abnormal wear 6-54
Tread depth 6-54
Disc wheel mounting condition 6-55
[6. Checks performed while driving the vehicle]

Brake effectiveness 6-50
Driving condition at low speeds and during acceleration 6-19

Use the Specified Fuel
WARNING
• Open the fuel tank filler cap slowly. If you open it quickly, the fuel tank pressure
may cause fuel to spurt out.
CAUTION
• Always use only an extra-low-sulfur diesel fuel (10 ppm or lower sulfur content).
• The use of a poor-quality diesel fuel, mixing such an additive as water remover
to the fuel in the tank, or filling the tank with gasoline, kerosene or an alcohol-
based fuel or its mixture with a diesel fuel will badly affect the fuel filter and
result in lubrication problems in fuel-lubricated components of the injectors. In
addition, this practice can also impair the operation of the engine and the diesel
particulate defuser (DPD), the exhaust emission cleaning system, possibly
leading to breakdown of the engine-related systems. If an incorrect fuel should
accidentally be added, drain all fuel from the system. Failure to observe this
precaution can result in a fire or permanent damage when the engine is started.
• The use of any fuel other than an extra-low-sulfur diesel fuel may violate the
relevant regulations enforced in certain countries or regions.
Fuel Tank Filler Cap

Fuel → Refer to page 2-59

Using Self-service Filling Stations
WARNING
[Be sure to obey the following instructions when refueling the vehicle]
• Stop the engine and close the vehicle's doors and windows.
• Keep cigarettes and other flames away from the vehicle.
• Before opening the fuel tank filler cap, touch a metallic object to discharge static
electricity from your body. If you have a static charge buildup on your body
while refueling the vehicle, a spark caused by its discharge could ignite the fuel,
resulting in burns.
• When filling, insert the nozzle deeply into the fuel filler neck. If you try to fill more
fuel by pulling out the nozzle from the fuel filler neck, fuel may spill out, causing
danger.
• All parts of the refueling procedure (from opening the fuel tank filler cap to
completing the refueling and closing the fuel tank filler cap) must be performed
by the same person.
Other people may be carrying static electricity. Do not allow them to approach
the fuel filler.
The person performing the refueling procedure must not return to the seat in the
cab part-way through the procedure. He/she could pick up another charge of
static electricity by doing so.
• Obey all cautions posted in filling stations.
• Be sure to wipe off the fuel that is spilled at refueling.
CAUTION
[Caution when refueling the vehicle]
• Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor when refueling the vehicle.


Load Cargo Correctly
WARNING
• Overloading can result in an accident
because it places too much strain on
the wheel bolts with the result that
they break and the wheels come off.
CAUTION
• The weight of the payload must
be limited within the gross vehicle
weight (GVW) rating and distributed
over the front and rear axles so as
not to exceed the axle capacities.
• It is extremely dangerous to
overload the vehicle or to load the
vehicle with the cargo positioned on
one side. Load the vehicle correctly,
observing the maximum loading
capacity.
• Incorrect loading can make the
cargo unstable. It can also cause
an overload condition confined to a
small area, resulting in damage to
the cargo bed and frame.
• Overloading places undue strain
on vehicle parts. It can shorten the
vehicle's service life and cause an
accident.

Cargo loading caution Incorrect Correct
Place cargo at the center of the
cargo bed, not at the front or
rear.
When using supports under

cargo, position them uniformly
along the cargo.
Do not allow long cargo to
protrude beyond the rear edge of
the cargo bed when transporting
loads with a length longer than
that of the vehicle bed. Rather,
use supports to raise it at an
angle. Avoid loading cargo using
only 2 support points.
Use ropes and tarpaulins to
secure the cargo so it does
not fall off the cargo bed. Use
rubber bands or bungee cords
to prevent the tarpaulins from
flapping in the wind.
Avoid loading cargo too high.
It can cause the vehicle to
tip sideways when it catches
sidewinds and when turning the
vehicle.
Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and Gross

Vehicle Weight (GVW) Ratings

Loading Heavy Cargo
CAUTION
• When the cargo is heavy, take
steps to prevent it from slipping and
secure it with wire cables.
Do not Secure Cargo Too Tightly
ADVICE
• To prevent cargo from falling off the
cargo bed, it is essential to secure it
with ropes and tarpaulins. However,
securing it too tightly can damage
the tailgate and cargo bed.

Do not Load Heavy Cargo on the Roof Rails
WARNING
• For vehicles equipped with roof rails,
adhere to the following cautionary
notes and use the roof rails correctly.
- When loading cargo on the roof
rails, use the roof carrier.
- When using the roof carrier, follow
the roof carrier installation manual
to properly secure cargo.
- When loading cargo onto the roof
carrier, make sure that it is firmly
secured. Occasionally inspect
the cargo to make sure it has not
come loose during driving.
- Do not load cargo that exceeds
the total vehicle length, total
vehicle width, and the total pay
load.
- The roof rail maximum loading
capacity is 60 kg (132.3 lb). Do
not load cargo that exceeds the
maximum loading capacity. If the
roof carrier maximum loading
capacity is less than 60 kg (132.3
lb), do not load cargo that exceeds
this maximum loading capacity.
- When cargo is loaded onto the
roof rail and roof carrier, the
vehicle's center of gravity will
become higher, so be careful
to drive the vehicle because
there is a possibility that you
may lose control of the vehicle
and/or it may tip over during high
speeds, sidewinds, acceleration,
deceleration, sudden braking,
cornering, lane changing, etc.

Rail covers
CAUTION
• Make sure to grab the center part of
the roof rails during operations such
as washing of the vehicle. If the front
or rear roof rail covers are forcefully
Center part pulled, the covers may come off and
cause injury to the person pulling
them.
• Do not forcefully pull the roof rails
up or to the sides.
Make Sure There is No Flammable Material between the

Cab and Cargo Bed
WARNING
• Be careful not to allow the ends of
ropes or the edges of tarpaulins
to come lower than between the
cab and cargo bed. During vehicle
operation, the engine's heat could
set them on fire. Carefully secure
the ends of ropes and edges of
tarpaulins.

Economical Driving
Avoid Unnecessary Engine Idling
and Revving the Engine
Idling the engine for longer than necessary
is a waste of fuel. The engine is sufficiently
warmed up when level of the engine
coolant temperature gauge is indicated.
Stop the engine when waiting for people
or unloading cargo, etc., even if the
vehicle is only parked for a short period
of time. Revving the engine will not only
waste fuel, but people nearby will also be
inconvenienced due to noise and exhaust
gases. Do not rev the engine.
Avoid Sudden Starts and Sudden Acceleration

Sudden starting and acceleration cause the fuel consumption to increase significantly.
Try to use smooth acceleration without depressing the accelerator pedal excessively.
Drive at an Economical Speed

Driving too fast causes increased fuel consumption. Be sure to drive within the legal
speed limit. In addition, repeated starting and stopping, acceleration and deceleration
will significantly increase fuel consumption. Aim to drive at a constant speed as much
as possible.
Drive in the Appropriate Gear

Over-revving the engine when accelerating and driving at a low speed in a high gear
will increase fuel consumption. Select the appropriate gear according to the traffic
conditions and the load being carried.
Avoid Traffic Jams and Plan Your Journey in Advance

Driving on traffic jams will increase fuel consumption. Avoid traffic jams and plan your
journey in advance as much as possible.
Unload Any Unnecessary Cargo Before Driving

The heavier the load being carried, the more that fuel consumption will increase.
Unload any unnecessary cargo before driving. Mud and snow adhering to the vehicle
body will also increase fuel consumption. Remove any mud or snow before driving.
Make Sure the Tire Air Pressure is Correct

Frequently inspect the tire air pressure and make sure it is always correct. Using the
correct tire air pressure will help reduce fuel consumption.

Use the Air Conditioner in Moderation

Use of the air conditioner will impact fuel consumption. Try to keep the air conditioner
at a suitable temperature and avoid setting the temperature too low. Also, turn the air
conditioner OFF when it is not necessary.
Avoid Rough Roads

Driving on rough roads will lead to a greater loss of driving power transmission and
increased fuel consumption.
Be Sure to Perform Proper Maintenance

Clogging up of the air cleaner element, deterioration of the engine oil and failure to
adjust the engine etc. will reduce the performance of the engine and increase fuel
consumption. Perform the necessary inspections, adjustments and replacements
according to the Maintenance Schedule.
Unloading Cargo
CAUTION
• When you load or unload cargo
at the roadside and the tailgate
or other body parts obscure the
taillights, stop lights, hazard warning
flashers, turn signal lights and/or
reflectors, be sure to warn other
drivers and passersby by placing
signs or emergency warning
triangles where they are easy to
see.
• When you load or unload cargo at
the roadside, select a place where
stopping and parking are allowed
and other drivers and passersby will
not be inconvenienced.

Do not Load Too Much Cargo onto the Passenger Seat
and/or Rear Seat
WARNING
• Load cargo so that it is flat. Do not
load cargo so that it is higher than
the seatback. Sudden braking or
collisions could cause the cargo to
fly forward, leading to an accident
that results in damage and/or injury.
• Do no place cargo onto a reclined
seatback. Sudden braking could
cause the cargo to fly forward,
leading to an accident.
Do not Carry Fuel and Spray Cans in the Cab
WARNING
• It is extremely dangerous to carry
fuel and spray cans in the cab.
If such a container were to ignite
or rupture, it could cause a fire or
explosion.

Do not Place Objects on the Instrument Panel or

Dashboard
WARNING
• Placing objects on the instrument
panel or dashboard could obscure
the driver's view and interfere with
driving, leading to an accident. Also,
vehicle acceleration or turning could
cause objects to move and injure
passengers.
Keep the Floor around the Driver's Seat Clean and Tidy
WARNING
• It is extremely dangerous to have
empty cans, empty bottles or other
items rolling around on the floor
because they could get trapped
under the brake pedal and prevent
brake application. For proper pedal
operation, it is also essential to
MAP
lay floor mats properly. Incorrectly
installed floor mats would hinder free
movement of the pedals.
• Do not use the top of the dashboard
as a place to put items that could
roll, which could interfere with your
driving.

Making Sure the Floor Mats Laid Out Correctly
Clip installation hole Make sure that floor mats designated for
the vehicle model and model year are
securely fastened on top of the floor carpet
before use. When securing, make sure
the clips included with the floor mats are
properly installed.
Clip
WARNING
• Use the clips included with the floor
mats to make sure the floor mats are
kept securely fastened. Otherwise
the floor mats may become
misaligned and interfere with the
pedals during driving, preventing
accurate operation and causing a
serious accident.
• Do not use floor mats that are meant
for another vehicle model or model
year, even if they are Isuzu genuine
floor mats.
• When laying out a floor mat on the
floor of the driver's seat, use the
floor mat designated for the floor of
the driver's seat.
• Do not use floor mats that are
stacked, backwards, or flipped over.
• At regular intervals, check that the
floor mats are securely fastened
with the included clips. In particular,
always check after the floor mats
have been removed for washing of
the vehicle, etc.
• Before driving and with the engine
stopped, depress each pedal all the
way to the floor to make sure the
floor mat does not interfere with the
pedals.

Choose Your Footwear Suitable for Driving
CAUTION
• Choose footwear that ensures
proper operation of pedals when
driving the vehicle. Use of footwear
unsuitable for driving may cause an
accident.
Sit in the Seat Correctly
WARNING
• Do not use the seatback as a seat
when it is in a folded down position.
If passengers are not sitting correctly
in their seats during hard braking
or a collision, it may result in fatal
injuries or death.

Correct Driving Posture
WARNING
• Before driving, be sure to adjust the seat, headrest, steering wheel and mirrors
to positions that give you a correct driving posture. Make sure the seat is
securely retained by trying to rock it forward and backward, and put on the seat
belt. All other passengers must wear seat belts.
Seats → Refer to page 3-36

Headrest → Refer to page 3-44
Mirrors → Refer to page 3-46
Manual seat model Seat Adjustment

Seatback Headrest Forward/
Adjusting the seat for a correct driving
angle height backward posture is a fundamental part of safe
adjustment adjustment adjustment
driving.
Seat height
adjustment
Power seat model

Forward/
Headrest
backward
height
adjustment
adjustment
Seatback
Seat height
angle
adjustment
adjustment

Fastening Your Seat Belt

Be sure to wear your seat belt. Sit up
straight with your lower back pressed
against the seat and the lap belt as low on
your hip bone as possible.
Latch plate
Buckle
Keep as low on hip
bone as possible
a Seat adjustment recommendations

B
c Make adjustments that align the center
a of your head to the center of the
C
headrest.
b Make adjustments that allow you to
d b easily turn the steering wheel with your
elbows slightly bent.
Position the seatback so it is always
A c
touching your shoulders.
Make sure you can adequately press
d
each pedal.
Seat belt fastening cautions Why?

Position the lap belt as low on your hip bone as The pressure applied by the
A
possible. seat belt in a collision would
Position the shoulder belt so it is on your shoulder be dangerous if the belt is
B positioned incorrectly.
(not touching your neck, chin or face).
Make sure the seat belt is not twisted To ensure that the seat belt is
C
when you put it on. fully effective.

Passengers and Seat Belts
Only one person at a time should use each
seat belt.
WARNING
• Be sure to adjust the seat before driving. Achieve the correct driving posture,
gently rock the seat to make sure it is locked in place, and put on your seat belt
before you start driving. All passengers must wear seat belts.
• For a child who is so small that the seat belt touches his/her face or does
not rest across his/her hip bone, use an appropriate commercially available
child restraint system (CRS), not the seat belt. Using the seat belt could be
dangerous.
Carrying Children → Refer to page 2-21
Adjusting the Position of the

Steering Wheel
You can adjust the position of the steering
wheel in the up-down direction. After
making an adjustment, make sure the
steering wheel and lock lever are securely
locked.
Lock
Unlock
Lock lever
WARNING
• When you have adjusted the steering wheel, try pulling the steering wheel up
and down to check that it is securely locked in position before driving.
• Adjust the position of the steering wheel before you start driving. Adjusting
the position of the steering wheel while driving would be extremely dangerous
because the steering wheel would rattle up and down, preventing precise
steering.
Tilt Steering → Refer to page 3-45

Carrying an Expecting Mother or a Person Who is ill
Shoulder belt portion

WARNING
• An expecting mother or a person
who is ill riding in the vehicle must
Lap belt portion also wear a seat belt. In light of
the risk that the seat belt will apply
pressure to the abdomen, chest and
shoulders in the event of a collision,
however, an expecting mother or
person who is ill should get advice
from a physician beforehand.
- An expecting mother should use a
three-point seat belt.
- An expecting mother should
position the lap belt snugly as low
as possible on the hip bone (not
across the abdomen). Also, she
should fasten the shoulder belt so
it rests on her chest, not on her
abdomen.
- Unless the seat belt is correctly
worn, it may dig into the abdomen
in the event of hard braking or
a collision, harming not only the
expecting mother but also the
unborn child, putting them both
in danger of serious injuries or
death.

Carrying Children
Using Seat Belts with Children
WARNING
• The vehicle's seat belts are designed for adults. If a seat belt touches a child's
neck or chin, or does not rest across his/her hip bone, use a child restraint
system (CRS) that is suitable for the child's height and weight. If the seat belt
is used as it is, it could apply intense pressure to the child's abdomen in the
event of a collision. A small child who is not able to sit up by him/herself must be
placed in a CRS.
• If the vehicle has a passenger airbag, do not fit a CRS facing rearward to the
front passenger seat. If the CRS fitted to the front passenger seat is facing
rearward, the impact on the CRS during deployment of the passenger airbag
could inflict life-threatening injuries on the child.
• When a child is in the vehicle, securely close and lock the doors before driving.

Do not Leave a Child Alone in the Vehicle
WARNING
• When you leave the vehicle, take
the child with you. If you leave the
child alone in the cab, the child
could interfere with things, causing
vehicle movement, a fire or some
other accident. Also, the cab inside
could become dangerously hot when
heated by the sun.

Do not Allow a Child to Put His/Her Head or Hands Out of

the Window
WARNING
• Regardless of whether the vehicle is
moving or stationary, you must never
allow a child to put his/her head,
hands, or other body parts out of
the window. Allowing such behavior
would be dangerous because the
child could hit an obstacle.
An Adult must Open, Close and Lock the Door for a Child
WARNING
• To protect the child from the danger
of getting his/her hands and head
trapped, an adult must open, close
and lock the door for the child.
Be careful that the child does not
interfere with the power window
switches and get his/her hands or
head trapped in the window. While a
child is in the cab, be sure to control
the power windows using the power
window switches beside the driver's
seat.
Opening and Closing Doors

Power Windows → Refer to page 3-27

Driving
Proper care and operation will not only extend the service life of your vehicle but also
improve oil and fuel economy.
Operation of New Vehicle

The subsequent performance and the service life of your vehicle are under the direct
influence of the care and treatment that your vehicle will receive during the initial
break-in period. It is therefore always recommended that during the initial 1,000 km (621
miles) break-in period, the following few simple precautions are carefully observed.
1. It is recommended that the engine speed is restricted to less than 3,000 r/min.
2. Avoid engine racing, abrupt starting and needless hard stops.
3. Always let the engine idle until it becomes thoroughly warmed up.
Check around the Vehicle before Starting the Engine

Before pulling away, perform a thorough
safety check, making sure there are no
children or obstructions around the vehicle.
WARNING
• Before starting the engine, make
sure there is no flammable material
under or around the vehicle. The
presence of any such material could
lead to a fire. If there is any wood
within 50 cm (approximately 20 in)
from the vehicle's heat source, it
would represent a severe hazard as
the wood could deform or discolor
from the heat or it could catch fire.
Starting the Engine


Be Careful about Exhaust Emissions
WARNING
• Exhaust emissions contain carbon monoxide, which is colorless, odorless and
poisonous. If you inhale exhaust emissions, you may suffer carbon monoxide
poisoning, resulting in death.
• Do not keep the engine running for any length of time in a place that is poorly
ventilated. It is particularly dangerous to run the engine in a garage or other
indoor place that could easily fill with exhaust gases because you could suffer
carbon monoxide poisoning, resulting in death.
• Inspect the exhaust pipe from time to time. If you notice any defect (for example,
a damaged joint, or a hole or crack caused by corrosion), have checks and
maintenance performed by the nearest Isuzu Dealer. Continuing to use the
vehicle without having the defect repaired would be dangerous because exhaust
gases could get into the cab and cause carbon monoxide poisoning, resulting in
death.
• If leaves, snow, etc. are on the air inlet grille of the vehicle's ventilation system,
the ventilation system will not function properly. Remove any obstructions such
as leaves or snow. Continuing to use the vehicle without removing obstructions
would be dangerous because exhaust gases could get into the cab, resulting in
carbon monoxide poisoning or death.
• If exhaust gases enter the cab through the vehicle's quarter window or doors
when driving, resulting in carbon monoxide poisoning or death.
• If exhaust gases get into the cab, completely open all of the windows, and
place the inside/outside air selector of the heater or air conditioner to outside
air. Promptly have checks and maintenance performed by the nearest Isuzu
Dealer. Continuing to use the vehicle without having the defect repaired would
be dangerous because exhaust gases could get into the cab and cause carbon
monoxide poisoning, resulting in death.

Starting the Engine
Manual transmission model
CAUTION
• Make sure that the parking brake
lever is securely pulled. On a
manual transmission model, make
sure the gearshift lever is in the "N"
position and then hold the clutch
pedal and brake pedal down fully
N before starting the engine. On an
automatic transmission model, make
sure the selector lever is in the "P"
Automatic transmission model position and then hold the brake
pedal down fully before starting the
engine.
• Be sure to sit in the driver's seat to
start the engine. If you are not sitting
in the driver's seat (if, for example,
you reach through the window or
through the door opening), you
P cannot confirm the "N" position. If

you start the engine of a manual
transmission model with the
gearshift lever in a position other
than "N", the vehicle could move.
Starting the Engine


If the Vehicle Has not Been Used for a Long Period
ADVICE
• Before using a vehicle that has not been driven for a long period, check the
engine, transmission and transfer case for oil leakage, and make sure the oil is
at the required levels. If there is insufficient oil, it will not adequately reach and
lubricate components, and a breakdown will result.
• Start the engine and allow it to idle for at least 5 minutes. Check for abnormal
noises.
• For instructions on warming up the engine, refer to "Starting the Engine" on
page 4-4.
Do not Run the Engine in a Garage
WARNING
• Running the engine in a poorly
ventilated place can lead to carbon
monoxide poisoning, resulting in
death. Choose a well ventilated
place when starting, warming-up or
idling the engine.

Do not Forget to Release the Parking Brake
ADVICE
• Pulling away with the parking brake still applied can damage the brake system.
• Before pulling away, make sure the parking brake is not set by checking that the
brake system/parking brake warning light is not on.
Brake System/Parking Brake Warning

Light → Refer to page 4-42
Parking Brake Lever
Pulling Away in a Manual Transmission Model
ADVICE
• Pull away gently in 1st gear. Pulling away in a high gear, pulling away rapidly or
slipping the clutch for a long time while pulling away would damage the clutch.

Appropriate Gearshifts
ADVICE
• Downshifts are performed for two
main purposes:
- For engine braking on a steep
and/or long downward slope
- For responsiveness and economy
on an uphill slope
[Cautions for downshifts]
• Allowing the engine to overrun can
result in engine damage. Do not
Red zone allow the engine to overrun when
downshifting.
• Driving uphill
Downshift early to avoid heavy
engine load.
• Driving downhill
In principle, you should use the
same gear(s) that you used to
Red zone (r/min) drive up the hill. Drive at a speed
4,400 and above that does not cause the engine to
overrun (exceed its r/min limit) and
the tachometer pointer to enter the
red zone.
Drive at a speed that does not cause the

tachometer pointer to enter the red zone.
The graduation and the red zone of
tachometer are various depending on the
models fitted.
Tachometer → Refer to page 4-13
Gearshift Lever → Refer to page 4-82
Selector Lever → Refer to page 4-83

Never Stop the Engine While Driving
WARNING
• Do not move the starter switch away
from the "ON" position while the
vehicle is being driven.
If the engine stops while the vehicle
is moving, the brakes would not work
properly, and the steering wheel will
become extremely stiff and hard to
operate. The engine could also be
damaged.
• Stopping the engine while driving
would be extremely dangerous
because the power steering would
stop working, making the steering
wheel extremely hard to turn.
• Stopping the engine while driving
would be extremely dangerous
because the warning lights, indicator
lights and other electrical circuitry
would completely stop working.
• Placing the starter switch in the
"LOCK" position while driving would
be extremely dangerous because
the key could come out, causing the
steering wheel to lock so that you
could not turn it.
Starter Switch → Refer to page 4-64

Cautions for Driving

• Concentrate on driving safely, obeying
all legally designated speed limits,
road signs and traffic signals.
• Do not place the starter switch to any
position other than the "ON" position
while driving. The power steering
would stop working, making steering
extremely difficult. Also, the brakes
would not work well, putting you in
extreme danger.
• If you notice any abnormal noise,
abnormal smell or abnormal
vibration from any part of the vehicle,
immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and perform checks.
• If a warning light comes on while
you are driving, immediately stop the
vehicle in a safe place and perform
checks.
• On a manual transmission model, do
not put your foot on the clutch pedal
except when using the gearshift lever.
Doing so would cause premature
clutch wear.
• Slow down sufficiently when
approaching a curve. Applying the
brakes or sharply turning the steering
wheel while turning the curve could
cause the cargo to shift, the tires to
slip and the vehicle to tip onto its side.
• While driving, do not place your hand
on the gearshift lever/selector lever
except when changing gears. Doing
so could cause the transmission to
fail.
• Avoid scraping the tire sidewalls
against curbstones or driving over
dips and protrusions in the road
surface.
You could damage the wheels or tires,
resulting in a blowout or flat tire.

• When going down on a steep slope, avoid driving the vehicle backward as much
as possible. Drive it forward slowly on the down slope.
• Compared with forward movement, the braking distance of backward movement
is longer, and the steering response of that is worse.
• If you must drive the vehicle backward, drive it very carefully and gradually by
moving and stopping repeatedly in order to stop it any time.
• The brakes give strong braking force with only light pressure on the pedal. Do not
press the brake pedal hard except in the event of an emergency.
• Nighttime driving is more dangerous than daytime driving because the field
of view is narrower. Keep your speed down, and maintain an ample headway
distance.
• When driving in fog, turn on the front fog lights (if equipped), rear fog light (if
equipped) and drive slowly, using the road's center line as a guide. It is dangerous
only to follow the lights of the preceding vehicle because they can cause optical
illusions. Drive with caution.
• Speeds on highways are higher than those on regular roads, so there is more
danger. Also, a breakdown on a highway represents a hazard to other vehicles
and can cause an accident. Concentrate on safe driving. Remember to perform
daily pre-operation inspections and use highway driving techniques.
• Your sense of how fast you are traveling becomes distorted on long highway
drives. Constantly keep an eye on the speedometer, and maintain a suitable
headway distance.
• During high-speed driving, even a little turn of the steering wheel causes a big
movement of the vehicle. Turn the steering wheel slowly.

Driving Down a Long Slope

When driving down a long slope, use
engine brake together with the foot brakes.
Using the low-gear engine brake reduces
the work load on the foot brakes and
yields greater braking force. In automatic
transmission models, do not use the
auto mode, as it does not provide engine
efficiency. Use only the manual mode for
engine braking.
CAUTION
• Frequent use of the foot brakes can cause vapor lock and brake fade, resulting
in reduced brake effectiveness.
• Be very careful when using engine braking in a low gear because the engine is
likely to over-rev.
NOTE
[What is vapor lock?]
• If the brakes overheat due to frequent use, the heat can cause the brake fluid to
boil so that air bubbles are created in the brake fluid.
Pressing the brake pedal simply compresses the air bubbles; pressure is
not transmitted to the wheel cylinders, so the brakes' effectiveness sharply
deteriorates. This phenomenon is called vapor lock.
[What is brake fade?]
• Frequent use of the brakes can cause the brakes to overheat so that the
frictional force of the friction surface decreases and the brakes become less
effective than normal. This phenomenon is called brake fade.

Driving in Bad Weather
(Rain, Icy Roads, Snowy Roads, etc.)
CAUTION
• In bad weather, visibility is reduced and slippery road surfaces increase
stopping distances. Drive more slowly than you would in good weather. Also,
avoid sharp turns of the steering wheel and hard braking. Use engine brakes
together with the foot brakes to decelerate.
ADVICE
• There is a risk of hydroplaning, particularly where water tends to collect on the
road surface. Drive at speeds that allow you to stay in complete control.
• If you cannot avoid driving on a flooded road, first check the depth of the water
and then drive through the water at a slow, constant speed. There is a risk
that water will get into the engine's cylinders and cause engine damage (water
hammering). Keep your speed down, and drive with great care.
NOTE
[What is hydroplaning?]
• If a vehicle is driven at high speed on a road that is covered with water, a layer
of water can form between the tires and road surface, causing the tires to lose
their grip and slide across the water. This phenomenon is called hydroplaning. It
is dangerous because it makes the steering wheel and brakes useless.

Driving on Snowy or Icy Roads

Caution on Slippery Roads
CAUTION
• On slippery roads, never accelerate
rapidly, brake hard, decelerate
rapidly or make sharp turns of the
steering wheel.
• There is a risk of reduced grip
between the tires and road surface
and of increased braking distances.
The danger of icy road surfaces
is particularly great on bridges, in
shady places and where there are
puddles. Keep your speed down and
be sure to use tire chains or winter
tires on snowy or icy road surfaces.
• Use lower gears to overcome the
retardation effect of the engine.
Apply the foot brakes lightly.
NOTE
• On a snowy or icy road with an automatic transmission model, by depressing
the brake pedal you can make a standing start in the manual mode 2nd gear
and move the selector lever to the "+" (upshift) position.
• When you want to free the vehicle from snow where the tires may slip slightly
by increasing the engine speed, you can press the ESC OFF switch to disable
just the traction control system (TCS).
Using Tire Chains → Refer to page 2-72

Model with Automatic Transmission
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

Pay Attention to the Way the
Steering Wheel Turns and Feels
CAUTION
• On snowy roads, water and snow
splashed up by the tires can freeze
and accumulate inside the fenders,
making the steering wheel hard
to turn. From time to time, get out
of the vehicle and remove any
accumulated snow. Do not use a
sharp implement to remove the
snow. Sharp edges could damage
rubber parts.
Check the Brakes from Time to Time
CAUTION
• When the vehicle is driven or
parked on a snowy surface, ice
can form on the brakes, decreasing
their effectiveness. From time to
time while you are driving, press the
brake pedal lightly and check the
brake's effectiveness. Pay attention
to vehicles both ahead and behind
you when checking the brakes in
this way.
• Also, check the brake's effectiveness
as soon as possible when starting
to drive the vehicle after it has been
parked. If the brakes do not work
well, drive slowly and gently press
the brake pedal several times until
the brakes dry out and start working
normally.

Removing Snow from the Underbody

Look under the vehicle and remove any lumps of ice that are stuck to the underbody.
Be careful not to damage components.
ADVICE
• Do not use a sharp implement to remove snow. Sharp edges could damage
rubber parts.
Driving on Poor Road Surfaces (Sand or Mud)

When you cannot avoid driving through
deep mud, using tire chains is an effective
way to avoid getting stuck.
WARNING
• When the vehicle is stuck and people or objects are nearby, do not drive the
vehicle forward and backward. When driving the vehicle forward and backward,
the vehicle may suddenly become unstuck and injure nearby people or cause
damage to objects.
ADVICE
• When driving in sand or mud, avoid hard braking, sudden acceleration and
sharp turns of the steering wheel. Such actions could get the vehicle stuck and
make it impossible to extricate.
• After driving through deep mud, any mud stuck to the vehicle can harm the
steering, brakes and powertrain. Wash the vehicle and remove all mud and
other incrustation.
• In models with automatic transmission, shift the transmission to the "2" or "1"
position to avoid overheating the transmission when towing or when driving
slowly in mud, sand, on snowy roads or steep inclines.
• The vehicle speed sensors are fitted on the wheels. When removing mud and
other incrustation, take great care not to damage the components.
• Do not use a sharp implement to remove mud. Sharp edges could damage
rubber parts.

NOTE
• On a muddy road with an automatic transmission model, by depressing the
brake pedal you can make a standing start in the manual mode 2nd gear and
move the selector lever to the "+" (upshift) position. This provides better traction
and safer vehicle operation.
• When you want to free the vehicle from mud where the tires may slip slightly by
increasing the engine speed, you can press the ESC OFF switch to disable just
the traction control system (TCS).
Exterior Maintenance
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

When the Vehicle Has Been Driven on a Flooded Road or

Washed
CAUTION
Check the
brakes! • If the vehicle must be driven on a

flooded road, is washed, or is parked
in an area that becomes flooded,
water can get into the brakes and
reduce their effectiveness. If the
brakes do not work well afterward,
drive slowly and gently press the
brake pedal several times until the
brakes dry out and start working
normally.
ADVICE
• If the vehicle must be driven on a
flooded road or is parked in an area
that becomes flooded, promptly
have your Isuzu Dealer perform a
check for the following points:
- Effectiveness of the brakes
- Water-ingress or damage to drum
brakes, or disc brakes
- Engine damage due to water-
ingress
- Shorting of electrical components
- Oil level and degradation
(cloudiness) of the engine,
transmission, differential and
transfer case
- Greasing of each components
(lubrication)

Sidewinds
ADVICE
• If the vehicle catches a sidewind and drifts sideways, firmly grip the steering
wheel, decelerate to a speed that allows you to stay completely in control and
make a directional correction. The vehicle may catch strong sidewinds in the
following situations:
- Emerging from a tunnel; Driving over a bridge, driving on an embankment or
driving through a cutting
- Being overtaken by a large truck or bus
- Overtaking a large truck or bus
Dealing with a Blowout or Flat Tire while Driving
WARNING
• If you feel any abnormality in a tire
while driving, immediately stop in a
safe place. If you continue to drive
on a flat tire, undue force would be
applied to the wheel bolts, possibly
causing the bolts to break and the
wheel to come off.
ADVICE
• If a blowout or flat tire occurs while you are driving, calmly grip the steering
wheel and gradually apply the brakes to decelerate. (Hard braking would be
dangerous because it could cause the steering wheel to be pulled to one
side.) Stop the vehicle in a safe place, and change the tire if the vehicle is the
model equipped with the spare tire, or repair the tire if the vehicle is the model
equipped with the emergency flat tire repair kit.
Tools → Refer to page 6-7

Spare Tire → Refer to page 6-58
How to Use the Emergency Flat Tire
Repair Kit (4WD Crew Cab Model)
Handling the Jack → Refer to page 6-62
Changing Tires → Refer to page 6-67

If the Underside of the Vehicle Receives a Hard Bump
ADVICE
• If the underside of the vehicle receives a hard bump, stop in a safe place
where the vehicle will not obstruct traffic and check for brake fluid leakage,
fuel leakage and component damage. If any part of the vehicle is damaged or
broken, promptly have the vehicle inspected and repaired by the nearest Isuzu
Dealer.
If a Warning Light Comes On or Flashes
ADVICE
• If a warning light comes on or flashes, do not ignore it, and do not keep driving.
Be sure to take corrective action referring to the explanation of the meters and
warning lights.
How to Read the Instruments

(Instruments Layout)
Warning and Indicator Lights Layout

Off-road Driving
During off-road driving, carefully confirm
the road condition, incline and other
factors, and drive at a reduced speed.
WARNING
• When driving off-road or on
extremely uneven road surfaces,
drive at a reduced speed. Avoid
making jumps, making sharp
turns, and striking objects with the
vehicle. Failure to observe these
cautions may result in loss of control
or overturning of the vehicle. In
addition, damage to the vehicle may
also result.
• Do not place your hands in the
steering wheel spokes when driving
off-road. If the vehicle's wheels
suddenly change direction, the
steering wheel may turn, resulting
in injury to your hands. Do not place
your thumbs inside the rim when
gripping the steering wheel.
• On inclined surfaces, drive straight,
at right angles to the incline. Driving
parallel to the incline (as with other,
similar vehicles) may result in
overturning of the vehicle.
• After driving in mud, sand or flooded
roads, be sure to confirm that the
brakes function correctly.

Automatic Transmission Model

On an automatic transmission model, there is no need to use a clutch pedal; you
can pull away, change gears and stop the vehicle by only using the selector lever,
accelerator pedal, and brake pedal. Be sure to learn the characteristics of the
automatic transmission model and how to correctly operate it. When the vehicle is
stationary, remember to keep the brake pedal firmly pressed and, if necessary, place
the selector lever in "P" or "N" position and apply the parking brake.
Immediately after engine startup, while the air conditioner is running in models with
the air conditioning system, the engine speed automatically rises. As this makes creep
stronger than it is at other times, be sure to keep the brake pedal firmly pressed.
NOTE
[Creep]
• With the engine running and the selector lever in a position other than "P" or
"N" selected, power reaches the wheels even when the accelerator pedal is
not pressed, causing the vehicle to tend to move. This phenomenon is called
creep. The higher the engine speed, the stronger the creep and the greater the
vehicle's tendency to move.

Operate the Brakes with Your Right Foot
ADVICE
• Sit in the correct driving position,
and use your right foot to operate
the brake and accelerator pedals.
To avoid accidentally pressing
the wrong pedal, check the pedal
positions and practice putting your
foot on the desired pedal.
• To ensure reliable brake application,
be sure to use your right foot to
press the brake pedal.
Pulling Away
1. Sitting in the correct driving position,
firmly depress the brake pedal with
your right foot and place the selector
lever in the "D" position (auto mode or
Brake manual mode) for forward movement
or the "R" position for backward
movement.
2. Check to be sure that the area
around the vehicle is clear and check
the selector lever position and shift
indicator, and then release the parking
brake lever.
3. Take your foot off the brake pedal,
then gradually press the accelerator
pedal to pull away.

WARNING
• When you move the selector lever to a position other than "P" or "N", creep will
cause the vehicle to move. When pulling away, be sure to keep the brake pedal
pressed as you operate the selector lever.
• When pulling away, be sure to visually check the selector lever position and the
shift indicator for safety reasons. If you always operate the selector lever while
pressing the push button, it is possible to accidentally shift the lever to the "P" or
"R" position in some cases. Get in the habit of shifting the selector lever from the
"N" to "D" or "D" to "N" position without pressing the push button.
• Do not operate the selector lever while pressing the accelerator pedal. Doing so
is dangerous because the vehicle will suddenly move.
• Immediately after engine startup, while the air conditioner is running in models
with an air conditioning system, the engine speed automatically rises, making
creep stronger than it is at other times. Keep the brake pedal firmly pressed.
ADVICE
[Essential points for safety]
• Even if you plan to drive only a short distance, adopt the correct driving position
and make sure you can firmly press the brake and accelerator pedals.
• When backing up the vehicle, you twist to look rearward so pedal operation
becomes difficult. Firmly press the brake pedal while twisting your body. Also,
get in the habit of immediately returning the selector lever to the "N" position
after backing up. When pulling away, visually check the selector lever position
and the shift indicator.
• When repeatedly shifting the selector lever between forward and reverse gears
for a multiple point turn or a K-turn, firmly press the brake pedal and confirm
that the vehicle is completely stopped before shifting the selector lever.
NOTE
• After the vehicle has been left for a week or more it may not start at once, even
when the accelerator pedal is pressed. In such cases, shift the selector lever to
the "P" position and wait for several seconds with the engine idling.


Actions that Can Lead to a Breakdown with an Automatic Transmission
Vehicle
Action that can lead to a breakdown Breakdown symptom
• Stopping the vehicle on an uphill road with the • Automatic transmission fluid
selector lever in a position other than "P" or "N", with overheats.
the engine gunned, and the brakes not applied.
• Pressing the accelerator pedal and brake pedal at the
same time.
• Operating the selector lever with the engine gunned • The automatic transmission
and the engine speed high. gears or clutch are
overloaded.
• Operating the selector lever to the "P" position before • The parking mechanism is
the wheels are completely stopped. damaged.
• Placing the starter switch in the "ACC" or "LOCK" • The automatic transmission
position while driving. is not properly lubricated.
• Keeping the selector lever in the "N" position on a
long downward slope. (This is dangerous due to the
lack of engine brake.)

Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Model

Four-wheel drive does not make it possible to drive a vehicle absolutely everywhere.
Exercise caution when using the accelerator pedal, steering wheel and brake pedal.
Concentrate on driving safely, paying attention to the condition and slope angle of the
road surface.
Driving on Snow-covered or Icy Roads

On a snow-covered or icy road, drive at a
constant speed and keep your speed low
enough to stay completely in control.
When applying the brakes, lightly push
the pedal several times rather than giving
it one hard push. A single hard push of
the pedal would be dangerous because it
could cause the vehicle to slip, making the
steering wheel useless.
ADVICE
• Use tire chains and winter tires on
snow-covered or icy roads.
Winter Tires → Refer to page 2-60

Driving in Sand or Mud

When driving in sand or mud, go as slowly
as possible, avoiding hard braking, sudden
acceleration and sharp turns of the steering
wheel.
It is difficult to ascertain the condition of the
road surface when you are driving on sand
or mud, so there is a risk of getting stuck.
When necessary, get out of the vehicle and
check the condition of the road surface.

Driving through Water
The vehicle is not completely impervious to
water. Avoid driving through water.
ADVICE
• If you cannot avoid driving through water, first check the depth of the water
and then drive through the water at a slow, constant speed. There is a risk
that water will get into the engine's cylinders and cause engine damage (water
hammering).
• If the vehicle must be driven through water, promptly have your Isuzu Dealer
perform a check for the following points:
- Effectiveness of the brakes
- Water-ingress or damage to drum brakes, or disc brakes
- Engine damage due to water-ingress
- Shorting of electrical components
- Oil level and degradation (cloudiness) of the engine, transmission, differential
and transfer case
- Greasing of each components (lubrication)
U-turn on Sharp Slopes

When making a U-turn on a sharp slope,
the vehicle is in danger of turning over the
moment it crosses the slope. Drive carefully
selecting the road surfaces so that the tires
on the higher side of the slope may not run
on any convex part of the slope surface.

Guidelines for Switching between 2WD (Rear-Wheel Drive)

and 4WD (Four-Wheel Drive)
Drive type 2WD 4WD
2H 4H (4WD high) 4L (4WD low)
4WD switch
Indicator
OFF
light
Model with
MID* 2H 4H 4L
Wet roads, snow- Steep slopes, rough
covered roads, icy roads, sand, mud or
During normal driving
Driving roads, and other roads deep snow, and other
on an ordinary road or
conditions where the vehicle roads where the vehicle
highway.
needs more traction needs significant
than 2WD. traction.
*: When the 4WD switch has been operated in each position, it will be displayed on the
MID for approximately 3 seconds.
ADVICE
• Do not set the 4WD switch midway between the "2H" and "4H" positions or the
"4H" and "4L" positions. Doing so could cause a malfunction.

Stopping and Parking
Parking
ADVICE
• Choose a flat place where stopping and parking are permitted and where the
vehicle will not obstruct traffic. Firmly apply the parking brake and make sure
the vehicle does not move.
• Avoid parking for long periods with cargo on the vehicle.
• Remove all dirt from the vehicle's light lenses and reflectors to ensure that the
vehicle can be seen from other vehicles.
Applying the Parking Brake
ADVICE
• Except in an emergency, do not apply the parking brake until the vehicle has
come to a complete stop. Applying the parking brake before the vehicle has
stopped can cause a breakdown.
Parking Brake Lever


Parking Safely on a Slope
CAUTION
• Avoid parking your vehicle on a
slope as much as possible and
choose a level and flat place. If it is
unavoidable to park your vehicle on
a slope, be sure to set the parking
brake fully, make sure that the
vehicle does not move, and block
the wheels with chocks for added
safety. For a manual transmission
model, also leave the vehicle in
gear to further ensure that it will not
move.
• Leave the steering wheel turned such
that the vehicle will be stopped by an
obstruction (for example, the curb) in
the unlikely event that it moves.

Parking in Cold Regions
When snow collects around the wheels and
lights, try to remove it before night falls.
Do not apply the parking brake in cold
regions. If you leave the parking brake
applied, the wires and brake shoes could
freeze up, making it impossible for you to
release the parking brake. Be sure to park
the vehicle in gear.
For manual transmission models, be
sure to park the vehicle by shifting the
gearshift lever into the "1 (1st gear)" or "R
(reverse)" position when in a flat location.
For automatic transmission models, shift
the selector lever into the "P" position,
check whether "P" is indicated on the shift
indicator, park the vehicle in a flat location
and then stop the engine.
Be sure to put chocks against the tires.
CAUTION
• If you park in a place where there is a lot of snowfall, snow accumulating around
the vehicle could limit ventilation. Running the engine with the vehicle in these
conditions could cause exhaust gases to enter the cabin, resulting in carbon-
monoxide poisoning. Take preventive action by, for example, clearing the snow
around the vehicle.

Napping in the Vehicle
WARNING
Before taking a nap in the vehicle, be
sure to stop the engine and place the
starter switch in the "LOCK" position.
Otherwise, any unintended contact
with the gearshift lever/selector lever
or accelerator pedal while you are
asleep could cause the vehicle to
move, resulting in an accident.
• If you leave the engine running and
unintentionally keep the accelerator
pedal pressed while asleep, the
engine and exhaust pipe could
become abnormally hot, resulting in
a fire.
• If you leave the engine running while
taking a nap with the vehicle parked
in a place where exhaust gases
could get into the cab (for example,
a place that is poorly ventilated),
you could suffer carbon monoxide
poisoning, resulting in death.

Keep Flammable Material Away from the Vehicle
WARNING
• After driving through tall grass, mud,
rocks, sand, water, etc., check that
there is no grass, branches, paper,
rags, stones, sand, etc., adhering to
or trapped under the vehicle body.
If the vehicle is operated with these
materials trapped or adhering to the
underbody, a failure or fire could
occur. Clear off any such matter from
Flammable the underbody.
material
• The diesel particulate defuser
(DPD), muffler, and exhaust pipe
are extremely hot while the engine
is idling, or immediately after vehicle
operation. In order to prevent fires,
make sure the surrounding area
is free of flammable material (for
example, grass, waste paper, oil or
old tires). Take particular care when
parking in a garage.
• Use caution concerning hot exhaust
gases while the engine is idling, or
immediately after the engine has
been stopped. Otherwise, you could
be burned.
Stopping and Parking with the Engine Running
WARNING
• When stopping and parking with the engine running: If your vehicle is the
manual transmission model, be sure to place the gearshift lever in the "N"
position to select neutral. If your vehicle is the automatic transmission model, be
sure to place the selector lever in the "P" position and check that "P" is indicated
in the shift indicator. Then, firmly apply the parking brake. Unless you take
these steps, any unintended pressure on the accelerator pedal could cause an
accident.

Do not Touch the Gearshift Lever/Selector Lever

while the Vehicle is Stationary with the Engine Idling
WARNING
• Do not touch the gearshift lever/selector lever while the vehicle is stationary
with the engine idling. If you touch the gearshift lever/selector lever at this time,
a gear could be selected and the vehicle could move even with the parking
brake applied. The risk of knocking against the gearshift lever/selector lever and
causing an accident is particularly great when you move in or out of your seat.
Be Sure to Have the Engine Running

when the Vehicle is Moving
CAUTION
• When the engine is not running, the power steering system does not work
so the steering wheel is hard to turn. Also, the brake booster does not work
so there is little braking ability. If you coast down a slope without the engine
running, you would not be able to properly control the vehicle and could have
an accident.
Look Around before Opening a Door
CAUTION
• Before opening a door, check the
area around the vehicle by looking
forward, rearward and to the sides.
If you suddenly open a door without
checking the surrounding area,
the door could be hit by a vehicle
behind you or a pedestrian.

Leaving the Vehicle
WARNING
• When leaving the vehicle, be sure to apply the parking brake, stop the engine
and lock the doors. Do not leave valuables where they can be seen from
outside the vehicle.
• If you are traveling with a child, do not leave the child alone in the vehicle. If the
child touches the controls or equipment, an accident could occur. (For example,
the vehicle could move or a fire could start.) Also, the cab inside could become
dangerously hot in hot weather.
• Do not leave eyeglasses or a lighter in the vehicle. If the cab inside becomes
hot, a lighter left there could explode and plastic eyeglass lenses or frames
could deform or crack.
• Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running. If the engine
should overheat, you would not be there to react to the engine overheat warning
light or engine coolant temperature gauge. This could result in costly damage to
your vehicle and its contents.
Starting to Drive When the Vehicle Has Been Parked

Before pulling away, perform a thorough
safety check, making sure there are no
children or obstructions around the vehicle.
Reversing
If you cannot see the area behind your
vehicle well enough to confirm it is safe to
back up, get out of the vehicle and check
behind it.

Pulling Away after a Temporary Stop
CAUTION
• Make it a habit to look around and
confirm that it is safe to pull away
after a temporary stop (at traffic
lights, for example).

Cautions for Driving in Hot Regions

The engine will be prone to overheating
in an environment where the ambient
temperature is high. To prevent the engine
from overheating, pay attention to the
following points:
CAUTION
• Do not put well water, river water
or other hard water in the engine
cooling system. It would hasten the
formation of rust and scale.
If foreign matter (insects, mud, etc.)

gets stuck in the radiator's air passages,
the cooling system's performance will
deteriorate. Check the air passages for
clogging, and remove any foreign matter
using tap water.
Handling the Radiator and Intercooler
ADVICE
• When the ambient temperature is
high, evaporation of battery fluid will
become quicker. Frequently check
the battery fluid level and, when
necessary, add more fluid.
Checking the Battery Fluid Level


Cautions for Driving in Cold Regions

The following cautions apply to snowbound
regions and to mountainous regions, ski
resorts and other areas of extreme cold
and/or snowfall. Please use them also for
Winter reference in winter in other regions.
preparation For the sake of your vehicle, have your
kit Isuzu Dealer make the winter preparations
described hereafter. Also have these
preparations made before driving to a cold
region.
Engine Coolant → Refer to page 6-30
Windshield Washer Fluid
Handling the Battery
Engine Oil → Refer to page 6-20
Winter Tires → Refer to page 2-60
WARNING
• Snow or obstructions surrounding the vehicle could limit ventilation. Running
the engine with the vehicle in such a situation could cause exhaust gases to
enter the cab, resulting in carbon monoxide poisoning or death. Take preventive
action, for example, by clearing any snow or obstructions around the vehicle.
CAUTION
• Do not cover the front of the radiator with newspapers, cardboard or any other
flammable material to raise the engine coolant temperature.
• If you allow the engine to warm up but the engine coolant temperature does not
rise, have the nearest Isuzu Dealer inspect the thermostat.
Fuel → Refer to page 2-59

Protection of Engine against Overcooling
Overcooling of the engine not only accelerates wear of the vital engine parts but also
deteriorates fuel economy.
Engine Coolant
To prevent the engine damage due to
freezing of the engine coolant and to
protect the cooling system from corrosion,
mix the coolant and water to be an
appropriate concentration.
Replace damaged rubber hoses as the
engine coolant becomes liable to leak even
past minor cracks when the engine coolant
solution is used.
Preparing Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
The engine oil tends to harden with lowering temperatures. Use engine oil with a
viscosity suited to ambient temperature.
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and
Diesel Fuels → Refer to page 6-111
Engine Oil and Gear Oil Viscosity
Charts → Refer to page 6-114
Fuel
If you drive to a cold region in winter while using diesel fuel for warmer regions
that freezes at a relatively high temperature, the fuel may freeze. As the ambient
temperature decreases, the fuel in the fuel tank and pipes may freeze like slush,
making the engine hard to start.
NOTE
• The specifications of diesel fuel differ according to the season and region.

When Ice Prevents You from Putting the Key in the Door or
Opening the Door
If you try to force the key into the door, you
could bend it. And if you try to pull the door
open with undue force, the rubber seal
around the door could come unstuck or
become damaged. Use warm water to melt
the ice, then quickly wipe it away and open
the door.
If the wipers, electric door mirrors, or
power windows freeze up, also use warm
water to melt the ice and then operate the
system. Otherwise, you could damage the
mechanism and drain the battery. After
that, wipe the water away.
Winter Tires
Cross section of Use winter tires of the same sizes as the
winter tire standard tires. Also, use wheels of the
same size as those with the standard tires.
A winter tire has reached its wear limit
when the tread grooves have worn to half
of the depth of the new tire. At this time,
platforms indicating that the tire can no
Platform longer give adequate performance on snow
become visible in the grooves. Replace
the tire with a new one.
CAUTION
• Avoid sharp turns of the steering wheel and hard braking. Use the engine brake
to decelerate. When applying the brakes on snowy or icy road, lightly press the
pedal several times rather than giving it one hard press. A single hard press of
the pedal would be dangerous because it could cause the vehicle to slip or skid.
• Avoid driving at high speeds on a dry road with winter tires.
• Comply with local legal requirements when using winter tires.

Cleaning the Vehicle after Driving on Snowy Roads
CAUTION
• Remove snow that has stuck to
the inside of the fenders and to
the brake hoses. Otherwise, it
may damage components. After
driving on a salted road, wash the
underside of the vehicle as soon
as possible to prevent the salt from
causing rust. Spraying water under
high pressure is an effective way to
get the salt off.
• After washing the vehicle, wipe the
door openings dry.
ADVICE
• The vehicle speed sensors are fitted on the wheels. When removing snow, ice
and other incrustation, take great care not to damage the components.
• Do not use a sharp implement to remove snow. Sharp edges could damage
rubber parts.


Staying Safe
When the Engine Coolant is Hot
WARNING
• Do not loosen or remove the radiator
cap while the engine coolant is
hot. Doing so would be dangerous
because steam and hot air would
shoot out.
When the Engine Overheats

When the Muffler and Exhaust Pipe are Hot
CAUTION
• The DPD, muffler, and exhaust pipe are extremely hot while the engine is
running, during DPD regeneration, and immediately after vehicle operation. Be
careful not to inadvertently touch them. Otherwise, you could be burned.
Do not Allow Your Hands to Become Trapped in the Side

Access Panel (Extended Cab Model)
WARNING
• When riding in the cargo bed, do
not place your hands near the side
access panels since there is a risk of
injury when the side access panels
close.

After Using the Ashtray
WARNING
• Be sure to close the ashtray lid
after using the ashtray. Otherwise,
any unextinguished cigarette butt
could set fire to other cigarette butts,
resulting in a fire.
• Do not allow the ashtray to become
overly full of cigarette butts. Also,
do not put flammable material in the
ashtray.
• Never throw lit cigarette butts out the
window. They not only litter the road
and around but also can cause a
roadside fire.
Ashtray → Refer to page 5-33
Do not Attach Accessories to the Windshield or Windows
WARNING
• Do not attach ornaments, films or
other accessories to the windshield
or windows. They would impair
visibility. Also, any plastic suction
cups used to attach accessories
could cause a fire or other accident
by acting as lenses.

Do not Use a Mobile Telephone while Driving
CAUTION
• Drivers should never use mobile
telephones or car phones in any
mode other than Hands Free while
driving. Doing so is dangerous.
• Using a mobile telephone while
driving could result in an accident
because you would not be paying
full attention to your surroundings.
• If you are driving and you wish to
use a mobile telephone, first stop
the vehicle in a safe place.
Using the Jack
WARNING
• Jacking up a vehicle on slope or soft
ground is extremely dangerous. Be
sure to jack up the vehicle on a firm,
level surface.
• Set the jack in the correct position.
Do not forget to first apply the
parking brake and place chocks
around the wheels.
• When a rear wheel is jacked up, the
parking brake has no effect. Failing
to first put chocks in the correct
places would be dangerous because
the vehicle could move.
• It might start moving when the
engine power is transmitted to the
rear axle even when one of the
wheels on the axle is raised clear of
the ground. Do not start the engine
with any rear wheel in contact with
the ground.
WARNING (Continued)

WARNING (Continued)
• Do not get under a vehicle and no
person should place any portion
of their body under a vehicle that
supported by a jack. Failure to
observe this precaution could lead to
an accident if the jack were to slip.

If the Battery Goes Flat
CAUTION
• Do not try to start the engine by
pushing or towing the vehicle. You
could damage the engine.
When the Battery Goes Flat


Preventing Breakdowns
For Manual Transmission Model, Do not Rest Your Foot on

the Clutch Pedal while Driving
ADVICE
• If you rest your foot on the clutch
pedal while driving, the clutch could
partially disengage without you
realizing it, causing the clutch plates
to wear and the clutch to slip. Also,
do not slip the clutch as a way to
hold the vehicle in position (instead
of using the brakes) on, for example,
an uphill road.
Do not Ride on the Side Steps while the Vehicle is

in Motion
WARNING
• Do not ride on the side steps while
the vehicle is in motion.
ADVICE
• Do not jump up and down on the
side steps. Doing so may place
unnecessary force onto the side
steps, resulting in damage.

Is the Engine Oil Dirty?
ADVICE
• The engine oil performs the
following important functions:
- It prevents engine parts from
becoming worn.
- It cools engine parts.
- It cleans engine parts.
- It seals the combustion chambers
and prevents rust.
Replace the engine oil at regular
intervals.
Daily Checks (Preoperational Checks)

Maintenance Schedule
Do not Leave the Steering Wheel Fully Turned

for a Long Time
WARNING
• If you leave the steering wheel fully
turned for a long time, the oil in
the power steering oil pump would
become extremely hot. This would
cause poor lubrication, oil tank
damage and seal deterioration,
leading to power steering oil pump
damage, power steering unit damage
and power steering hose damage.
As a result the steering wheel could
become extremely hard to turn and a
fire or other accident could occur.

Make Sure the Vehicle is Inspected at Regular Intervals
ADVICE
• Inspections and maintenance
enable you to use the vehicle with
peace of mind. They also extend
the vehicle's service life.


When to Visit Your Isuzu Dealer
Do not Modify the Vehicle
WARNING
• Modification of the suspension/chassis with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc.
can cause interference with the steering wheel operation and/or vehicle
performance, leading to an accident.
CAUTION
• Attaching parts that are not suitable for the vehicle's performance and functions
could lead to a breakdown or accident. For adjustments (for example, engine
adjustments) and equipment installation, consult your Isuzu Dealer.
• If you wish to attach accessories to the vehicle, consult your Isuzu Dealer.
Have Engine Adjustments Made by Your Isuzu Dealer
CAUTION
• Do not make engine adjustments
yourself.
Be sure to consult your Isuzu
Dealer.

Electric Welding
ADVICE
• Careless electric welding of vehicle parts can cause welding current to flow
back through the vehicle's ground circuit and damage electrical and electronic
parts so that they do not function normally. Whenever electric welding is
necessary, consult your Isuzu Dealer.
Replacing Tires and Wheels
CAUTION
• Consult your Isuzu Dealer before
replacing tires or wheels. Never
use wheels that are not designed for
the vehicle, tires of different types at
the same time or tires that are not
the specified size. Doing so would
impede safe vehicle operation.
Wheels and Tires → Refer to page 6-51


Installing Electrical Equipment
CAUTION
• Inappropriate installation or removal
Navigation
system of audio, radio or other electrical
equipment can adversely affect
other electrical equipment and
cause a breakdown or fire. It can
also cause unexpected, dangerous
airbag deployment. Be sure to have
electrical equipment installed or
removed by your Isuzu Dealer.
ADVICE
[Installation of radio equipment]
• Do not install any unauthorized radio set, or any radio set or antenna that
does not comply with relevant standards. Noise from the radio set could cause
electromagnetic interference with the vehicle's electronic equipment and other
systems, resulting in a vehicle breakdown or in a malfunction of electronic
equipment. Consult your Isuzu Dealer if you wish to install radio equipment.

Using Tire Chains

When handling, installing and uninstalling tire chains, refer to the instruction manual
that is supplied with the tire chains and perform (un)installation following the
instructions provided by the manufacturer.
CAUTION
• Fit the tire chains securely without looseness. If the vehicle is driven with the
loosened tire chains, they may interfere with other components or come off,
leading to an unexpected accident.
• Do not exceed 30 km/h (19 MPH) or exceed the tire chain manufacturer's
suggested speed limit if it is lower than 30 km/h (19 MPH).
• If an abnormal sound is heard, it may indicate a possibility that a tire chain was
cut or came off partially. Immediately pull off to a safe place, and check the
fitting condition of the tire chains.
• The exhaust pipe and muffler are extremely hot when the engine is running or
immediately after the vehicle is driven, so be careful not to touch them.
• Be careful not to hurt yourself on the edges of the vehicle while working with the
tire chains.
ADVICE
• Do not install tire chains on the front tires. Make sure to fit the tire chains
suitable for the tire size on the rear wheels.
• If your vehicle has 255/65R17 size tires, do not use tire chains. They can
damage your vehicle because there is not enough clearance.
• Use tire chains that conform to the following specifications:
- Radial thickness 13 mm (0.5 in) Max
- Axial thickness 13 mm (0.5 in) Max
• When purchasing tire chains, fit them on the tires once and, if they are too long,
adjust them to suit the tires.
• Retighten chains after driving 0.4 to 0.8 km (0.25 to 0.5 miles).

Diesel Particulate Defuser (DPD)

The DPD purifies diesel exhaust gases of particulate matter (PM). PM is filtered from
the exhaust gas and accumulated in the DPD. When PM accumulates to a level
predetermined by the engine control module, the DPD automatically burns the PM in a
process called regeneration. Regeneration may not be completed under certain driving
conditions. If this occurs, the DPD operator regeneration indicator light will flash to
prompt for the completion of DPD regeneration.
WARNING
• The DPD, muffler, and exhaust pipe are extremely hot while the engine is
running, during DPD regeneration, and immediately after vehicle operation. Be
careful not to inadvertently touch them. Otherwise, you could be burned.
• After driving through tall grass, mud, rocks, sand, water, etc., check that there
is no grass, branches, paper, rags, stones, sand, etc., adhering to or trapped
under the vehicle body. If the vehicle is operated with these materials trapped or
adhering to the underbody, a failure or fire could occur. Clear off any such matter
from the underbody.
• Before doing maintenance work on the vehicle, shut down the engine and allow
it to cool down. Otherwise, you could be burned.
ADVICE
• Always use low ash content engine oil. Also, do not use engine oil additives.
Failing to do so could result in DPD failure.
• Be sure to use extra-low-sulfur diesel fuel (containing sulfur of 10 ppm or lower).
• If you fill the vehicle with poor-quality fuel, water-removing additive or other
additive, gasoline, kerosene or alcohol-based fuel, it could harm the fuel filter,
prevent proper movement of fuel-lubricated parts in the injectors and adversely
affect engine components, possibly resulting in a breakdown.
• Do not modify the DPD, muffler, and exhaust pipe. Changing the alignment,
length or diameter of the exhaust pipe would adversely affect the exhaust
system's exhaust emission reduction function. If any modification is necessary
to install a component to the rear of the vehicle, consult your Isuzu Dealer.
ADVICE (Continued)

ADVICE (Continued)
• The DPD performs regeneration automatically when a certain amount of PM
accumulates in the DPD. Regeneration occurs during driving and the DPD
operator regeneration indicator light does not come on during regeneration.
Depending upon driving conditions, however, the regeneration may sometimes
not be completed. In this case, the DPD operator regeneration indicator light will
flash, so perform operator regeneration as soon as possible according to the
"Operator Regeneration Procedure". This operation recovers the function of the
DPD. It does not mean that a failure has occurred.
• If the engine idles continuously over an extended period of time, the DPD
operator regeneration indicator light may flash. In this case, perform operator
regeneration as soon as possible according to the "Operator Regeneration
Procedure".
NOTE
• During regeneration, white smoke may be temporarily produced from the
exhaust pipe. This results from combustion of PM and does not indicate a
failure.
• Owing to the exhaust emission reduction function, the exhaust gases emitted
by the exhaust pipe smell different from those emitted by the exhaust pipes of
earlier diesel vehicles.
• A long continuous idling can cause white smoke to be briefly emitted from the
exhaust pipe. The white smoke does not indicate a failure.


Inspection and Maintenance
Performing regular inspections and maintenance prevents damage. Be sure to
perform inspections and maintenance at regular intervals. Also, quickly rectify any fault
in the vehicle (even a small fault) to prevent it from becoming more serious.
If a symptom shown in the following table occurs, perform inspections and take
corrective action in accordance with the table.
If you are unable to perform a repair, the corrective action shown in the table does not
eliminate a symptom or you cannot locate a fault, contact the nearest Isuzu Dealer.
Reference
Symptom Cause Corrective action
page
Allow the engine to
Engine not sufficiently warming up ―
warm up.
Too much engine oil Correct the oil level. 6-20
Engine control system faulty ―
Fuel system faulty ―
White
exhaust With the vehicle
smoke stationary in a place
where it will not
Continuous idling for a long period obstruct traffic, hold
―
(more than 2 hours) down the accelerator
pedal and check that
white smoke is not
emitted.
Engine control system faulty —
Clean or replace the 6-38
Black The air cleaner clogged
element. 6-40
exhaust
Fuel system faulty ―
smoke
Exhaust system clogged ―
DPD faulty ―
ADVICE
• Any item for which there is a in the "Corrective action" column requires
repairs and adjustments. Contact the nearest Isuzu Dealer.

Speed Limit Device
Characteristics of the Speed Limit Device

The speed limit device restricts excessive speed to prevent a serious accident.
Set speed
180 km/h (112 MPH)
CAUTION
• The speed limit device does not control braking, so it is possible for the vehicle
to exceed the set speed on downhill slopes.
NOTE
• The speed limit device restricts the vehicle's speed by controlling the fuel
injection volume. It prevents the speed from exceeding a certain, predetermined
level regardless of the pressure on the accelerator pedal.

Front Seat Belt with Pretensioner and SRS Airbag System

The front seat belt with pretensioner and
supplemental restraint system (SRS)
airbag system is activated in the event of
a frontal collision when the impact energy
exceeds a certain level to help mitigate the
shock to the driver and the passenger by
firmly restraining the body of the occupant
in the seat with the front seat belt with
pretensioner and front airbag. In addition,
in models with side airbag and curtain
airbag, the front seat belt with pretensioner,
side airbag and curtain airbag are activated
in the event of a lateral collision when the
impact energy exceeds a certain level to
help mitigate the shock on the head and
chest of the driver and the passenger by
firmly restraining the body of the occupant
in the seat, and the curtain airbag is
activated to mitigate the shock on the head
of the occupant sitting in the outboard
seats of the models with the rear seat.
Be sure to observe the following
instructions to prevent you and your
passenger from suffering a serious or fatal
injury due to impacts resulting from the
front seat belt with pretensioner and airbag
operation.

WARNING
• Before driving the vehicle, properly adjust your seat for proper driving position
and wear the seat belt correctly. Do not sit closer than necessary to the steering
wheel and do not lean over it. (Leave a space of 25 cm (10 in) or more between
your chest and the center of the steering wheel.) Do not allow the passenger
to put his/her hands or feet on the instrument panel and to sit with his/her face
or chest close to it. When the airbags are activated, you or the passenger may
suffer a burn on or serious injury to the arm or face.
• In models with side airbag and curtain airbag, do not lean against the door and
roof side. When the airbags are activated, you may suffer a burn on or serious
injury to the arm or face.
• Do not drive the vehicle with something placed between you and airbag or held
on your lap. If the airbag inflates, the objects may be thrown and hit your face.
Doing so also hinders normal activation of the airbag, which is dangerous.
• Be sure to observe the following precautions when carrying a child in the
vehicle. Otherwise the child may be fatally injured by the impact from an inflating
airbag.
- Do not drive with a child standing in front of any of the airbags, or sitting on
your lap. Doing so is dangerous as the child would receive a very strong
impact due to an inflating airbag.
- Do not install a rear-facing infant or child restraint system (CRS) on the
passenger seat. An inflating passenger's airbag could cause the child to be
fatally injured.

Front Seat Belt with Pretensioner and
SRS Airbag System

Sticker WARNING
• If you make unauthorized
modifications to the vehicle or install
an unauthorized accessory, the
front seat belt with pretensioner and
airbag may not operate correctly.
• If the steering wheel is changed to
a non-standard one or a sticker is
attached to the steering wheel pad,
there could be a danger of system
Air freshener malfunction or the sticker flying off
in the event of system activation.
Attaching stickers or placing
such things as accessories or air
fresheners on the top surface of the
instrument panel is also dangerous.
Sticker
They may prevent normal operation
of the airbag or could fly off in the
event of system activation.
• In models with side airbag and
curtain airbag, do not attach seat
covers under any circumstances. If
a seat cover is attached or objects
are placed in the area in which the
side airbag inflates, the side airbag
will not function correctly. Also,
there could be a danger of objects
flying off in the event of the system
activation. In addition, if hard objects
Hook Grip such as hangers or accessories are
attached to the grip or coat hook,
they may prevent normal operation
of the curtain airbag and could fly off
WARNING (Continued)
Hook

WARNING (Continued)
• Do not apply excessive force to nor
strongly hit the airbag installation
area or the base of the b-pillar. Doing
so may result in erroneous activation
of the airbag or the front seat belt
with pretensioner.
• Doing any of the following may
require special precautions. Be sure
to consult your Isuzu Dealer before
doing any of the following. Failure to
do so may cause the front seat belt
with pretensioner and airbag to be
unduly activated, causing the seat
belt to be unexpectedly retracted or
the airbag to be suddenly inflated,
causing an injury to the occupant.
Doing any of them improperly will
adversely affect the operation of the
system, causing a malfunction or
failure.
- Repair or replacement of the
steering wheel, instrument panel,
center console, parts around
the accelerator pedal, front seat
(in models with side airbag and
curtain airbag), parts around the
roof side (in models with side
airbag and curtain airbag), and
parts around the base of the
b-pillar.
- Repair, replacement or disposal
of the front seat belt with
pretensioner and airbag, or
scrapping of a model that has
front seat belt with pretensioner
and airbag.
- When audio equipment and
accessories are installed or
modification such as body
mounting is carried out.
WARNING (Continued)

WARNING (Continued)
- Making modifications to the front
of the vehicle (bumper, frame,
etc.), installing equipment (snow
plows, etc.), making modifications
to the frame, or making changes
to the vehicle's height using
unauthorized methods and/or
materials.
- Repairing or painting of panels at
the front of the vehicle or panels
on the cab.

Vehicle Data Collection

Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a number of sophisticated computer
systems that monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle's performance. Your
vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor emission control components to
optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions for airbag deployment, to provide anti-lock
braking and to help the driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations. Some
information may be stored during regular operations to facilitate repair of detected
malfunctions.
Isuzu may download and retrieve stored information for the purpose of diagnosing,
servicing, or repairing your motor vehicle or improvement to future Isuzu motor
vehicles.
Turbocharger
Engine Starting in General

The turbocharged engine should be started in a way which ensures the bearings
supporting the rotating parts of the turbocharger are sufficiently lubricated. Do not race
a cold engine.
Engine Shut-off in General
ADVICE
• After driving for an extended period of time with a heavy load, it is
recommended that you idle the engine for a few minutes to cool it down, and
then turn off the engine. This allows the turbocharger to return to idle speed.
Engine oil pressure is available for lubrication at this time and will prolong the
life of the turbocharger bearings.

PRE-DRIVING OPERATIONS AND
ADJUSTMENTS
3
● Key 3-2
● Key with Immobilizer Transponder Chip 3-4
● Keyless Entry System (Radio Remote Control Units for

3-7
Door-lock)
● Anti-theft System 3-12

● Opening and Closing Doors 3-15
● Child-proof Door Locks (Crew Cab Model) 3-22
● Tailgate 3-23
● Getting In and Out of the Vehicle 3-26
● Power Windows 3-27
● Manually Operated Windows 3-32
● Fuel Tank Filler Cap 3-33
● Seats 3-36
● Tilt Steering 3-45
● Mirrors 3-46
● Seat Belts 3-48
● Child Restraint System (CRS) 3-55
● Front Seat Belt with Pretensioner and SRS Airbag System 3-67
4510393_sec03_PRE-DRIVING OPERAT3-1 3-1 2015/01/16 9:07:55

3-2 PRE-DRIVING OPERATIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Key
Type 1 Both sides of the key are identical, so you
Main key can insert the key in the starter switch
without worrying about which way you
insert it.
The key number is indicated on a separate
metal plate in order to prevent it from being
Spare key acquired by an unauthorized person.
Metal plate with

key number
NOTE
• The number of keys and their
Type 2
combinations depend on the model
Main key
of vehicle.
Spare key
Metal plate with

key number

PRE-DRIVING OPERATIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS 3-3
Where Is the Key Used?
Where For what
Starter switch Starting and stopping the engine
Front door Locking and unlocking the doors
Tailgate (with key lock) Locking and unlocking the tailgate
Fuel tank filler cap (with key lock) Locking and unlocking the filler cap
Glove compartment Locking and unlocking the glove compartment
Locking and unlocking the child-proof door
Rear door (crew cab model)
locks
Disconnect the anchor buckle and anchor
Rear center seat belt (crew cab model)
latch plate
ADVICE
• Wipe off the key to remove any dirt or dust, etc. before using it.
NOTE
• To prevent theft, store the metal plate with key number in a safe place other
than the vehicle.
• Should you lose the key, please give the key number and all remaining keys
supplied with the vehicle to the nearest Isuzu Dealer. The Isuzu Dealer will be
able to duplicate your key.
• If you resell the vehicle, be sure to hand over the plate with key number to the
new owner together with the vehicle.

Key with Immobilizer Transponder Chip

The immobilizer key contains an immobilizer transponder chip.
The immobilizer anti-theft system allows the engine to be started only when it receives
signals from the transponder of the pre-registered key.
NOTE
• When the starter switch is turned to the "ON" position, verification of the
transponder chip will be performed. If the verification is successful, it will
become possible to start the engine. Also, after the starter switch is turned
from the "ON" position to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position and a maximum
of approximately 30 seconds has passed, it will be necessary to perform
verification again in order to start the engine.

However, even when using the pre-registered key, you might not be able to start the
engine in the cases listed below. If the engine fails to start due to a metal key holder,
remove the key holder and then try again.
Metal key holder etc. • There is a facility nearby that is

emitting strong radio waves.
• A metallic object is touching or
covering the handle of the key.
• Placing items which interfere with the
immobilizer signal onto the key grip.
(Ex. key ring, key number plate, metal
Metal key ring etc.
items, magnetic items)
• Another vehicle's transponder key

is near your key (Includes an Isuzu
spare key and other keys).
Another vehicle's
transponder key

ADVICE
• Should you lose your transponder
key, contact the nearest Isuzu
Dealer.
• Do not leave the transponder key on
the dashboard or any other surface
where the key might be exposed to
high temperatures (exceeding 60°C
/140°F).
• Do not place a magnetic object
close to the transponder key.
• No alterations or additions should
be made to the immobilizer system,
as such alteration or additions
would automatically invalidate the
certificate of installation.
• For starting the engine, use only the
Isuzu immobilizer keys which are
registered to the immobilizer system
in your vehicle. Do not use copied
keys or any other keys.
• Do not break the key.
• Do not try to open the key grip.
(Except replacing the battery in
remote control unit.)
• Do not dip the key into water or any
other liquid.
• Do not wash the key with ultrasonic.
NOTE
• The immobilizer system does not lock the doors so please do not forget to lock
the doors when you get out of the vehicle.
• If the starter will not turn even though key usage is correct and the condition of
the battery is normal, there may be a failure of the immobilizer system. If this
occurs, contact the nearest Isuzu Dealer.

Keyless Entry System
(Radio Remote Control Units for Door-lock)
WARNING
• No alterations or additions should be made to the keyless entry system (radio
remote control units for door-lock), as such alterations or additions would
automatically invalidate the certificate of installation.
NOTE
• Keyless entry system (EMU370001/radio remote control units for door-lock)
consists of TX (EMU370101), RF unit (EMU370501), and BCM (EMU370851).
Remote control operating range The keyless entry system (radio remote
control units for door-lock) allows you to
lock/unlock the doors by simply pressing
Approximately 10 m the remote control button rather than
(Approximately 33 ft)
inserting the key into the lock.
The remote control unit works within
approximately 10 m (approximately 33 ft)
radius of the vehicle center as indicated in
the figure.

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Remote control unit Locking
Press the lock button on the remote control
unit for 0.4 seconds or longer. When the
vehicle receives the signal, the hazard
warning flasher will flash once and all
Lock button the doors will lock. If the dome light or
map light is on with the switch in the door
position, the dome light or map light goes
out.
Unlock button
Unlocking
Press the unlock button on the remote
control unit for 0.4 seconds or longer. When
the vehicle receives the signal, the hazard
warning flasher will flash twice and all the
doors will unlock. If the doors are unlocked
with the dome light or map light switch in
the door position, the dome light or map
light comes on for about 30 seconds.

ADVICE
• Should you lose the remote control unit, please contact your Isuzu Dealer.
• After locking the doors using the remote control unit, be sure to check that they
are locked by pulling the door handles.
• Avoid getting water on the remote control unit, dropping it, hitting it against
another object, or stepping on it; otherwise, the remote control unit could
malfunction.
• The remote control unit is comprised of precision components. Do not
disassemble or subject the remote control unit to electrical shock.
• Do not leave the remote control unit on the dashboard or any other surface
where the unit might be exposed to high temperatures (exceeding 60°C/140°F).
Doing so may result in shorter battery life or malfunction of the remote control
unit.
• Repeatedly locking and unlocking the doors using the remote control unit in
succession may trigger the protection circuit in the system, preventing the
unit from working. If this happens, wait for a while. The system will then work
normally.
• If the keyless entry system (radio remote control units for door-lock) fails to
operate normally, lock and unlock the doors using the key and have the system
inspected by your Isuzu Dealer.
NOTE
• After unlocking the doors using the remote control unit, the door will
automatically relock in the following cases:
- The door is not opened within 30 seconds.
- The key is not inserted into the starter switch within 30 seconds.
• In areas near a TV tower, electric power plant, radio station, etc. or under any
conditions involving strong electrical disturbances, the remote control unit
operating range might change or the keyless entry system (radio remote control
units for door-lock) might not work.
• The keyless entry system (radio remote control units for door-lock) does not
operate in the following cases:
- The starter switch is in a position other than "LOCK".
- The key is inserted in the starter switch.
- One of the doors is open.

Replacing the Battery in the Remote Control Unit

Replace the battery as soon as the range of the remote control starts to become
reduced.
Battery used Number of battery

Lithium battery
Model number: CR1620 1
Voltage: DC3V
Cover 1. Remove the key ring and pry open

the cover by inserting a flat-head
screwdriver. Wrap a piece of cloth or
Battery tape around the tip of the screwdriver
cover so as not to damage the cover.
Remove the transmitter.
Transmitter
Key
Key ring
Battery 2. Open the battery cover and remove

cover the battery.
3. Insert a new battery and close the
Battery battery cover.
Battery
holder ADVICE
Transmitter • Be careful not to bend the electrode
when placing a new battery.
• When closing the battery cover and
key cover, check that there is no
dust, hair or anything else caught
underneath it. A poorly sealed
remote control unit could become
deteriorated.
4. Place the transmitter in the key and

close the cover.

CAUTION
• When changing the battery, use only a battery of the same type as the original
battery, or an equivalent. Otherwise, there is a risk of explosion.
• Do not place the battery in direct sunlight, or near a fire or other sources of
heat.
• Be sure to install the battery with the "+" side and the "-" sides correctly
oriented. Incorrect installation will result in leakage of chemicals from inside the
battery or other operational problems.
NOTE
• The battery life varies depending on how the remote control unit is used.
• The battery has reached its end of life when the remote control unit works
intermittently or does not work at all. Replace the battery as soon as this
happens.
• Please comply with the collection system available in your country for the
disposal of old batteries. In addition, take special care to prevent any danger to
children.
This symbol [crossed-out wheeled bin] provided in Directive 2006/66/EC of the
European Parliament and of the Council indicates separate collection of waste
batteries in the European Union countries.

Anti-theft System
WARNING
• No alterations or additions should be made to the anti-theft system, as
such alterations or additions would automatically invalidate the certificate of
installation.
When the vehicle doors and engine hood are locked, the anti-theft system is designed
to protect your vehicle and valuables from theft.
Any attempt to forcibly open any door, the engine hood without using the keyless entry
system (radio remote control units for door-lock) will cause the hazard warning flasher
to flash on and off and the horn to sound intermittently. After the system activates, the
hazard warning flasher will shut off automatically after 5 minutes, and the horn will shut
off after 30 minutes.
Please lock the door with the keyless entry system (radio remote control units for door-
lock) after closing all the doors and engine hood to arm the alarm system.
Activating the Anti-theft System

1. Turn the starter switch to "LOCK" position and remove the key.
2. Closing all the doors and the engine hood then locking all the doors with the
keyless entry system (radio remote control units for door-lock) will cause the
indicator light to come on.
3. After approximately 10 seconds, the indicator light will flash. The anti-theft system
is now in operation. (In models with super lock, the super lock system will be
activated immediately after it is initiated.)
Super Lock (Mechanical Anti-theft
Locking System) → Refer to page 3-14
Indicator Light
Indicator light During the first 10 seconds
Lights up System in preparation
Door, engine hood open or
Flashes
system fault
After approximately 10 seconds

Flashes System on
Goes off System off

CAUTION
• If a door is not closed completely, the map light or dome light will remain on.
The anti-theft system is not engaged at this time.
Anti-theft System Alarm Operating Conditions

When the anti-theft system is engaged, the alarm will operate under the following
conditions:
1. When someone forcibly attempts to open the door or engine hood without using
the keyless entry system (radio remote control units for door-lock).
2. When a key or other tool is inserted into the door key cylinder and a door is
unlocked.
3. When someone unlocks a door with the door lock button or power door lock
(central door lock) switch.
4. When the engine hood release lever is operated.
NOTE
• A person sitting in the vehicle or reaching into the vehicle through an open
window can cause the alarm to sound by inadvertently operating one of the
controls (Items 3 and 4 in "Anti-theft System Alarm Operating Conditions").
Deactivating the Anti-theft System and Alarm

When the door is unlocked using the keyless entry system (radio remote control units
for door-lock), the anti-theft system and alarm will be deactivated.
CAUTION
• If the indicator light is not functioning, have Isuzu Dealer correct the problem as
soon as possible.
NOTE
• If the key is inserted into the key cylinder and the doors are unlocked, the horn
will sound and the hazard warning flasher will flash on and off. To stop the horn
and hazard warning flasher, perform either of the following operations:
- Insert the key into the starter switch and turn it to the "ON" position.
- Operate the remote control unit.

Super Lock (Mechanical Anti-theft Locking System)

Locking
All doors must be closed; press the lock
button on the remote control unit again
within 10 seconds after locking. The hazard
warning lights flash twice only when the
super lock is activated by pressing the lock
button on the remote control unit twice.
Lock buttons on all doors are positioned
such that doors cannot be opened.
WARNING
• Do not use the system if there are
people in the vehicle. The doors
cannot be unlocked from inside.
Unlocking
Press unlock button on remote control unit.
The hazard warning lights flash.
CAUTION
• Unlocking is not possible in any
other way, so keep remote control to
hand in a safe place.
NOTE
• If you use the key to open the
vehicle door, the horn will sound and
the hazard warning lights will flash
on and off.
To stop the horn and hazard warning
lights, inserting the key in the starter
switch and turning it to the "ON"
position or pressing unlock button
on remote control will deactivate the
anti-theft system and alarm.

Opening and Closing Doors
CAUTION
• Be sure to do the following whenever you leave the vehicle: 1) Fully engage the
parking brake. 2) Stop the engine. 3) Lock the doors.
• When you close the door after sitting behind the steering wheel, check that
the door is fully closed. If the door is not properly closed, it may open while the
vehicle is in motion.
• Before opening the door when climbing into or out of the cab, carefully check
all areas around the vehicle for safety, especially the area at the rear of the
vehicle. If you abruptly open the door, it may be struck by a vehicle, etc. coming
from behind.
• Never leave the key in the vehicle.
NOTE
[Impact sensing auto door-unlocking function]
• Models with a keyless entry system (radio remote control units for door-lock)
also feature an impact sensing auto door-unlocking function that automatically
unlocks all the doors when the vehicle is subjected to a strong impact from the
front, left, or right side with the starter switch in the "ON" position.
• When the impact-sensing auto door-unlocking function activates, the hazard
warning flasher will flash to alert the driver of an abnormality at the same time.
In order to stop the hazard warning flasher, turn the starter switch to the "LOCK"
position once before turning the starter switch back to the "ON" position.
• However, depending on the manner in which the impact is applied, this function
may not activate.

Locking and Unlocking the Front Doors

Locking and Unlocking the Door
from Outside Using the Key
Turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle
to lock the door and turn it toward the front
Unlock of the vehicle to unlock it.
Lock
Key
NOTE
• In models with a power door lock (central door lock) system, all the doors will
lock/unlock when the key is used to lock/unlock the doors. However, even in
models with a power door lock (central door lock) system, only the driver side
door will lock/unlock in the case of models with a keyless entry system (radio
remote control units for door-lock).
• When leaving the vehicle, be sure to check that the doors are locked.

from Inside
Push the lock button forward until the red
mark can no longer be seen for lock and
pull the lock button backward for unlock.
Lock button
Lock
Unlock

Locking the Door from Outside
Lock button without Using the Key
First, push the lock button forward until the
red mark can no longer be seen, then close
the door while keeping the outside door
handle raised.
NOTE
Outside • Before closing the door, be sure to
door handle check that you have the key with
you.
Locking and Unlocking the Rear Doors (Crew Cab Model)

Lock button from Inside
Lock Push the lock button forward until the red
mark can no longer be seen for lock and
pull the lock button backward for unlock.
Unlock
Locking the Door from Outside

Lock button First, push the lock button forward until the
red mark can no longer be seen, then close
the door while keeping the outside door
handle raised.
Outside
door handle

Key Reminder Buzzer

If the driver's door is opened when the starter switch is in the "ACC" or "LOCK"
position, a buzzer will sound to warn that the key has not been removed. When the key
is removed, the warning buzzer will stop sounding.
Warning Buzzer → Refer to page 4-62
Power Door Lock (Central Door Lock)

How the Power Door Lock System
Operates
When the switch on the driver's door is
operated, the power door lock system
will automatically lock or unlock all doors
UNLOCK LOCK
simultaneously.
Key Linked Door Unlocking

Model with Keyless Entry System (Radio Remote Control Units for Door-
lock)
When the key is removed from the starter switch, all doors will be unlocked.
NOTE
• The key linked door unlocking setting can also be changed so that all doors are
unlocked when the starter switch is turned from the "ON" to "LOCK" position. To
change the setting, please contact your Isuzu Dealer.

Opening and Closing the Front Doors
From Outside the Vehicle
To open the door, pull the outside door
handle.
To close the door, push the outside door
handle.
Outside
door handle
From Inside the Vehicle

To open the door, pull the inside door
handle.
To close the door, pull the pull handle.
Pull ADVICE
Inside door
handle • Before leaving the vehicle, be sure
to stop the engine and lock the
Pull handle doors. Never leave the key behind
the door.

Opening and Closing the Side Access Panel

(Extended Cab Model)
CAUTION
• Before opening the side access panel, check that the passenger in the front
seat has removed his/her seat belt. If the side access panel is opened while the
seat belt is worn, the seat belt will lock and it will not be possible to pull it out.
The passenger in the front seat may become trapped and could be injured.
• Because it will not be possible to close the front door securely when the side
access panel is half-open, it may open while the vehicle is in motion.
ADVICE
• Do not open or close the side access panel while the front door is not
completely open. Otherwise, the side access panel may contact the front door
and could be damaged.
• Do not open or close the front door and side access panel at the same time.
Otherwise, the side access panel may contact the front door and could be
damaged.
• After closing the front door, do not close the side access panel. Otherwise, the
side access panel may contact the front door and could be damaged. Always
close the front door after first closing the side access panel.
NOTE
• The side access panel cannot be opened when the front door is closed.

To open the door, after first opening the
front door, pull the inside door handle and
open the side access panel.
To close the door, after closing the side
Inside door access panel, push the outside door handle
handle
of the front door and close the door.

Pull handle To open the door, push the inside door
handle while the front door is open.
To close the door, pull the pull handle while
the front door is open.
Opening and Closing the Rear Doors (Crew Cab Model)

To open the door, pull the outside door
handle.
To close the door, push the outside door
handle.
Outside
door handle

To open the door, pull the inside door
Inside handle.
door handle
To close the door, pull the pull handle.
Pull handle

Child-proof Door Locks (Crew Cab Model)

Use the locks if you are traveling with a
child in the vehicle. Use the key for the
child-proof function of the opening of the
Unlock Lock rear door, place it in the "LOCK" position
and close the door. Regardless of the
position of the lock button, it will no longer
Key be possible to open the rear door from
inside the vehicle.
When opening the rear door, check that the
lock button is in the lock release position
and use the outside door handle to open
the door.

Tailgate
CAUTION
• Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgate open.
Tailgate Latch
Side handle model To Open
Pull the handle on both sides of the tailgate
and release the lock. Open the tailgate
slowly.
NOTE
• The support stays will hold the
tailgate open level.
Center handle model Pull the handle in the center of the tailgate
and release the lock. Open the tailgate
slowly.
NOTE
• The support stays will hold the
tailgate open level.

Side handle model To Close

To close the tailgate, use the opening
procedure in reverse.
Check that the lock is applied securely.
Center handle model Close the tailgate.

Move the tailgate back and forth to check
that it is securely locked.

Tailgate Lock (with Key Lock)
Unlock Firmly insert the key.
Turn it to the left to lock the tailgate. Turn it
to the right to unlock the tailgate.
Lock
Rear Step Bumper

In models with a rear step bumper, use
the rear step bumper for easy loading and
unloading of cargo.
WARNING
• Do not allow more than one person
at a time to step on the rear step
bumper. The rear step bumper may
be damaged.
• Do not move the vehicle when there
is a person on the rear step bumper.
• Do not stand on the rear step
bumper when the vehicle is moving.
Guard Frame Stopper

When securing cargo to the guard frame,
use the guard frame stopper to prevent
these cargo from shifting. When using the
guard frame stopper, lift it up to the outside
of the vehicle.
Guard frame stopper CAUTION

• When securing cargo using the
guard frame, do not apply excessive
force.

Getting In and Out of the Vehicle
Grip (Only grip equipped model)

Carefully check that the area around the
vehicle is safe, hold the grip if the vehicle
model is equipped with grips, and when
getting in or out of a side step equipped
model, place your foot on the side step.
Plastic cover
Plastic cover
Side step
(Only side step equipped model)
CAUTION
• When getting in or out of the vehicle, make sure you use the grip and step, etc.
to always support yourself from at least 3 points. Furthermore, do not try to
jump in or out of the vehicle, as doing so could cause unexpected accidents or
injuries.
• In models with a side step, to avoid slipping over, do not step on the cover area
(plastic cover).
• Getting in or out of the vehicle with oily or greasy hands or shoes could cause
you to slip. Always thoroughly clean grease etc. from your hands and shoes
before getting in or out of the vehicle.
• In a model with side step, rain and snow can cause the side step to become
very slippery. Therefore, always remove snow and ice from your shoes and the
side step, and be careful not to slip when getting in and out of the vehicle.
• Exercise caution when opening or closing doors, as strong winds or steep
slopes may cause doors to open or close suddenly.
ADVICE
• Do not hold parts other than the grip when getting in or out of the vehicle. Doing
so may cause damage to the vehicle or injuries to yourself or others.

Power Windows
The power windows operate only when the starter switch is in the "ON" position. Open
each door window by pressing the power window switch; close each one by raising the
switch.
WARNING
• Before closing the windows, make sure that there is no risk of a hand, head or
anything else being trapped in the moving window. Failure to do so could result
in serious injury. This is especially true when a child is with you.
• Do not allow children to operate the power window. A child may become trapped
or stuck in the window and this could result in serious injury.
CAUTION
• When opening or closing the window, do not operate the driver side window
switch and the window switch of another door in the opposite direction at the
same time.
• After the window is fully open or closed, do not continue to operate the window
switch in the same direction.
NOTE
• When the battery has been reconnected, perform the following initialization
settings in order to operate the driver's power window properly.
- Open the driver's window halfway. Pull up the driver's window switch to
fully close the driver's window and then keep the switch in this position for 2
seconds.

Window Switches on Driver's Door
NOTE
• In models with a keyless entry system (radio remote control units for door-lock),
for approximately 40 seconds after the starter switch is turned to a position
other than the "ON" position, the driver's window can be opened or closed
using the window switches on the driver's door. However, if the driver's door
or passenger's door is opened, the window cannot be opened or closed, even
within this 40-second period.
To Open the Driver's Window

Lightly pressing the driver side window
switch will lower the driver's window until
the switch is released (manual mode).
When the switch is firmly pressed, the
Driver
side window will lower completely without the
need to press the switch continuously
(automatic mode). If you want to stop the
OPEN CLOSE automatic movement of the window before
Automatic Automatic
mode mode Manual it lowers completely, raise the switch lightly.
Manual mode
mode
Driver
side
To Close the Driver's Window
NOTE
• When a window is closed with
automatic mode, if any foreign
object is inserted between the
window frame and the window, a
jam protection function is equipped
that will stop operation and open the
window slightly to prevent objects
becoming trapped.

Lightly raising the driver side window switch
will cause the driver's window to move up
until the switch is released (manual mode).
When the switch is fully raised, the window
will automatically rise to the completely
closed position without the need to keep
the switch continuously raised (automatic
mode). If you want to stop the automatic
movement of the window before it moves
up completely, press the switch lightly.
WARNING
• Do not attempt to insert hand or place your head between the window and
the window frame in order to ensure that the jam protection function operates
properly. Failure to do so could result in serious injury.
• This function may not operate if an object becomes trapped just before the
window fully closes. Also, the function will not operate if the window switch is
continuously raised. Pay attention that your fingers do not become trapped.
Failure to do so could result in serious injury.
To Open the Passenger's Window

The passenger's window continues to
lower while the passenger side switch on
the driver's door is being pressed.
Passenger
side
To Close the Passenger's Window
The passenger's window continues to
move up while the passenger side switch
OPEN CLOSE on the driver's door is being raised.
Passenger
side

To Open a Rear Window (Crew Cab

Model)
The rear window continues to lower while
the rear side switch on the driver's door is
being pressed.
Left
side Right
side To Close a Rear Window (Crew Cab
Model)
The rear window continues to move up
while the rear side switch on the driver's
OPEN CLOSE door is being raised.
Rear
side
To Lock Passenger's Window and

Rear Power Windows
If you push the power window lock switch,
only the driver's window will be openable.
To cancel the passenger's window and rear
power windows (crew cab model) lock,
UNLOCK LOCK push the switch again.
CAUTION
• Use the power window lock switch
to lock the passenger's window
and rear power windows (crew cab
model) when carrying a child in
the vehicle. By doing so, you can
prevent the child from operating the
passenger's window and rear power
windows (crew cab model) and
causing an accident.

Window Switches on Passenger's Door and Rear Doors
Passenger side
CAUTION
Passenger side
• Be sure to warn passengers,
especially in the case of a child, not
to let any part of the body become
trapped or caught in a moving
OPEN CLOSE window.
The window continues to lower while

the window switch is being pressed and
continues to rise while the switch is being
Window switch on rear doors
raised. It will stop moving at any position
(Crew cab model)
when the switch is released.
Rear door switch
NOTE
• When the power window lock
switch is in the "LOCK" position, it
OPEN CLOSE is not possible to open and close
the passenger's window and rear
windows.

Manually Operated Windows
CAUTION
• Be sure that you and the passenger are at no risk of having any part of the body
become trapped in the window. You should be especially careful if a child is with
you.
Window Regulator Handle

Turn the window regulator handle to open
or close the window.
Close
Window regulator
handle
Open
Quarter Window Opener (Extended Cab Model)

Quarter window opener The quarter window on each side can be
opened and closed by operating the quarter
window opener.

WARNING
• Be sure to place the starter switch in the "ACC" or "LOCK" position to shut down
the engine before refueling the vehicle. Refueling while the engine is running
could cause a fire in your vehicle.
• When refueling, never smoke or place any ignition source nearby. There is a risk
of fire.
• After refueling, make sure that the fuel tank filler cap is tightly closed.
• Do not use any fuel tank filler cap that is not an Isuzu genuine part.
The use of an improper fuel tank filler cap could cause fuel spillage in the event
of an accident. The use of an improper fuel tank filler cap could also affect the
fuel system and the emission control system.
• Be sure to wipe off the fuel that is spilled at refueling.
CAUTION
• Always use only an extra-low-sulfur diesel fuel (10 ppm or lower sulfur content).
• The use of a poor-quality diesel fuel, mixing such an additive as water remover
to the fuel in the tank, or filling the tank with gasoline, kerosene or an alcohol-
based fuel or its mixture with a diesel fuel will badly affect the fuel filter and
result in lubrication problems in fuel-lubricated components of the injectors. In
addition, this practice can also impair the operation of the engine and the diesel
particulate defuser (DPD), the exhaust emission cleaning system, possibly
leading to breakdown of the engine-related systems. If an incorrect fuel should
accidentally be added, drain all fuel from the system. Failure to observe this
precaution can result in a fire or permanent damage when the engine is started.
• The use of any fuel other than an extra-low-sulfur diesel fuel may violate the
relevant regulations enforced in certain countries or regions.
Using Self-service Filling Stations


Opening and Closing the Fuel Tank

Filler Cap (with Key Lock)
Cover Cap
Close 1. Eliminate static electricity from your
Open body before opening the fuel tank
Unlock filler cap.
2. Open the cover, then firmly insert the
Key
key and turn it to the "OPEN" position.
3. Slowly turn the cap counterclockwise
Key Lock to open it.
4. Refuel the tank.
5. Securely screw the fuel tank filler cap
onto the fuel filler neck.
6. Turn the key to the "CLOSE" position
to lock the fuel tank filler cap.
7. Pull the key out, then make sure the
fuel tank filler cap is securely closed.
WARNING
• If the fuel tank filler cap is not tightly
closed, leaking fuel could start a fire
while driving.
ADVICE
• When opening or closing the fuel
tank filler cap, be sure to grasp the
fuel tank filler cap itself, not the
key. If you try to turn the fuel tank
filler cap using the key, you could
damage the key.
• Wipe off the key to remove any dirt
or dust, etc. after pulling it out.

Opening and Closing the Fuel Tank
Filler Cap (without Key Lock)
1. To open the fuel tank filler cap door on
the cargo side, pull the fuel lid opener
toward you.
2. Eliminate static electricity from your
body before opening the fuel tank
filler cap.
Fuel lid opener
3. Slowly turn the cap counterclockwise

Fuel tank filler cap to open it.
4. After removing the fuel tank filler cap,
hang it on the hook.
Open
5. Refuel the tank.
6. Turn the fuel tank filler cap clockwise
until it clicks more than 3 times to
Close install it securely.
Hook
7. Close the fuel tank filler cap door on
Tether the cargo side.
Fuel tank filler ADVICE

cap door
• If the fuel tank filler cap is not hung
on the hook, the fuel tank filler cap
may hit the body panel and the
remaining fuel on the fuel tank filler
cap may damage the body paint.
• Closing the fuel tank filler cap
door while the tether is twisted
abnormally may cause the tether to
be damaged.

Seats
The driver's seat must be adjusted so that when you sit well back in the seat, you can
fully depress the pedals without moving your back from the seatback, and you can
operate the steering wheel easily and freely. After making adjustments, check that the
seat is completely locked.
Adjusting the seat for a correct driving posture is a fundamental part of safe driving.
Make sure you can turn the steering wheel easily.
Make sure you align the center
of your head to the center of the
headrest.
Make sure you do not need to move
your shoulders off the seatback.
Make sure you can
properly fasten the seat belt.
Make sure you can adequately press the pedals.
WARNING
• Use caution when adjusting the seat, as failure to do so could cause injury.
• Never allow children to adjust their seats themselves; an adult should adjust the
seat for occupants who are children.
• Adjust the seat only before you start driving. Adjusting the seat while the vehicle
is in motion must be avoided not only because the unlocked seat will move back
and forth unstably, preventing you from taking the correct position, but might
also cause you to lose control of the vehicle, possibly resulting in an accident.
• Try to move the seat without unlatching it after making adjustments to check that
it is completely locked. A loosely locked seat may move unexpectedly and your
position might then become unstable; this could lead to an accident. Take the
vehicle to your Isuzu Dealer for service if you find that your seat adjusters do
not latch. In addition, the seat belt will not operate properly if the seatback is not
completely locked.
• Driving with the seat excessively reclined could be very dangerous in a collision
or sudden stop. Raise the seatback, and wear the seat belt correctly while sitting
well back and straight up in the seat.
• Do not place a cushion or similar object between your back and the seatback.
Doing so not only affects the stability of your driving position but also prevents
the seat belt from working effectively in the event of a collision.
WARNING (Continued)

WARNING (Continued)
• Do not place any objects under the seat. If there are any objects under the seat,
the seat could be locked in an improper position.
• Before making adjustments, check that the seat rails are free of anything that
could obstruct the locking of the seat. Be careful that hands and feet do not
become trapped in the seat or rails when adjusting the seat and that the seat
does not hit any objects or passengers while it is being adjusted.
• When you adjust the seat, be careful that the seat does not hit passengers or
objects. Doing so could cause injury to passengers, or damage objects.
• Make sure not to hit a passenger or luggage with the seat when adjusting your
seat.
Driver's Seat
Forward/backward Adjustment
(Manual Seat Model)
While raising the lever, move the seat
forward or backward. Release the lever
when the seat is in the desired position.
After making adjustments, try to move the
seat back and forth to check that it is fully
locked.
Fore-aft position adjustment lever

(Power Seat Model)
When the lever is pushed forward, the
seat will move forward. When it is pushed
backward, the seat will move backward.
ADVICE
• The seat can be adjusted regardless
of the position of the starter switch.
However, adjusting it consumes a
lot of electricity and could discharge
the battery completely.
Fore-aft position and

height adjustment lever
Reclining Adjustment (Manual Seat

Seatback Model)
WARNING
• When reclining the seatback, hold
the seatback with your hand while
raising the seatback tilt lever. The
seatback may suddenly move
forward if it is not held with your
hand, causing an injury. Once the
seatback has returned to its original
position, check that the seatback
Seatback tilt lever is fully locked by trying to rock it
forward and backward.
To recline the seatback, raise the seatback

tilt lever and gently lean back to the desired
position.
To move the seatback forward, lean
forward with your back slightly clear of the
seatback and raise the lever. After making
adjustments, check that the seatback is
fully locked.

Reclining Adjustment (Power Seat
Seatback Model)
When the seatback tilt lever is pushed
forward, the seatback will tilt forward. When
it is pushed backward, the seatback will tilt
backward.
ADVICE
Seatback tilt lever the battery completely.
Height Adjustment (Manual Seat

Model)
When the height adjustment lever is
repeatedly pulled up, the seat will move up
diagonally forward. When it is repeatedly
pushed down, the seat will move down
diagonally backward. After making
adjustments, check that the seat is fully
locked.
Height adjustment lever
Height Adjustment (Power Seat

Model)
When the rear side of the lever is pulled up,
the seat will move up diagonally forward.
When it is pushed down, the seat will move
down diagonally backward.
ADVICE
Fore-aft position and
the battery completely.
height adjustment lever

Passenger Seat
While raising the lever, move the seat
forward or backward. Release the lever
when the seat is in the desired position.
After making adjustments, try to move the
seat back and forth to check that it is fully
locked.
Fore-aft position adjustment lever
Reclining Adjustment
Seatback
WARNING
• When reclining the seatback, hold
the seatback with your hand while
raising the seatback tilt lever. The
seatback may suddenly move
forward if it is not held with your
hand, causing an injury. Once the
seatback has returned to its original
position, check that the seatback
is fully locked by trying to rock it
Seatback tilt lever forward and backward.
To recline the seatback, raise the seatback

tilt lever and gently lean back to the desired
position.
To move the seatback forward, lean
forward with your back slightly clear of the
seatback and raise the lever. After making
adjustments, check that the seatback is
fully locked.

Rear Seat
WARNING
• Do not place cargo higher than the seatback. Doing so may block the rear view
and cargo may fly forward when suddenly applying the brakes.
Extended Cab Model

WARNING
• Do not tip up the seat cushion while driving.
• When you tip up the seat cushion, tip up the seat cushion slowly.
• When you tip up the seat cushion or return it to the original position, be careful
not to trap a hand or foot.
It is possible to tip up the seat cushion.
Seat cushion

Crew Cab Model

WARNING
• Do not move the seatback forward while driving.
• Do not sit on a folded seatback or place objects on it while driving.
• When folding the seatback forward, hold the seatback with your hand while
pulling the strap up. The seatback may suddenly move forward if it is not held
with your hand, causing an injury.
• When you fold the seatback forward, fold the seatback slowly while holding the
seatback.
• When you fold the seatback forward, be careful that the seatback does not hit
passengers or objects.
• When you return the seatback to the original position, try to move the seatback
to check that it is completely locked. In addition, the seat belt will not operate
properly if the seatback is not completely locked.
• When you fold the seatback forward or return it to the original position, be
careful not to trap a hand or foot.
Strap Seatback It is possible to fold the seatback forward

by pulling the strap.
Before folding the seatback forward, retract
the rear center seat belt.
After returning the seatback to the original
position, connect the rear center seat belt.
ADVICE
• When you return the seatback to the
original position, be careful not to
trap the latch plate of the rear center
seat belt between the rear seat and
the panel behind the rear seats.
Rear Center Seat Belt


Pull the strap forward to raise the seat
Hook
cushion. Remove the hook of the strap
edge from the strap button and secure the
hook to the headrest stay.
Seat cushion
Button
WARNING
• Do not raise the seat cushion while
Hook storage driving.
pocket
• When raising the seat cushion, the
hook of seat cushion strap must be
secured to the headrest stay to keep
the seat cushion locked safely in the
storage position.
Strap • When returning the seat cushion to
its original position, hold the seat
cushion and slowly lay it down.
Finally, try to move the seat cushion
to check that it is completely locked.
• After returning the seat cushion to
its original position, do not forget to
return the hook to the hook storage
pocket.
• When returning the seat cushion to
its original position, make sure the
seat belt does not get trapped. In
addition, make sure the seat belt
lays on top of the seat cushion after
returning the seat cushion to its
original position.
Center Armrest
In models with a center armrest, pull the
armrest out from the seatback, then push it
forward to use.
WARNING
• Before using the center armrest,
fasten your seat belt.
• Do not sit on the center armrest or
place heavy objects on it.

Headrest
WARNING
• Do not drive with a headrest removed. There is a chance that impacts to the
head area would not be prevented and this could result in serious injury.
• Be sure to adjust the headrest before driving. If you adjust the headrest while the
vehicle is in motion, you will be unable to maintain the correct driving posture.
This may cause an accident.
• After making adjustments, try to move the headrest to check that it is completely
locked.
• Use the appropriate headrest for each seat.
Driver and Passenger Seat

The driver and passenger seats have 4
adjustment levels. Make adjustments that
align the center of your head to the center
of the headrest. When raising it, lift it up in
this position. When lowering it, push the
Lock button
lock button while pushing the headrest
down.
Rear Seat (Crew Cab Model)

Storage position Use position The rear seat can only be changed
between the use position and storage
position. Always select the use position
when riding in the vehicle. When selecting
the use position, move the headrest to the
securely locked position in which a clicking
sound can be heard. When selecting the
Lock button storage position, push the lock button while
pushing the headrest down.
Installation and Removal

When pulling out or inserting a headrest,
press the lock button.

Tilt Steering
The steering wheel is adjustable up and down.
WARNING
• When you have adjusted the steering wheel, try pulling the steering wheel up
and down to check that it is securely locked in position before driving.
• Adjust the position of the steering wheel before you start driving. Adjusting
the position of the steering wheel while driving would be extremely dangerous
because the steering wheel would rattle up and down, preventing precise
steering.
Adjustment
1. Lower the lock lever downward to
unlock the steering column.
2. Sit in the correct driving position, and
then move the steering wheel up and
down to select the optimum steering
wheel position.
Lock 3. Firmly lock the steering wheel at the
selected position by moving the lock
lever to the lock position.
Unlock
Lock lever

Mirrors
Sit in the correct driving position on the properly adjusted seat, and then check
each mirror to ensure that it provides a proper view of the rear, the sides, the area
just in front of the vehicle, and the area directly opposite to the driver's seat. Make
adjustments if necessary and clean any dirty mirrors.
Inside Rearview Mirror
WARNING
• Adjust the mirror when the vehicle is stationary, not while the vehicle is in
motion.
Inside Rearview Mirror

Normally, with the lever pushed toward
the front of the vehicle, move the mirror
to adjust to a position where it provides a
proper rear view. When the headlights of
vehicles behind you are reflected brightly
when driving at night, pull the lever toward
you. By doing this you can reduce the
reflection.
WARNING
Lever • Do not clean the rearview mirror
Day glass with a cleaner containing
Night ammonia or acetic acid. Doing so
may result in damage to the mirror's
coating.

Outside Rearview Mirrors
After properly adjusting your seat for proper driving position, adjust the mirrors
indicated below so that they provide adequate views for checking the rear, the side and
the areas just in front and immediately to the side of the vehicle by moving each of the
mirrors.
Outside Rearview Mirror

Lateral-direction: Adjust the mirror so that
you can see the vehicle's side including the
inner one-third of the mirror.
Vertical-direction: Adjust the mirror so
that you see the rear bottom corner of the
1/2 vehicle halfway up the height of the mirror.
1/3
WARNING
• Adjust the mirrors when the vehicle is stationary, not while the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
CAUTION
• When checking the rear of the vehicle with mirrors, be careful that this does not
distract your attention from the traffic ahead.
• Rearview mirrors may make the vehicle behind you appear farther away
than it really is. Use these mirrors very carefully until you are able to correctly
determine distances from the images.
• Keep the mirrors in mind when passing another vehicle on a narrow road,
moving the vehicle into a garage or driving near pedestrians.
Remote Control Mirror Switch


Seat Belts
The protection provided by seat belts
might be significantly reduced if they are
not fastened properly; in certain cases,
improperly fastened seat belts can even
play a role in causing injury to the wearer.
Seat belts must be worn not only by the
driver but also by the passenger(s) before
the vehicle starts moving. You should be
fully acquainted with the proper use of seat
belts and important points to be respected
as described in the following pages.
Familiarizing yourself with the correct use
of seat belts is essential for your safety.
WARNING
• Seat belts must always be fastened before starting to drive.
• Seat belts provide full protection only when the driver and passenger(s) fasten
them while sitting upright and fully back on the seat.
• Wearing a seat belt with the seatback excessively reclined could be very
dangerous in a collision or sudden stop since the occupant may slide under the
belt and be seriously injured. Seat belts work best only when the occupant is
sitting well back and straight up in the seat.
• Be sure to insert the latch plate into the buckle until a click is heard. An
incompletely inserted latch plate is dangerous in the event of a collision or
sudden stop.
• Do not run the seat belt over your face, chin or neck.
• Wear the seat belt as low as possible around the hips, not around the waist. A
seat belt running over the waist would press the abdomen with a strong force
and could increase the likelihood of injuries in a collision or sudden stop.
• Do not use a seat belt for a small child if the belt is on or very close to the child's
neck or chin. Also, do not use a seat belt if it does not fit snugly over the child's
hips because restraining the child under those conditions could be dangerous
in the event of a collision or sudden stop. Instead, use an appropriate child
restraint system (CRS) available on the market. For further details, please
contact your Isuzu Dealer.
• Use a CRS that fits the size of the infant or child. Install the system according to
the manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING (Continued)

WARNING (Continued)
• Remove any twists in the seat belt before fastening it. A seat belt with twists will
not provide full protection because it cannot disperse shocks efficiently in the
event of a collision or sudden stop.
• Too much slack could increase the amount of injury because the belt would not
be able to properly restrain you in an accident.
• Expecting mothers or people suffering from chest or abdominal conditions
should check with their doctor for specific recommendations about wearing seat
belts.
• Do not use one seat belt for more than one person. If worn by more than one
person, the seat belt would not work effectively in a collision or sudden stop.
• Have seat belts inspected and, if necessary, replaced by the nearest Isuzu
Dealer when the webbing becomes frayed or worn and/or when the buckle or
other mechanical parts fail to work properly.
• Do not disassemble the seat belts or modify the system.
• If your vehicle has been involved in a collision, the seat belts worn at the time
may have lost their original strength due to impact even if they appear intact.
These seat belts must be inspected and, if necessary, replaced by the nearest
Isuzu Dealer.
• Be careful to keep the buckles and retractors free of dust and foreign matter.
• Wearing seat belts is a legal requirement. The driver is responsible not only
for wearing a seat belt himself/herself but also for prompting all passengers to
wear their seat belts. It is necessary, however, to check with a doctor about the
appropriateness of a seat belt for an expecting mother or a passenger with a
chest/abdominal condition.
• Regularly inspect to see if the seat belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchors function properly.
• Do not place objects near the seat belts if the objects could damage the seat
belts.

Seat Belt Warning Light (Driver Seat)
Seat Belt Warning Light (Front
Passenger Seat)
Seat Belt Care → Refer to page 6-103

Three-Point Seat Belts (ELR)

The seat belt extends or retracts freely if the wearer moves slowly, but it locks and
restrains the occupant during forward force caused by the occupant's body following a
strong shock. Adjust the driver's and passenger's shoulder belts for proper position by
means of the shoulder anchor.
WARNING
• The shoulder belt should be
adequately positioned on your
shoulder but should not touch your
neck and/or face. The shoulder
belt could harm you in a collision or
sudden stop if it is in contact with
your neck and/or face.
To Fasten
1. Sit on the seat in the correct driving
position.
2. Pull out the seat belt holding the latch
plate. After checking that there are no
Latch plate twists in the belt, insert the latch plate
Buckle into the buckle until it clicks.
3. To reduce the risk of sliding under the
Keep as low on hip
bone as possible belt during a collision, position the belt
across your lap as low on your hips
as possible and adjust it to a snug fit
by pulling the shoulder portion upward
through the latch plate.
The lap-shoulder belt is designed to
lock during a sudden stop or impact.
At other times it should move freely.

To Unfasten
Push the button on the buckle. As the belt
automatically retracts, let it be taken up
slowly by holding on to the latch plate until
Button the belt is fully retracted.
CAUTION
• If you repair any components
Latch plate around the steering wheel,
instrument panel, center console
and brake/clutch pedal or the
driver's and passenger's seat belts,
or if you install an audio system
or other equipment, the seat belt
system with pretensioner and airbag
system may be adversely affected,
possibly causing the seat belt to
suddenly retract or the airbag to
suddenly deploy, which could result
in injury. Be sure to have any repair
or installation done by your Isuzu
Dealer.
ADVICE
• While being automatically retracted,
the seat belt could damage a nearby
window or interior trim unless the
latch plate is properly held. Hold the
latch plate to ensure that the belt is
taken up slowly.
• Before closing the door, check that
the retracted seat belt is taut. A
slack belt could become trapped in
the door or seat rail.
• When the seat belt is fully taken up
(or not pulled out), check that the
stopper is holding the belt in a fully
taut state.

NOTE
• For vehicles equipped with an airbag system, the driver's seat belt and the
passenger's seat belt feature pretensioner and load limiter functions.
• The three-point seat belts are provided with an emergency locking retractor
(ELR) function.
[ELR function]
• The ELR normally allows the seat belt to move in and out freely as the occupant
moves. However, it locks the seat belt to restrain the occupant when a forward
force resulting from a collision or sudden stop acts on the occupant.
• The ELR also locks the seat belt when the belt is pulled out quickly. If this
happens, allow it to retract once and then pull it out slowly.
[Load limiter function]
• The load limiter allows the seat belt to extend while maintaining the load
working on the belt at a constant level. This helps alleviate the shock applied on
the occupant's chest.
Front Seat Belt with Pretensioner and

SRS Airbag System

Rear Center Seat Belt
When using the rear center seat belt, make
sure that each latch plate and buckle are
securely locked.
Buckle When not using the rear center seat belt,
Anchor
and buckle connect the anchor buckle and anchor
latch plate and anchor latch plate. (Do not retract the seat belt.)
latch plate
When you fold the seatback forward, retract

the seat belt.
To retract the rear center seat belt, insert
the key into the release button slot on the
anchor buckle and disconnect the anchor
Key buckle and anchor latch plate. As the belt
Release
button slot automatically retracts, let it be taken up
slowly by holding on to the anchor latch
plate until the belt is fully retracted.
ADVICE
• While being automatically retracted,
the seat belt could damage a nearby
window or interior trim unless the
latch plate is properly held. Hold the
latch plate to ensure that the belt is
taken up slowly.
To connect the rear center seat belt, pull

out the seat belt holding the anchor latch
plate. After checking that there are no
twists in the belt, insert the anchor latch
plate into the anchor buckle until it clicks.
NOTE
[Rear center seat belt design to prevent incorrect fastening]
• The rear center seat belt is designed so that it cannot be connected with any of
the window-side seat belts.
In addition, the buckle of the rear center seat belt is identified by a "CENTER"
mark to prevent incorrect fastening of the rear center seat belt.

Shoulder Anchor (Front Seat Belt)

Adjustment
Adjust the height of the shoulder anchor on
the driver's door side and passenger's door
Lock button side according to your body size. There are
4 adjustment positions.
To adjust the anchor height, move the
shoulder anchor up or down with the lock
button pulled toward you. When the desired
height is achieved, release the lock button
to lock it.
CAUTION
• Never adjust the shoulder anchor height while the vehicle is in motion. Doing
this is very dangerous.
• The effectiveness of the seat belt will be reduced if it is not properly fastened.
The shoulder anchor should be adjusted to a position as high as possible where
the belt fits right on the shoulder but does not come in contact with your neck or
face.
• After making adjustments, check that the shoulder anchor is completely locked.


If you are travelling with children in the vehicle, CRS are required.
Tips for Selecting a CRS

Children should be restrained at all times and fitted with a CRS appropriate to their
size when travelling in a vehicle. Following are some guidelines about selecting the
appropriate restraint for your child.
WARNING
• Carefully follow the instructions in the CRS manufacturer's instruction manual to
install the CRS.
• Make sure that installation is performed in compliance with all installation
instructions provided by the CRS manufacturer and make sure that the system
is secured properly. Improper installation may result in death or serious injuries
to the child in event of sudden stopping or accidents.
• It is not recommended to use a CRS with tether strap for the vehicles without
the top tether anchorage. When using the CRS with the tether strap, be sure to
fix a tether strap to the top tether anchorage.
Infants
This type of CRS is designed so that in the
event of a collision, impact forces will be
evenly spread over the baby's back, with
minimal jarring to the vulnerable head and
neck area.

Young Children
This type of CRS is designed for use when
the child is able to sit and easily hold his
or her head upright. It is also possible to
purchase convertible seats which can be
used as a rear-facing infant restraint or
converted to a front-facing CRS.
Use this type of restraint system when

children outgrow a typical front-facing CRS
but they are still too small for lap /sash seat
belts. A booster seat raises the child so
that the knees bend comfortably, the lap
/sash seat belt is correctly positioned and
the child can see out the window. A rigid
booster seat with a back, side wings and
sash guide gives the best protection. In
assessing the range of children who would
benefit from booster seats, height is a
better indicator than age or weight.
Older Children
A child should use a normal lap /sash seat
belt only when:
• He/she can sit against the back of the
rear seat with knees bent comfortably
at the edge of the seat,
• Lap belt rests low and snug across
the hips - not across the stomach,
• Sash belt is centered on shoulder and
chest,
• He/she is able to stay seated like this
for the entire trip.

WARNING
• Never insert coins, clips or other foreign objects into the buckle of your child's
seat belt since this may cause improper latching of the latch plate and buckle.
• Do not use a defective seat belt. Immediately contact your Isuzu Dealer and
repair the seat belt that does not function normally. You, your passengers and
especially your child are at risk of death or serious injury when using a seat with
a defective seat belt.
• Following the insertion of the latch plate into the buckle, make sure the latch
plate and buckle are surely locked together, and that there is not twisting of the
lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt.
• The seat belt cannot protect your child from death or serious injuries when it is
defective. Immediately contact your Isuzu Dealer and repair the seat belt that
does not function normally. Never use the CRS with the defective seat belt until
it is fixed.
• For your child's safety, never place your child's armpit over the shoulder belt.
Children should be restrained at all times when travelling in a vehicle.

If a child cannot see out of the window, do not raise the child by means of an ordinary
cushion. The cushion will not stay in place in the event of a crash, and the child would
slip out of the straps and become entangled. Ensure that the seat belt fits firmly around
the CRS.

WARNING
• Do not use a rearward-facing CRS on a seat protected by an SRS airbag in front
of it. The child could be seriously injured if the SRS airbag inflates, as the child's
head would be very close to the inflating SRS airbag.
• CRS anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted CRS. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat
belts, harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
• If using an ISO-FIX anchorage (lower anchorage and top tether anchorage),
check whether your ISO-FIX CRS is a product that has received UN R44 (ECE
R44) certification. Carefully follow the instructions in the CRS manufacturer's
instruction manual to install the CRS.
• Where legally allowable, you may install a forward-facing CRS in the front seat,
but always move the passenger's seat as far back as it will go.
• Make sure that the CRS is secured by pushing and pulling it in different
directions. Install the system according to all installation instructions provided by
its manufacturer.
• If the seat headrest interferes with the CRS, either remove the headrest or
adjust it to a position where it does not interfere with the CRS.
• When CRS is not in use:
- Make sure that the CRS is properly secured to the seat when it is not in use.
Do not simply place a CRS on the seat without it being secured to the seat.

Suitability for CRS
Regular Cab Model
Seating position
Mass group Front passenger
With SRS airbag
0 Up to 10 kg (22 lb) X
0+ Up to 13 kg (29 lb) X
I 9 to 18 kg (20 to 40 lb) UF
II 15 to 25 kg (33 to 55 lb) UF
III 22 to 36 kg (49 to 79 lb) UF
UF: Suitable for "Forward-facing universal" category restraints approved for use in this
mass group.
X: Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.
Extended Cab Model

Seating position
Mass group Front passenger
Rear outboard
With SRS airbag
0 Up to 10 kg (22 lb) X X
0+ Up to 13 kg (29 lb) X X
I 9 to 18 kg (20 to 40 lb) UF X
II 15 to 25 kg (33 to 55 lb) UF X
III 22 to 36 kg (49 to 79 lb) UF X
mass group.

Crew Cab Model

Seating position
Mass group Front passenger Rear
Rear center
With SRS airbag outboard
0 Up to 10 kg (22 lb) X U U
0+ Up to 13 kg (29 lb) X U U
I 9 to 18 kg (20 to 40 lb) UF U U
II 15 to 25 kg (33 to 55 lb) UF U U
III 22 to 36 kg (49 to 79 lb) UF U U
U: Suitable for "Universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
mass group.

Suitability for ISO-FIX CRS
Body Mass group Size ISO-FIX position

Fixture
style kg/lb class Rear out board
F ISO/L1 X
Carry-cot
G ISO/L2 X
0 - up to 10 kg /
E ISO/R1 IL
22.1 lb
E ISO/R1 IL
0+ - up to 13 kg
D ISO/R2 IL
/ 28.7 lb
C ISO/R3 IL *1
Crew D ISO/R2 IL
cab C ISO/R3 IL *1
I - 9 to 18 kg /
B ISO/F2 IUF
19.8 to 39.7 lb
B1 ISO/F2X IUF
A ISO/F3 IUF, IL *2
II - 15 to 25 kg /
― (1) X
33.1 to 55.1 lb
III - 22 to 36 kg /
― (1) X
48.5 to 79.4 lb
(1): For the CRS which do not carry the size class identification (A to G), please contact
to the CRS manufacturer or dealer for handling the ISO-FIX CRS.
IUF: Suitable for ISO-FIX forward CRS of universal category approved for use in the
mass group.
IL: Suitable for particular ISO-FIX CRS given in the attached list. These ISO-FIX CRS
are those of the "specific vehicle", "restricted" or "semi-universal" categories.
X: ISO-FIX position not suitable for ISO-FIX CRS in this mass group and / or this size
class.
*1: Fair G 0/1 S with ISO-FIX platform type D RWF (Rearward-facing)
*2: Fair G 0/1 S with ISO-FIX platform type D FWF (Forward-facing)

CRS Lower and Top Tether Anchorages

Except front seat and rear center seat are equipped with anchorages for securing the
ISO-FIX CRS.
WARNING
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed
by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used
for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the
vehicle.
NOTE
• When you buy an ISO-FIX CRS, contact your Isuzu Dealer and to get
recommendation.
• Carefully follow the instructions in the CRS manufacturer's instruction manual to
install the CRS.
To assist you in locating the lower anchorages for CRS, each seating position with the
anchorage has a button on the seatback at each lower anchorage location.
CRS lower anchorages are installed to the
outboard seating positions.
Lower anchorage
for rear right side Lower anchorage
for rear left side

Top tether anchorage Top tether anchorages are installed on the
panel behind the rear seats.
NOTE
• Top tether anchorages are not
equipped on models for the Hong
Kong or Singapore markets.
Installation Procedure
Top tether equipped CRS
Procedure No. 1) → 8)
Top tether not equipped CRS

Procedure No. 7)
Headrest Strap 1. Retract the rear center seat belt.

2. Adjust the head restraint to the use
position.
3. Release the lock of seatback by
pulling the strap and tilt the seatback
forward.

Tether hook 4. Attach the tether hook to the top

tether anchorage.
WARNING
• When installing the CRS, if the
headrest interferes with the top
tether, remove the headrest.
Headrest → Refer to page 3-44
5. Return the seatback to the original

position.
NOTE
• The seatback must be locked firmly
to the back panel. Keep the tether
strap and hook in an upwards
direction.
to
CR
S
Front of vehicle Tether hook

Top tether anchorage
Seat belt 6. Connect the rear center seat belt.

7. Attach the CRS to the seat belt or
both the ISO-FIX anchorages.
Refer to the instruction manual of the
CRS.
ISO-FIX
NOTE
• CRS must firmly attached and
locked with seat belt or ISO-FIX
anchorages.

Tether strap 8. Adjust the tether strap length until
it attached tightly with the seat
structure.
Uninstallation Procedure
Top tether equipped CRS
Procedure No. 1) → 8)
Top tether not equipped CRS

Procedure No. 1)
Seat belt ISO-FIX 1. Release the CRS lock for the seat
belt or the ISO-FIX anchorages.
2. Retract the rear center seat belt.
3. Release the lock of the seatback.

4. Tilt the seatback while moving the
CRS forward.

Tether hook 5. Loosen the CRS tether strap.

6. Remove the tether hook from the top
tether anchorage.
7. Push and lock the seatback to the
original position.
8. Connect the rear center seat belt.
NOTE
• The seatback must be locked firmly
to the back panel.

Front Seat Belt with Pretensioner and SRS Airbag System

The front seat belt with pretensioner and supplemental restraint system (SRS) airbag
system is activated in the event of a frontal collision when the impact energy exceeds
a certain level to help mitigate the shock on the head of the driver and the passenger
by firmly restraining the body of the occupant in the seat with the front seat belt with
pretensioner and front airbag. In addition, in models with side airbag and curtain airbag,
the front seat belt with pretensioner, side airbag and curtain airbag are activated in
the event of a lateral collision when the impact energy exceeds a certain level to help
mitigate the shock on the head and chest of the driver and the passenger by firmly
restraining the body of the occupant in the seat, and the curtain airbag is activated
to mitigate the shock on the head of the occupant sitting in the outboard seats of the
models with the rear seat.
Be sure to observe the following instructions to prevent you and your passenger from
suffering a serious or fatal injury due to impacts resulting from the front seat belt with
pretensioner and airbag operation.
Operation Check
The SRS airbag warning light checks and
alerts the conditions of the SRS airbag
system.
The SRS airbag warning light should
flash seven times when the starter switch
is turned to the "ON" position, and then
should go out.
If the SRS airbag warning light stays on,
the airbag(s) may not function properly
when needed. Drive the vehicle after the
Airbag assembly for driver seat warning light goes out.
WARNING
• If you encounter any of the following conditions, errors have occurred. Have
your vehicle inspected/serviced at your Isuzu Dealer as soon as possible.
[System error]
- If the SRS airbag warning light does not flash seven times when the starter
switch is turned to the "ON" position.
- If the SRS airbag warning light does not go out.
- If the SRS airbag warning light comes on while driving the vehicle.
WARNING (Continued)

WARNING (Continued)
• If you make unauthorized modifications to the vehicle or install an unauthorized
accessory, the front seat belt with pretensioner and airbag may not operate
correctly.
• If the steering wheel is changed to a non-standard one or a sticker is attached
to the steering wheel pad, there could be a danger of system malfunction or the
sticker flying off in the event of system activation. Attaching stickers or placing
such things as accessories or air fresheners on the top surface of the instrument
panel is also dangerous. They may prevent normal operation of the airbag or
could fly off in the event of system activation.
• In models with side airbag and curtain airbag, do not attach seat covers under
any circumstances. If a seat cover is attached or objects are placed in the area
in which the side airbag inflates, the side airbag will not function correctly. Also,
there could be a danger of objects flying off in the event of the system activation.
In addition, if hard objects such as hangers or accessories are attached to the
grip or coat hook, they may prevent normal operation of the curtain airbag and
could fly off in the event of system activation.
• Do not apply excessive force to nor strongly hit the airbag installation area or the
base of the b-pillar. Doing so may result in erroneous activation of the airbag or
the front seat belt with pretensioner.
• Doing any of the following may require special precautions. Be sure to consult
your Isuzu Dealer before doing any of the following. Failure to do so may cause
the front seat belt with pretensioner and airbag to be unduly activated, causing
the seat belt to be unexpectedly retracted or the airbag to be suddenly inflated,
causing an injury to the occupant. Doing any of them improperly will adversely
affect the operation of the system, causing a malfunction or failure.
- Repair or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, center
console, parts around the accelerator pedal, front seat (in models with side
airbag and curtain airbag), parts around the roof side (in models with side
airbag and curtain airbag) and parts around the base of the b-pillar.
- Repair, replacement or disposal of the front seat belt with pretensioner and
airbag, or scrapping of a model that has front seat belt with pretensioner and
airbag.
- When audio equipment and accessories are installed or modification such as
body mounting is carried out.
- Making modifications to the front of the vehicle (bumper, frame, etc.), installing
equipment (snow plows, etc.), making modifications to the frame, or making
changes to the vehicle's height using unauthorized methods and/or materials.
- Repairing or painting of panels at the front of the vehicle or panels on the cab.

CAUTION
Have your vehicle inspected at the nearest Isuzu Dealer promptly if you encounter
any of the following conditions.
• The SRS airbag warning light shows an abnormality.
• The front seat belt with pretensioner and airbag are activated by an impact. (The
SRS airbag warning light comes on.)
• Your vehicle has received a certain level of frontal impact, or lateral impact (in
models with side airbag and curtain airbag), even when the impact has not
activated the front seat belt with pretensioner and airbag.
• The seat belt is frayed or worn out.
• The steering pad surface and instrument panel surface is cracked or otherwise
damaged, or it receives an impact.
• In models with side airbag and curtain airbag, when the surface of the airbag
storage of the front seat or surface of the airbag storage of the roof side is
cracked or otherwise damaged, or it receives an impact.
SRS Airbag Warning Light

Front Seat Belt with Pretensioner

When the vehicle receives an impact
exceeding a certain level during a frontal
collision, or lateral collision (in models
with side airbag and curtain airbag), the
fastened seat belt is retracted instantly
and removes the slack in the seat belt
to securely restrain the driver and the
passenger in the seat, thus enhancing the
seat belt's restraining effect.

WARNING
• The front seat belt with pretensioner helps reduce the risk of a serious injury
to the driver and the passenger should the vehicle receive a frontal impact,
or lateral impact (in models with side airbag and curtain airbag), exceeding a
certain level. The maximum effect is achieved only if the seat belt is correctly
worn.
• The front seat belt with pretensioner takes up the slack in the seat belt instantly
to help reduce the risk of a serious injury. If the front seat belt with pretensioner
activates, you may suffer scratches or a slight bruise or burn due to heat
generated by rubbing.
CAUTION
• Do not remove or disassemble the seat belt. Accidental activation of the system
may cause parts to fly off, causing an injury to you; or causing malfunction.
ADVICE
• Once activated during a collision, the front seat belt with pretensioner cannot
be reused. The seat belt must be replaced immediately at the nearest Isuzu
Dealer.
NOTE
• Even if the pretensioner function fails, the seat belt still operate as a regular
seat belt (with ELR) and the seat belt function is ensured.
• The pretensioner generates a sound at the moment it retracts the seat belt.
• When the front seat belt with pretensioner and airbag system are activated by
an impact, the SRS airbag warning light comes on.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Airbag
Front SRS Airbag
The front SRS airbag inflates in the event of a frontal collision with the impact
exceeding a certain level and helps to disperse and reduce the impact on the body of
the driver and the passenger as a supplement to the front seat belt with pretensioner.
WARNING
• The front airbag supplements the occupant protection effect of the seat belt
by being activated together with the front seat belt with pretensioner to reduce
severity of injury to the driver and the passenger should the vehicle receive a
frontal impact exceeding a certain level. The maximum effect is achieved only if
the seat belt is correctly worn.
• The front airbag does not replace the seat belt. Be sure to wear the seat belt.
• The front airbag is instantly inflated with considerable force to reduce serious
injury. If the airbag inflates, you may suffer scratches or a slight bruise or burn
due to heat generated by rubbing.
• When the vehicle receives an impact exceeding a certain level, resulting in front
airbag deployment, deformation of the vehicle may cause the windshield to
break.
• Activation of the passenger SRS airbag may cause damage to the windshield.
• The front airbag cannot be reused once it is inflated. Immediately replace it at
the nearest Isuzu Dealer.
ADVICE
• When the front airbag is inflated, a sound and white smoke are produced but
this is not the result of a fire. This white smoke is not detrimental your health.
However, if residue (gas and so on) adheres to your eyes and skin, rinse them
with water as soon as possible. Although it is rare, a person with delicate skin
may suffer from irritation.
• Immediately after the front airbag is inflated, the metal portion that inflates the
airbag gets hot. Do not touch it.

NOTE
• The front airbag is quickly deflated after deployment and does not hinder
visibility.
• When the front seat belt with pretensioner and front airbag are activated by an
impact, the SRS airbag warning light comes on.
• In models with side airbag and curtain airbag, the front airbag is activated
independently from the side airbag and curtain airbag. When the front airbag is
activated, the front seat belt with the pretensioner is also activated at the same
time.
Side SRS Airbag and Curtain SRS Airbag

The side SRS airbag and curtain SRS airbag inflate in the event of a lateral collision
with the impact exceeding a certain level and helps to disperse and reduce the impact
on the body of the driver and the passenger (and the occupant sitting in the outboard
rear seats of the models with the rear seat as a supplement) to the front seat belt with
pretensioner.
WARNING
• The side airbag and curtain airbag supplement the occupant protection effect of
the seat belt by being activated together with the front seat belt with pretensioner
to reduce severity of injury to the driver and the passenger and the occupant
sitting in the outboard rear seats of the models with the rear seat should the
vehicle receive a lateral impact exceeding a certain level. The maximum effect is
achieved only if the seat belt is correctly worn.
• The side airbag and curtain airbag does not replace the seat belt. Be sure to
wear the seat belt.
• The side airbag and curtain airbag are instantly inflated with considerable force
to reduce serious injury. If the airbag inflates, you may suffer scratches or a
slight bruise or burn due to heat generated by rubbing.
• When the vehicle receives an impact exceeding a certain level, resulting in side
airbag and curtain airbag deployment, deformation of the vehicle may cause the
windshield to break.
• The side airbag and curtain airbag cannot be reused once it is inflated.
Immediately replace it at the nearest Isuzu Dealer.

ADVICE
• When the side airbag and curtain airbag are inflated, a sound and white
smoke are produced but this is not the result of a fire. This white smoke is not
detrimental your health. However, if residue (gas and so on) adheres to your
eyes and skin, rinse them with water as soon as possible. Although it is rare, a
person with delicate skin may suffer from irritation.
• Immediately after the side airbag and curtain airbag are inflated, the metal
portion that inflates the airbag gets hot. Do not touch it.
NOTE
• When the front seat belt with pretensioner, side airbag and curtain airbag are
activated by an impact, the SRS airbag warning light comes on.
• The side airbag and curtain airbag are activated independently from the front
airbag. When the side airbag and curtain airbag are activated, the front seat belt
with the pretensioner is also activated at the same time.

When and How the Front Seat Belt with Pretensioner and
SRS Airbag System Operates
The front seat belt with pretensioner and airbag system are activated when the vehicle
receives an impact exceeding a certain level in the event of a frontal collision, or lateral
collision (in models with side airbag and curtain airbag). Because the vehicle body
absorbs part of impact energy, the system may not be activated due to reduction in the
force of the impact or the intensity or direction of the impact received. However, even
if the front of the vehicle is largely deformed by the collision, in some cases the impact
on the seat is not severe. Therefore, the severity of deformation of and damage to the
vehicle do not necessarily coincide with the activation of the airbag.
When are the Front Seat Belt with Pretensioner and Front SRS Airbag
System Activated?
When the vehicle collides head-on When the vehicle collides head-on
against a parked/stopped vehicle or against a solid wall with an impact of a
a moving vehicle with an impact of a certain level or higher
certain level or higher
WARNING
airbag gets hot. Do not touch it. Doing so may cause a serious injury such as a
burn.
NOTE
• The passenger side front SRS airbag may activate even if a passenger is not
present.

When the vehicle is hit from the side When are the Front Seat Belt with
with an impact of a certain level or Pretensioner, Side SRS Airbag
higher and Curtain SRS Airbag System
Activated?
WARNING
• Immediately after the side airbag
and curtain airbag are inflated, the
metal portion that inflates the airbag
gets hot. Do not touch it. Doing so
may cause a serious injury such as
a burn.
NOTE
• The passenger side side SRS
airbag and curtain SRS airbag may
activate even if a passenger is not
present.

System not Likely to Be Activated?
In the following cases, the front seat belt with pretensioner and front SRS airbag
system are less likely to be activated even if they are working properly.
When the vehicle collides against a When the vehicle gets under a vehicle
utility pole or standing tree or obstacle
When the vehicle has an offset When the vehicle has a frontal angle
collision (one-sided collision) collision

When are the Front Seat Belt with Pretensioner, Side SRS Airbag and
Curtain SRS Airbag System Not Likely to Be Activated?
In the following cases, the front seat belt with pretensioner, side SRS airbag and
curtain SRS airbag system are less likely to be activated even if they are working
properly.
When the vehicle collides against a When the vehicle is hit at the engine
utility pole or standing tree from the compartment or cargo bed from the
side side
When the vehicle is hit to the side from When the vehicle has a frontal angle
a frontal angle collision

When are the Front Seat Belt with

Pretensioner and Front SRS Airbag
System Activated Other than in a
Collision?
• When the vehicle falls into a pothole
or groove in the road
• When the vehicle strongly collides
against an obstacle such as a
protruding object on the road
• When the vehicle collides against a
curb at high speed
• When the vehicle becomes airborne
and hits the ground, receiving a strong
impact on the bottom of the vehicle
WARNING
airbag gets hot. Do not touch it. Doing so may cause a serious injury such as a
burn.
When are the Front Seat Belt with

Pretensioner, Side SRS Airbag
and Curtain SRS Airbag System
Activated Other than in a Collision?
• When the vehicle skids and collides
against a curb
WARNING
• Immediately after the side airbag and curtain airbag are inflated, the metal
portion that inflates the airbag gets hot. Do not touch it. Doing so may cause a
serious injury such as a burn.

System not Activated?
In the following cases, the front seat belt with pretensioner and front SRS airbag
system are not activated even if they are working properly.
When the vehicle is hit from the rear When the vehicle is hit from the side
When the vehicle rolls onto its side or

upside down

When are the Front Seat Belt with Pretensioner, Side SRS Airbag and
Curtain SRS Airbag System not Activated?
In the following cases, the front seat belt with pretensioner, side SRS airbag and
curtain SRS airbag system are not activated even if they are working properly.
When the vehicle collides head-on When the vehicle is hit from the rear
against a parked/stopped vehicle or
a moving vehicle with an impact of a
certain level or higher
When the vehicle rolls onto its side or

upside down

WARNING
• Repainting of the cab panels, repair around the side panel, steering wheel,
instrument panel, center console, roof side (in models with side airbag and
curtain airbag) and the front seat (in models with side airbag and curtain
airbag), installation of accessories such as audio equipment and repair around
the dashboard may adversely affect the SRS airbag system or cause a fatal
or serious injury due to the impact of the airbag when it unexpectedly inflates.
Never make these repairs by yourself, but be sure to consult your Isuzu Dealer.
• If you make modifications to the front of the vehicle (bumper, frame, etc.), install
equipment (snow plow, for example), make modifications to the frame, or make
a change to the vehicle's height using unauthorized methods and/or materials,
the SRS airbag system may fail to operate normally. Be sure to consult your
Isuzu Dealer.
• Special treatment is required when an airbag is disposed of. When discarding a
vehicle equipped with an SRS airbag system, consult your Isuzu Dealer.
CAUTION
Have your vehicle inspected at the nearest Isuzu Dealer at once in the following
cases.
• When the SRS airbag warning light does not go out or comes on during driving.
• When the airbag is inflated.
• When the front airbag was not inflated although the vehicle received a certain
level of impact at the front.
• In models with side airbag and curtain airbag, when the side airbag and curtain
airbag were not inflated although the vehicle received a certain level of impact
at the side.
• When the steering pad surface or instrument panel surface is cracked or
otherwise damaged or it receives an impact.
• In models with side airbag and curtain airbag, when the surface of the airbag
storage of the front seat or surface of the airbag storage of the roof side is
cracked or otherwise damaged, or it receives an impact.

NOTE
• When the airbag is inflated, gases like white smoke are produced but this is not
a fire. This white smoke is not detrimental to your health. However, if residue
(gas and so on) adheres to your eyes and skin, rinse them with water as soon
as possible. Although it is rare, a person with delicate skin may suffer from
irritation.
• The airbag cannot be reused once it is inflated. Replace it at your Isuzu Dealer.
Deployment of SRS Airbag System

When the vehicle receives an impact exceeding a certain level during a frontal
collision, or lateral collision (in models with side airbag and curtain airbag), the SRS
airbag system is activated and airbag instantly inflates.
Deployment of front airbag
Deployment of side airbag and curtain airbag

When Does An SRS Airbag System Develop Its Full Effect?
WARNING
• Before driving the vehicle, properly
adjust your seat for proper driving
position and wear the seat belt
correctly. Do not sit closer than
necessary to the steering wheel and
do not lean over it. (Leave a space
Sticker
of 25 cm (10 in) or more between
your chest and the center of the
steering wheel.) Do not allow the
passenger to put his/her hands or
feet on the instrument panel and to
sit with his/her face or chest close to
it. When the airbags are activated,
you or the passenger may suffer a
Air freshener burn on or serious injury to the arm
or face.
curtain airbag, do not lean against
the door and roof side. When the
airbags are activated, you may suffer
Sticker
a burn on or serious injury to the arm
or face.
• If the steering wheel is changed to
a non-standard one or a sticker is
attached to the steering wheel pad,
there could be a danger of system
malfunction or the sticker flying off
Attaching stickers or placing
such things as accessories or air
fresheners on the top surface of the
instrument panel is also dangerous.
They may prevent normal operation
of the airbag or could fly off in the
event of system activation.
WARNING (Continued)

WARNING (Continued)
curtain airbag, do not attach seat
covers under any circumstances. If
a seat cover is attached or objects
are placed in the area in which the
side airbag inflates, the side airbag
will not function correctly. Also,
there could be a danger of objects
flying off in the event of the system
activation. In addition, if hard objects
such as hangers or accessories are
Hook Grip
Hook

When Carrying a Child in the Vehicle
WARNING
• Be sure to observe the following precautions when carrying a child in the
vehicle. Otherwise the child may be fatally injured by the impact from an inflating
airbag.
- Do not drive with a child standing in front of any of the airbags, or sitting on
your lap. Doing so is dangerous because the child would receive a very strong
impact by an inflating airbag.
- Do not install a rear-facing infant or child restraint system (CRS) on the
passenger seat. An inflating passenger's airbag could cause the child to be
fatally injured.
• For safety, place children in the back seat.
Handling of SRS Airbag System
WARNING
• Do not remove or disassemble the airbag. Doing so may cause a malfunction or
inadvertent activation.
• Do not place anything near the airbag. You may suffer an injury when an object
is thrown by the inflation force of the airbag.
• Do not take a rest using the steering wheel as a pillow or with your arms or legs
resting on it. If the vehicle is stopped with the starter switch in the "ON" position
and an impact exceeding a certain level occurs to the front of the vehicle, the
airbag will inflate and may injure you due to the strong impact.
• Do not drive the vehicle with something placed between you and airbag or held
on your lap. If the airbag inflates, the objects may be thrown and hit your face.
Doing so also hinders normal activation of the airbag, which is dangerous.
• Do not wet the airbag sensor with water or subject it to an impact. The system
may malfunction; this is very dangerous.


CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS 4
STARTING AND STOPPING THE ENGINE 4-3
INSTRUMENTS, WARNING LIGHTS AND

INDICATOR LIGHTS 4-9
SWITCHES 4-63
DRIVING CONTROLS 4-79
4510393_sec04_CONTROLS AND INSTR4-1 4-1 2015/01/16 9:18:02

CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS 4-3
STARTING AND STOPPING THE ENGINE
● Starting the Engine 4-4

● Warm-up System 4-6
● Stopping the Engine 4-7

4-4 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS
Starting the Engine

Make sure that the switches, including those for the windshield wiper, light control and
air conditioner, are in the off position.
Turn the starter switch to the "ON" position to check that the warning and indicator
lights turn on normally and the fuel level is proper.
ADVICE
• Using a key sticking with dirt or dust, etc. may possibly damage the starter
switch. Make sure to wipe off any dirt or dust, etc. before inserting the key.
• Do not use starting aids such as ether in the air intake system. Such aids can
cause immediate engine damage.
• When the engine does not start, wait for more than 1 minute and then turn the
starter switch again.
• Do not rev the engine when it is still cold immediately after having been started.
Starting the Engine
WARNING
• Do not keep the starter switch in
the "START" position for more than
about 10 seconds. Operating the
starter for too long might cause
battery failure or might result in
overheating and even a fire.

CAUTION
• In manual transmission models, firmly engage the parking brake when you sit
in the driver's seat before starting the engine. Also, be sure to start the engine
while pressing the clutch pedal and after making sure that the gearshift lever is
in the "N" position.
• In automatic transmission models, firmly engage the parking brake when you sit
in the driver's seat, check that the selector lever is in the "P" position, and firmly
press the brake pedal before starting the engine.
• In manual transmission models, if you start the engine from outside the vehicle
when the gearshift lever is in a position other than "N", the vehicle may start
moving. This is very dangerous. Never start the engine from outside the vehicle.
1. Make sure that the parking brake

lever is fully pulled.
If your vehicle is a manual
transmission model, depress the
clutch pedal and brake pedal fully.
In an automatic transmission model,
make sure that the selector lever is in
the "P" position and then depress the
brake pedal fully.
Glow plug indicator light 2. When the starter switch is turned
to the "ON" position, the glow plug
indicator light comes on and will then
go out in approximately 0.5 seconds
if the engine is warm. If the engine is
cold, it will go out after remaining on
for a maximum of approximately 7
seconds.
ADVICE
• Do not depress the accelerator pedal before starting. When the accelerator
pedal is depressed before the starter switch is turned "ON", the start fuel enrich
system may not function correctly. Accordingly, starting becomes substantially
more difficult.

3. After confirming that the glow plug

indicator light has gone out, turn the
starter switch to the "START" position
to start the engine.
ADVICE
• At low ambient temperatures, a cold engine may emit more smoke (white
smoke) than usual.
NOTE
[Preheating]
• Diesel engines are compression ignited, which makes them difficult to
start when they are cold because the compression alone cannot create a
temperature high enough for fuel to ignite. "Preheating" means warming the
compressed air inside the combustion chambers to facilitate engine starting.
Be sure to start the engine after the glow plug indicator light has gone out.
Warm-up System
This vehicle is equipped with a warm-up system. The warm-up system is a system
that automatically increases the idling speed to warm the engine and improve
heater operation when the engine is started in cold weather (outside temperature of
approximately 5°C (41°F) or below). When the warm-up system is operated, the engine
idle speed will increase to approximately 1,400 r/min. This does not indicate a failure.
The warm-up system will automatically turn off when the outside air temperature
increases (to approximately 10°C (50°F)) or when the engine is warmed. Also, the
warm-up system will stop if any of the following occur during its operation.
• The brake pedal is depressed
• The clutch pedal is depressed (manual transmission models)
• The gearshift lever is placed in any position other than "N" (manual transmission
models)
• The selector lever is placed in any position other than "P" or "N" (automatic
transmission models)
NOTE
• The engine idling speed is slowly decreased when the warm-up system is
stopped by the operation of the brake pedal or clutch pedal.
• The engine idling speed is immediately decreased when the warm-up system is
stopped by the operation of the gearshift lever or selector lever.

Stopping the Engine

Firmly apply the parking brake.
With the accelerator pedal released, turn
the starter switch to the "ACC" or "LOCK"
position.
ADVICE
• To prevent the battery from going
dead, turn the starter switch to the
"ACC" or "LOCK" position after
stopping the engine. If you leave
the vehicle for an extended period
of time, place the starter switch in
the "LOCK" position.


INSTRUMENTS, WARNING LIGHTS AND
INDICATOR LIGHTS
● How to Read the Instruments (Instruments Layout) 4-10

● Speedometer 4-11
● Odometer and Trip Meter 4-11
● Tachometer 4-13
● Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge 4-14
● Fuel Gauge 4-15
● Clock Display 4-16
● Warning and Indicator Lights Layout 4-17
● Illumination of Center Display 4-19
● Multi-Information Display (MID) 4-20
● Warning and Indicator Lights 4-39
● Warning Buzzer 4-62

How to Read the Instruments (Instruments Layout)

Model without MID
1 2 3
4 5 6
Model with MID

1 7 3
4 5 8 9 6
Reference Reference
No. Name No. Name
page page
1 Tachometer 4-13 6 Fuel gauge 4-15
Odometer, trip meter and 4-11 Odometer and trip meter 4-11
2
clock* 4-16
7 Multi-information display
4-20
3 Speedometer 4-11 (MID)
Engine coolant 8 Temperature display 4-38

4 4-14
temperature gauge
9 Clock* 4-16
*: Vehicles with a factory-equipped audio
Shift indicator (automatic
5 4-84 system do not have a clock display.
transmission model)

Speedometer
Model without MID The speedometer indicates the vehicle
speed in km/h or MPH.
Model with MID
Odometer and Trip Meter
Odometer
The total distance traveled by your vehicle is indicated in km if the speedometer is
graduated in kilometer units. The total distance traveled by your vehicle is indicated in
miles if the speedometer is graduated in both mile and kilometer units. The unit on the
display cannot be switched.
Model without MID

When the starter switch is in the "ON"
position, this will be indicated on the liquid
crystal display.
Model with MID

If you select the odometer and trip meter
display when the starter switch is in the
"ON" position, this will be displayed on the
MID.

Trip Meter
Use the trip meter to learn the distance between the specific points or the distance
traveled during a specific period of time. In the case of a speedometer graduated in
kilometers, the value to the right of the decimal point indicates 100-m units, whereas in
the case of a speedometer graduated in both miles and kilometers, this value indicates
0.1-mile units.
Model without MID

In addition, two separate distances can be
associated with "TRIP A" and "TRIP B".
Use the two trip meters by switching
between "TRIP A" and "TRIP B" as
appropriate.
position, "ODO" and "TRIP A", or "TRIP B"
are indicated on the LCD. Each time you
press the reset knob lightly, the display
: Reset knob-Press once toggles between "TRIP A" and "TRIP B".
If you want to reset the trip meter, use the
: Reset knob-Press and hold
reset knob to select and display the trip
meter that you want to reset. Then, press
and hold the knob down for at least 1
second.
Reset knob
Model with MID

If you select the odometer and trip meter
display when the starter switch is in the
"ON" position, this will be displayed on the
MID. When resetting, display odometer/trip
meter and press and hold the MID switch.
Press once
Press and
hold

Tachometer
Red zone The tachometer indicates the engine

speed in revolutions per minute (r/min).
(Graduation "1" on the scale indicates
1,000 r/min.) The red zone indicates a
range of dangerous engine speeds beyond
permissible levels.
Do not drive your vehicle with the pointer of
the tachometer in the red zone.
The graduation and the red zone of
tachometer are various depending on the
models fitted.
ADVICE
• Exercise extreme caution when
shifting down on a steep downslope.
The engine speed may easily
exceed the critical speed, which can
seriously damage the engine.
Appropriate Gearshifts
Gearshift Lever → Refer to page 4-82

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

Model without MID With the starter switch in the "ON" position,
this gauge indicates the temperature of
the engine coolant. "C" means cold while
Safety zone
"H" means hot. If the engine overheats,
the engine overheat warning light comes
on. During operation, the gauge should
normally indicate within the safety zone.
Model with MID
ADVICE
• If the gauge goes up above the
Safety zone upper limit of the safety zone and
enters the "H" zone while you
are driving, the engine is likely to
overheat. Immediately pull safely off
Engine overheat warning light the road out of the way of any traffic
and take necessary actions to deal
with engine overheating.
• If the gauge is near the "H" zone
but is still in the safety zone, this is
not a malfunction. However, check
the coolant level in the reserve tank.
Add coolant as required.
• The engine can seize up if it is
stopped immediately after driving.
Take appropriate actions for engine
overheating.


Fuel Gauge
Model without MID With the starter switch in the "ON" position,
this gauge indicates the quantity of fuel
remaining in the fuel tank. "F" means the
tank is full while "E" means the tank is
almost empty.
NOTE
Model with MID
• When the remaining fuel level has
become low, the gauge will reach
the bottom level and will flash.
• After filling up the fuel tank, it takes
a while for the gauge to stabilize
after the starter switch is turned to
the "ON" position.
• If the fuel tank is filled while the
engine is off but the starter switch is
in the "ON" position, the fuel gauge
takes a while to show the correct
reading. If so, turn the starter switch
to the "LOCK" or "ACC" position and
then to the "ON" position again.
When your vehicle is running out of fuel,

the low fuel warning light comes on. In
models with an multi-information display
(MID), "LOW FUEL" is displayed on the
MID at the same time when the "RANGE"
screen is selected.
Model with MID (Displays when the
"RANGE" screen is selected) ADVICE
• If your vehicle has run out of fuel,
air bleeding procedure must be
performed.
Low Fuel Warning Light

When the Fuel Runs Out

Clock Display
Model without MID
In vehicles without a factory-equipped
audio system, a clock can be displayed
on the center display. To display the clock,
press the reset knob once to set the clock
display.
Set the clock using the following procedure:
1. Press the reset knob once to display
Reset knob the clock on the center display.
2. Press and hold the reset knob to set
Clock display the time setting.
3. Press the reset knob once and select
from a 12-hour or 24-hour display
type. After selection, press and hold
the reset knob to set the time setting.
4. Press the reset knob once to change
the hour setting in increments of 1
hour. Once the hour has been set,
press and hold the reset knob to set
the minute setting (in increments of
10 minutes).
the minute setting in increments of 10
minutes. Once the minutes have been
set, press and hold the reset knob to
set the minute setting (in increments
of 1 minute).
the minute setting in increments of 1
minute. Once the minutes have been
set, press and hold the reset knob to
end.
Model with MID

In vehicles without a factory-equipped
audio system, the clock will be displayed on
the MID. The MID switch can be operated
to set the time setting.
Select Mode → Refer to page 4-29

Warning and Indicator Lights Layout

Model without MID
2 4 5 6
1 3
8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 25 27 29 31 33
7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 26 28 30 32
Model with MID
4 12 7 9 22 35 6
16 3 2 30 8 5
14 18 10 13 11 20 23 34 25 29 26 32
17 1 19 15 21 24 28 31 27 33

Reference Reference
No. Name No. Name
page page
DPD operator
Engine oil pressure
1 regeneration indicator 4-61 19 4-46
warning light
light
2 SVS indicator light 4-52 20 4WD indicator light 4-61
3 Generator warning light 4-50 21 4WD low indicator light 4-61
4 Fuel filter warning light 4-53 Shift indicator (automatic

22 4-84
transmission model)
Turn signal indicator light
5 4-57
– left
Cruise control main
23 4-60
indicator light
Turn signal indicator light
6 4-57
– right
Cruise control set
24 4-60
indicator light
7 ESC warning light 4-45
8 TCS OFF indicator light 4-58 Front fog light indicator

25 4-57
light
9 ESC OFF indicator light 4-59
Light position indicator Water separator warning

10 4-57 26 4-52
light light
11 ABS warning light 4-44 Malfunction indicator light

27 4-51
(MIL)
Seat belt warning light
12 4-39
(driver seat)
Rear fog light indicator
28 4-58
light
Seat belt warning light
13 4-40
(front passenger seat) 29 Check trans warning light 4-53
30 Check 4WD warning light 4-54

Engine overheat warning
14 4-46
light 31 High beam indicator light 4-57
32 Door open warning light 4-56

Brake system/parking
15 4-42
brake warning light 33 SRS airbag warning light 4-41
16 Glow plug indicator light 4-58 34 Icy road warning light 4-55
Automatic transmission
Multi-information display
17 fluid temperature warning 4-54 35 4-20
(MID)
light
18 Low fuel warning light 4-55

Illumination of Center Display

Model without MID
position, the illumination brightness is
automatically adjusted in two levels
(daytime and nighttime) according to
the brightness inside the vehicle. The
speedometer and tachometer illumination
is linked to headlight illumination, however
Light sensor
the illumination brightness of the center
display is not linked to the headlights.
Perform the following operation to turn off
the automatic brightness adjustment.
CAUTION
• Do not place any objects in front of the sensor. Doing so will reduce the
sensitivity of the sensor, and will not operate properly.
• When the headlights are turned on during daytime driving with automatic
brightness adjustment turned off, the fuel gauge and engine coolant temperature
gauge may be difficult to see.
1. Hold in the reset knob and turn the

starter switch to the "ON" position.
2. Turn the headlights on and off 3 times
within 10 seconds. When the setting
is turned off, a beep will sound 2
times.
To turn on the automatic brightness
adjustment, perform steps 1-2 again.
Reset knob
NOTE
• The center display automatic brightness adjustment will not be turned off in the
following situation:
- The headlights are not turned on and off 3 times

Model with MID

position, the illumination brightness is
automatically adjusted according to
the brightness inside the vehicle. The
initial setting is "AUTO". By changing to
"MANUAL", the illumination brightness of
both the meter and MID can be individually
Light sensor set.
Illumination Control
CAUTION
• Do not place any objects in front of
the sensor. Doing so will reduce the
sensitivity of the sensor, and will not
operate properly.
Multi-information display The MID in the instrument panel can

(MID) display the following information.
• Warning and indicator lights
• Operation-related information
• Maintenance distance
• Diesel particulate defuser (DPD) state
• Fuel economy
• Range (possible driving range)
• Driving distance and average vehicle
speed
• Elapse time
Use the MID switch to select the desired
screen or function.

Main Routine
MID switch Basic operation and the screens of the MID
display are shown.
Press once
Use the MID switch to select the desired
Press and
screen or function.
hold
: MID switch-press once

: MID switch-press and hold
Kilometer display model
Mile display model
Displayed only
when the vehicle is
stopped
or
PM level/progress of DPD regeneration

is indicated using a total of six segments.
Display the
SELECT MODE

Warning and Indicator Lights Display

Reference
Display indication Description
page
Fuel level is too low.

4-55
(Displays when the "RANGE" screen is selected)
When the vehicle is driven while the parking

4-43
brake has not been released.
When the light control switch has been set to

" " or " ", the starter switch is placed 4-56
in the "LOCK" position and the driver's door is
opened.
When the starter switch is in the "ACC" or

"LOCK" position, the driver's door is opened and 4-56
the key has not been removed.

Illumination Control
Select and set the illumination control to adjust the brightness of the MID. Unlike the
MID operation, the operation is performed using the MID illumination control switch.
Display "ILLUMI MODE" by pressing and holing the MID illumination control switch and
perform an adjustment with "AUTO" or "MANUAL".
MID illumination control switch CAUTION

Press once
Press and • Adjusting the brightness of the
hold MID while driving is dangerous
and should be done only while
the vehicle is stationary. Park
your vehicle in a safe place where
stopping or parking is permitted
and is well clear of traffic before
adjusting the MID.
NOTE
• The "ILLUMI MODE" screen can be switched from all the screens. To switch to
the "ILLUMI MODE" screen, press and hold the MID illumination control switch.
• When no operation is performed on the "ILLUMI MODE" screen for
approximately 10 seconds, it will return to the prior screen.

Auto Mode
When the starter switch is in the "ON" position, the illumination brightness is
automatically adjusted according to the brightness inside the vehicle.
NOTE
• In the "HIGH" setting, the illumination brightness changes with high sensitivity.
The sensitivity of "NORMAL" is between "HIGH" and "LOW". "LOW" changes
with low sensitivity.
• The factory default setting is "NORMAL".
: MID illumination control switch-press once

: MID illumination control switch-press and hold
CAUTION
• Do not place any objects in front of
the sensor. Doing so will reduce the
sensitivity of the sensor, and will not
operate properly.
Light sensor

Manual Mode
The brightness can be adjusted when the starter switch is in the "ON" position. Adjust
the brightness as desired by pressing the MID illumination control switch. The meter
and MID can be individually set to six brightness levels.
CAUTION
• When the headlights are turned on during daytime driving with the manual
mode setting, the MID may be dark and difficult to see.
NOTE
• When auto mode is used after the brightness has been adjusted in manual
mode, the illumination will be automatically adjusted based on the brightest
state with the headlight switch in the off position setting for the manual mode
and the darkest state with the headlight switch in the on position setting.
• Vehicles shipped from the factory are set to auto mode.
: MID illumination control switch-press once

: MID illumination control switch-press and hold
Headlight switch is in off position
MID illumination control switch-press once: Select brightness
MID illumination control switch-press and hold: Confirm
Headlight switch is in on position
MID illumination control switch-press once: Select brightness
MID illumination control switch-press and hold: Confirm

Operation-Related Information Display

The operating conditions and operating control information of fuel economy, range
(possible driving range), driving distance and average vehicle speed and elapse time
are displayed.
NOTE
• The Operation-Related Information Display may differ from the actual values
due to the conditions of roads, wind, cargo weight, the rear body, etc. Use the
indications only as guidelines.
Fuel Economy
The system calculates and stores the distance traveled and fuel consumption while
driving to encourage the operator to drive the vehicle economically.
It displays fuel consumption for a certain section according to the distance displayed
on the trip meter.
Display types can be changed with "SELECT MODE".
CUSTOMIZE (Fuel Economy Display
Type Setting) → Refer to page 4-34
Message Display indication Display condition
Fuel economy Instantaneous fuel economy and average

(numerical display) fuel economy are indicated in figures.
Instantaneous fuel economy is indicated

Fuel economy
in the graph and average fuel economy is
(graphical display)
indicated in figures.
Fuel economy
Average fuel economy is indicated in
(average fuel
figures.
economy)
NOTE
• In the "SELECT MODE", the unit of the fuel economy display can be changed
to the desired unit from "km/l", "l/100km" or "mpg".
UNITS (Fuel Economy Unit Setting)


Range (Possible Driving Range)
Kilometer display model Displays the estimated maximum distance
that can be driven with the remaining fuel
quantity.
Mile display model
Displays a low fuel warning light when the

quantity of fuel remaining becomes low.
NOTE
• It may not always be possible to actually drive the displayed distance because it
is calculated based on the past fuel economy (average fuel economy).
• Since the fuel in the fuel tank moves when going uphill and downhill, the
accuracy of the displayed distance may decrease greatly.
• The display may not be updated when only a small amount of fuel is added to
the tank.
Driving Distance and Average

Kilometer display model Vehicle Speed
Driving distance and average vehicle speed
from when the values are last reset until
when they are next reset are displayed.
Mile display model

Elapse Time
Elapse time from when the values are
last reset until when they are next reset is
displayed.
NOTE
• The displayed values of fuel economy (average fuel economy), driving distance
and average vehicle speed, and elapse time can be reset on each screen
by pressing and holding the MID switch. In the default setting, fuel economy
(average fuel economy), driving distance and average vehicle speed, and
elapse time are reset simultaneously. The reset method can be changed in the
"SELECT MODE" to reset each screen separately.
CUSTOMIZE (Reset Mode)


Select Mode
Press the MID switch to display the "SELECT MODE" screen. With "SELECT MODE",
the unit, maintenance distance, customize setting, clock (only for vehicles without a
factory-equipped audio system), etc. are displayed, and their settings can be changed.
Main Routine → Refer to page 4-21

NOTE
• Press the MID switch once, select "END" and press and hold the switch to
return to the "SELECT MODE" entry screen. If no operation is performed on
the screen for approximately 60 seconds or the vehicle starts to be driven, the
screen automatically will return to the "SELECT MODE" entry screen.
• The "SELECT MODE" can be operated only while the vehicle is stationary.
When operating the "SELECT MODE", park your vehicle in a safe place where
stopping or parking is permitted and is well clear of traffic.
Reference
Message Purpose
page
Set a fuel economy unit and ambient
UNITS 4-30
temperature unit.
Set the distance for a reminder for "ENGINE 4-31
SERVICE OIL", "AIR CLEANER ELEMENT" and 4-32
"MAINTENANCE". 4-33
Set the buzzer sound on/off, fuel economy
display type, message display (depending on 4-34
CUSTOMIZE
the starter switch position), or fuel economy 4-35
display resetting method.
Change the clock display type and time
CLOCK* 4-36
setting.
END Return to the "SELECT MODE" entry screen. 4-37
*: Vehicles with a factory-equipped audio system do not have a clock display.

UNITS (Fuel Economy Unit Setting)

With "FUEL CONS.", a unit of the fuel economy display can be changed to the desired
unit among "km/l", "l/100km" or "mpg". Press the MID switch once to select, and press
and hold the MID switch to set.

UNITS (Ambient Temperature Unit Setting)

With "OUTSIDE TEMP.", a unit of the ambient temperature display can be changed to
either "°C" or "°F" temperature. Press the MID switch once to select, and press and
hold the MID switch to set.


SERVICE (Engine Oil Reminder Distance Setting)
With "ENGINE OIL", the reminder setting for the replacement time of the engine oil can
be set from 5,000 km (3,000 miles) to 20,000 km (12,000 miles). Increments of 2,500
km (1,500 miles) can be set between 5,000 km (3,000 miles) and 15,000 km (9,000
miles). Press the MID switch once to select, and press and hold the MID switch to set.
Shared display
Mile display model
NOTE
• If you select "OFF" in the engine oil reminder distance setting screen, no
reminder messages will be displayed.
• Once 1,000 km (600 miles) remain until the engine oil reminder distance, when
the starter switch is placed in the "ON" position, the engine oil reminder screen
will be displayed for approximately 3 seconds. Every 200 km (100 miles) after
that, the engine oil reminder screen will be displayed again when the starter
switch is placed in the "ON" position.
• If you press the MID switch once while the engine oil reminder screen is
displayed, the "SERVICE REMINDER OFF" screen will be displayed. After that,
reminder messages will no longer be displayed but the remaining engine oil
reminder distance will still be calculated without being cleared.
• By selecting the engine oil reminder distance again, the current engine oil
reminder distance is cleared and the calculation begins again.

SERVICE (Air Cleaner Element Reminder Distance Setting)

With "AIR CLEANER ELEMENT", the reminder setting for the replacement time of
the air cleaner element can be set by 5,000 km (3,000 miles) from 20,000 km (12,000
miles) to 40,000 km (24,000 miles). Press the MID switch once to select, and press
and hold the MID switch to set.
Shared display
Mile display model
NOTE
• If you select "OFF" in the air cleaner element reminder distance setting screen,
no reminder messages will be displayed.
• Once 1,000 km (600 miles) remain until the air cleaner element reminder
distance, when the starter switch is placed in the "ON" position, the air cleaner
element reminder screen will be displayed for approximately 3 seconds. Every
200 km (100 miles) after that, the air cleaner element reminder screen will be
displayed again when the starter switch is placed in the "ON" position.
• If you press the MID switch once while the air cleaner element reminder screen
is displayed, the "SERVICE REMINDER OFF" screen will be displayed. After
that, reminder messages will no longer be displayed but the remaining air
cleaner element reminder distance will still be calculated without being cleared.
• By selecting the air cleaner element reminder distance again, the current air
cleaner element reminder distance is cleared and the calculation begins again.

SERVICE (Maintenance Reminder Distance Setting)
With "MAINTENANCE", the reminder setting for the maintenance reminder distance
can be set by 1,000 km (600 miles) from 5,000 km (3,000 miles) to 20,000 km (12,000
miles). Press the MID switch once to select, and press and hold the MID switch to set.
" " is displayed in the reminder distance setting screen of "MAINTENANCE" to
indicate the next page. When " " appears, press the MID switch once to display the
next page.

Shared display
Mile display model
NOTE
• When you select "OFF" in the maintenance reminder distance setting screen,
no reminder messages will be displayed.
• Once 1,000 km (600 miles) remain until the maintenance reminder distance,
when the starter switch is placed in the "ON" position, the maintenance
reminder screen will be displayed for approximately 3 seconds. Every 200 km
(100 miles) after that, the maintenance reminder screen will be displayed again
when the starter switch is placed in the "ON" position.
• If you press the MID switch once while the maintenance reminder screen is
displayed, the "SERVICE REMINDER OFF" screen will be displayed. After that,
reminder messages will no longer be displayed but the maintenance reminder
distance will still be calculated without being cleared.
• By selecting the maintenance reminder distance again, the current maintenance
reminder distance is cleared and the calculation begins again.

CUSTOMIZE (Buzzer Sound ON/OFF Setting)

If you select "ON" in "BUZZER", a sound will be audible when the MID switch is
operated. Select "OFF" to turn the sound off.

CUSTOMIZE (Fuel Economy Display Type Setting)

With "FUEL CONS.", the display type of the fuel economy display can be changed to
the desired type among fuel economy (numerical display), fuel economy (graphical
display) or fuel economy (average fuel economy).


CUSTOMIZE (Message Display Setting)
With "MESSAGE", the preferred display setting for when the starter switch is placed in
the "ON", "START" or "LOCK" position can be selected.
Message display Display

type Pointer sweep Start up message End message
ON On On On
OFF On Off Off
SIMPLE Off Off Off
CUSTOMIZE (Reset Mode)

With "RESET MODE", the resetting method can be changed for "fuel economy (average
fuel economy)", "driving distance and average vehicle speed", and "elapse time".
Select "LINK" and then in one of the fuel economy (average fuel economy), driving
distance and average vehicle speed, and elapse time screens, press and hold the
MID switch. The fuel economy (average fuel economy), driving distance and average
vehicle speed, and elapse time will all be reset at simultaneously. To reset a value only
for the screen that is currently displayed, select "SEPARATE" and then in one of the
fuel economy (average fuel economy), driving distance and average vehicle speed,
and elapse time screens, press and hold the MID switch.


CLOCK (Time Setting)

Time Setting:
1. Select "CLOCK" on the "SELECT MODE" screen and press and hold the MID
switch.
2. Press the MID switch once, select the display type from "12H" or "24H", and
press and hold the MID switch to set. At this time, "SET:00" is selected and you
can press the MID switch once to set the time setting screen.
NOTE
• When "SET:00" is selected and the MID switch is pressed and held, the minute
is automatically set to "00". If the displayed minute is 29 or less, the digit is
rounded down, and if the minute is 30 or more, the digit is rounded up by 1
hour.
3. When the MID switch is pressed and held, the hour setting will be available.
4. Press the MID switch once to change the hour setting. Once the hour has been
set, press and hold the MID switch and the minute setting (in increments of 10
minutes) will then be available.
5. Press the MID switch once to change the minute setting in increments of 10
minutes. Once the minutes have been set, press and hold the MID switch and the
minute setting (in increments of 1 minute) will then be available.
6. Press the MID switch once to change the minute setting in increments of 1
minute. After the minutes have been set, press and hold the MID switch, the
setting is then completed and the MID will return to the "SELECT MODE" screen.


END
Select "END" and press and hold the MID switch to return to the "SELECT MODE"
entry screen.
Diesel Particulate Defuser (DPD) State

This function displays the amount of particulate matter (PM) accumulated in the DPD.
During DPD regeneration, the progress of the regeneration is displayed.
Message Display indication Display condition
The current level of PM accumulation in

DPD PM level
DPD is displayed.
Progress of DPD The progress of DPD regeneration is

regeneration displayed until it is completed.
DPD PM Level
The multi-information display (MID) shows the amount of PM accumulated in the DPD,
using a total of six segments.
As the amount of PM in the DPD increases, the number of the displayed segments
increases one by one from the left side ("L").
Status Display Status Display
PM level 0 PM level 3

Progress of DPD Regeneration

During DPD regeneration, the MID indicates the progress using a total of six segments.
As regeneration progresses, the number of displayed segments decreases one by one
from the right side ("H").
Status Display Status Display
Regeneration Regeneration
progressed to progressed to
1st step 4th step
Regeneration Regeneration
progressed to progressed to
2nd step 5th step
Regeneration
Regeneration
progressed to
complete
3rd step
Temperature Display
Outside Outside temperatures between -40°C (-40
temperature °F) and 50°C (122°F) are displayed on the
MID.
NOTE
• The displayed temperature may be
different from the actual temperature
depending on the surrounding
conditions, the driving conditions,
etc.

Warning and Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Warning Light (Driver Seat)

Model without Side Airbag and
Curtain Airbag
This warning light comes on when the
driver is not wearing the seat belt while the
starter switch is in the "ON" position.
NOTE
• The warning light will go out as soon
as the driver has buckled the seat
belt.
Model with Side Airbag and Curtain

Airbag
This warning light flashes when the driver
is not wearing the seat belt while the starter
switch is in the "ON" position.
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle continues
to be driven while the warning light is
flashing.
NOTE
• The warning light will go out and the
buzzer will stop sounding as soon
as the driver has buckled the seat
belt.

Seat Belt Warning Light (Front Passenger Seat)

Model with Side Airbag and Curtain
Airbag
This warning light flashes when a
passenger is in the front passenger seat
without wearing the seat belt while the
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle continues
to be driven while the warning light is
flashing.
NOTE
• The warning light will go out and the
buzzer will stop sounding as soon
as the passenger has buckled the
seat belt.
• Operation of the front passenger
seat sensor:
- The seat belt warning may be
activated even when there are
no passengers due to the sensor
detecting weight if objects are
placed on the passenger seat.
- The seat belt warning may not be
activated when the sensor does
not detect passengers due to a
cushion, etc., being placed on the
seat.

SRS Airbag Warning Light
The SRS airbag warning light should
flash seven times when the starter switch
is turned to the "ON" position, and then
should go out.
If the SRS airbag warning light comes
on, seat belt with pretensioner and airbag
may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
WARNING
• If you encounter any of the following conditions, errors have occurred. Have
your vehicle inspected/serviced at your Isuzu Dealer as soon as possible.
[System error]
- If the SRS airbag warning light does not flash seven times when the starter
- If the SRS airbag warning light does not go out.
- If the SRS airbag warning light comes on while driving the vehicle.
NOTE
• It is normal for the warning light to come on, flash seven times, and then go out
when the starter switch is placed in the "ON" position. The SRS airbag warning
light may come on again immediately after the engine is started, but it is normal
if it goes out after flashing seven times.
• The SRS airbag warning light may come on suddenly if the starter switch is
placed in the "ACC" position or electrical equipment is operated, but this is not
abnormal.

Brake System/Parking Brake Warning Light

Brake System Warning Light
This warning light will come on when the
starter switch is turned to the "ON" position
with the parking brake released, and if
there is no malfunction will then go out after
the engine is started.
The brake system warning light comes on
while the engine is running (after startup) in
the following situations:
• Drop in the level of brake fluid (due to
brake wear or fluid leakage, etc.)
• Abnormality in the EBD (the ABS
warning light will also come on.)
ABS Warning Light
CAUTION
• If this warning light comes on while the engine is running, immediately stop
your vehicle at a safe place well clear of traffic and promptly contact the nearest
Isuzu Dealer for inspection.
• Immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Isuzu Dealer
when the ABS warning light and brake system warning light both remain on.
The indications mean that the ABS will fail and vehicle will become extremely
unstable during braking. Also the rear brakes may lock up more easily than
usual in emergency braking. This could result in an accident.
Parking Brake Warning Light

parking brake lever is pulled up.
CAUTION
• The illumination of the warning light
does not necessarily ensure firm
application of the parking brake.
The parking brake lever must be
sufficiently pulled up and locked.
• Be careful not to drive the vehicle
with the parking brake lever still
pulled up.

Parking Brake Release Warning Light
Model with MID
If the vehicle is driven without releasing
the parking brake and the speed reaches
approximately 5 km/h (3.1 MPH), this
message appears on the display while a
buzzer sounds. When the parking brake
release warning light is indicated, release
the parking brake.

ABS Warning Light

This warning light should come on when
the starter switch is turned to the "ON"
position, and then should go out after
approximately 3 seconds.
This warning light comes on whenever
there is a problem in the anti-lock brake
system (ABS). In this case, the ABS stops
working but the brakes still function as
ordinary service brakes.
CAUTION
• If this warning light comes on while driving, immediately stop your vehicle at a
safe place well clear of traffic and take the following actions.
- Stop the engine.
- Restart the engine. Check if the ABS warning light comes on and then goes
out. If it does, there is no problem. The ABS operates normally.
- Move the vehicle slowly forward. Gradually increase the speed to 15 km/h (9
MPH). If the light goes off, the ABS is normal.
• Immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Isuzu Dealer
when the ABS warning light and brake system warning light both remain on.
The indications mean that the ABS will fail and vehicle will become extremely
unstable during braking. Also the rear brakes may lock up more easily than
usual in emergency braking. This could result in an accident.
• If the warning light does not go out, or comes on repeatedly, have the vehicle
inspected/serviced at the nearest Isuzu Dealer as soon as possible.
• Even if a problem has occurred in the ABS, the brakes will still work as normal
brakes. In this case, the ABS has no influence on the operation of the brake
system.


ESC Warning Light
When the starter switch is turned to the
"ON" position, the ESC warning light turns
on before going out after approximately
3 seconds. This warning light comes
on whenever there is a problem in the
electronic stability control (ESC). When the
ESC is operating, the ESC warning light
flashes.
The ESC warning light will also flash
when only the traction control system
(TCS) function is operating inside the ESC
system.
When the ESC warning light does any
of the following, the ESC may be faulty.
Please contact the nearest Isuzu Dealer.
• When the ESC warning light remains
on while driving.
• The ESC warning light does not turn
on when the starter switch is turned to
the "ON" position.
NOTE
• When the ESC warning light is on,
the TCS/ESC will not operate, but
this has no effect on normal driving.
• The ESC warning light may turn
on when the battery cables are
disconnected or the battery voltage
is low. The ESC function turns off
while the ESC warning light is on,
but the ESC warning light will turn
off by driving the vehicle normally
for a while, then the ESC function
will resume. If the ESC warning light
remains on even after driving for
a while, contact the nearest Isuzu
Dealer.


Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light

position, and then should go out after the
engine is started.
While the engine is running, this warning
light comes on if the engine oil pressure,
which lubricates the engine components, is
abnormal.
ADVICE
• If this warning light comes on while the engine is running, immediately pull off
to a safe place well clear of traffic. Stop the engine immediately and check the
engine oil level.
• The lubrication system may be faulty. Promptly have your vehicle inspected at
Engine Overheat Warning Light

engine overheats. When the engine
overheats, the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates the "H" zone, and the
engine overheat warning light comes
on. Immediately pull off the road in a
safe place, check the vehicle and take
necessary actions.
WARNING
• When the engine coolant is still hot, do not remove the radiator cap. Hot vapor
will come out and you may be scalded. Add engine coolant only when the
engine coolant temperature has dropped.
Adding the Engine Coolant


CAUTION
• If you continue to drive the vehicle with the engine overheat warning light on
steady, the engine may seize up.
ADVICE
• Do not shut down an overheating engine immediately. Otherwise, the engine
may seize up. Take appropriate actions for engine overheating.

Engine Oil Indicator Light

Kilometer display model Model with MID
This message appears when the
maintenance time is set on the "SERVICE"
screen of "SELECT MODE". This message
appears on the display when the engine
oil maintenance reminder distance will
Mile display model
soon be reached. The distance shown is
the remaining distance to the next engine
oil change time or the distance the vehicle
traveled after the due time.
When the maintenance reminder distance
will soon be reached, this message
appears after the starter switch is turned
to the "ON" position and remains on for
When the engine oil indicator light is
indicated on the multi information display,
have the vehicle inspected/serviced at the
nearest Isuzu Dealer.

Air Cleaner Element Indicator Light

screen of "SELECT MODE". This message
appears on the display when the air cleaner
element maintenance reminder distance
Mile display model
will soon be reached. The distance shown
is the remaining distance to the next
air cleaner element change time or the
distance the vehicle traveled after the due
time.
When the air cleaner element indicator light
is indicated on the multi information display,
Air Cleaner → Refer to page 6-38

Distance to Maintenance Indicator Light
screen of "SELECT MODE". This
message appears on the display when the
maintenance reminder distance set by the
Mile display model
user will soon be reached. The distance
shown is the remaining distance to the
next maintenance time or the distance the
vehicle traveled after the due time.
When the maintenance indicator light is
indicated on the multi information display,

Generator Warning Light

engine is started.
This warning light comes on when, while
the engine is running, there is a problem
with the charging system (such as a loose
or broken fan belt).
ADVICE
• If this warning light comes on while the engine is running, immediately pull off to
a safe place well clear of traffic and promptly contact the nearest Isuzu Dealer
for inspection.
Fan Belt and Air Conditioning

Compressor Belt

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
This indicator light should come on when
engine is started.
If this indicator light comes on while the
engine is running, this alerts you to a
problem with the engine electronic control
system or the diesel particulate defuser
(DPD). In addition, if this light does not
turn on when the starter switch is turned
to the "ON" position, an abnormality, etc.
in the engine electronic control system is
possible. Please contact the nearest Isuzu
Dealer.
CAUTION
• If this indicator light comes on and the engine stops, it is possible that the
engine has entered protection mode. Turn the starter switch to the "LOCK"
position once, wait at least 10 seconds and then proceed to start the engine.
Even if the vehicle is drivable, see the nearest Isuzu Dealer as soon as possible
for service of the system.
ADVICE
• If this indicator light comes on while the engine is running, avoid driving at high
speeds and promptly have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Isuzu Dealer.
• If this indicator light comes on either intermittently or continuously while driving,
service is required. Even if the vehicle is drivable, and does not require towing,
see your Isuzu Dealer as soon as possible for service of the system. Continued
driving without having the system serviced could cause damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel economy and drivability.


Service Vehicle Soon (SVS) Indicator Light

This indicator light should come on when
engine is started.
If the indicator light comes on during
operation, immediately contact the nearest
Isuzu Dealer for inspection.
Water Separator Warning Light

This warning light comes on when water in
the water separator needs draining.
Drain water following the instructions in the
"Draining Water from the Fuel Filter" and
make sure the warning light goes out.
CAUTION
• If this warning light comes on while
the engine is running, immediately
drain water from the fuel filter. If
you still continue driving with the
warning light on, the fuel injection
system may fail.
Draining Water from the Fuel Filter

Bleeding the Fuel System

Fuel Filter Warning Light
The fuel filter warning light comes on when
the fuel filter element clogged with dust and
others.
If this warning light comes on, have the
vehicle inspected/serviced at your Isuzu
Dealer as soon as possible.
Check Trans Warning Light

This warning light should remain on for
approximately 3 seconds after the starter
switch is turned to the "ON" position, and
then should go out.
If this light flashes after the engine has
started, there is something wrong with the
transmission electronic control system.
ADVICE
• If this warning light flashes, have the
automatic transmission inspected at
the nearest Isuzu Dealer as soon as
possible.
• While the warning light is flashing,
the computer may put the
transmission into emergency mode.

Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Warning Light

This warning light should remain on for
approximately 3 seconds after the starter
switch is turned to the "ON" position, and
then should go out.
temperature of the automatic transmission
becomes high while driving.
ADVICE
• If this warning light comes on while
driving, the automatic transmission
fluid is abnormally hot. Immediately
pull safely off the road out of the
way of any traffic, place the selector
lever in the "P" position and run the
engine at idling speed. Do not start
driving again until the warning light
goes out.
• If this warning light does not go off,
have the automatic transmission
lubricating system inspected at the
nearest Isuzu Dealer as soon as
possible.
Check 4WD Warning Light

The check 4WD warning light comes on
when the starter switch is turned to the
"ON" position and should then go out
after approximately 3 seconds. When this
warning light stays on, the 4WD system
has a malfunction. Please contact the
CAUTION
• If the warning light does not go out,
or comes on repeatedly, have the
inspected/serviced at the nearest
Isuzu Dealer as soon as possible.

Icy Road Warning Light
Model with MID
This illuminates when the outside
temperature is low and the road surface
may be frozen. Since this is based on
the outside temperature detected by the
outside air temperature sensor and not the
actual road surface temperature, it does
not accurately display frozen road surface
conditions.
CAUTION
• When the outside temperature is
low, the road surface may be frozen
even if the icy road warning light
does not illuminate. Concentrate on
driving safely, paying attention to the
condition of the road surface.

This warning light comes on when the fuel
level in the tank becomes low while the
engine is running. In models with an MID,
"LOW FUEL" is displayed on the multi-
information display (MID) at the same time
when the "RANGE" screen is selected.
Model with MID (Displays when the
"RANGE" screen is selected) ADVICE
• If the low fuel warning light comes
on, add fuel at the earliest possible
time.
• If the vehicle runs out of fuel,
air bleeding procedure must be
performed.
Fuel Gauge → Refer to page 4-15


Door Open Warning Light

The door open warning light comes on if
any door is not fully closed when the starter
Light Control OFF Warning Light

Model with MID
This message appears on the display when
the light control switch is set to " " or
" ", the starter switch is placed in the
"LOCK" position and the driver's door is
opened. A warning buzzer sounds at the
same time. When the light control switch is
placed in the "OFF" position, the warning
light will go out and the warning buzzer will
stop sounding.
Key Remain Warning Light

Model with MID
This message appears on the display
when the starter switch is placed in the
"ACC" or "LOCK" position and the driver's
door is opened when the key has not been
removed. A warning buzzer will sound at
the same time. When the key is removed,
the warning light will go out and the
warning buzzer will stop sounding.

Turn Signal Indicator Light
Either of these indicator lights flashes when
the turn signal switch is operated with the
starter switch in the "ON" position.
Both indicator lights flash when the
hazard warning flasher switch is operated
irrespective of the position of the starter
switch.
Turn Signal Switch
ADVICE
• These indicator lights will not flash if the bulbs are blown, or may flash
abnormally if bulbs of incorrect wattage are used.
Light Position Indicator Light

This indicator light comes on when the light
switch is in the "ON" position.
High Beam Indicator Light

This indicator light comes on when high
beam is selected or the headlights are
cycled between high and low beams
(passing signal).
Light Control Switch
Front Fog Light Indicator Light

This indicator light stays on while the front
fog lights are on.
Front Fog Light Switch

Rear Fog Light Indicator Light

This indicator light stays on while the rear
fog light is on.
Rear Fog Light Switch
Glow Plug Indicator Light

This indicator light comes on when
position and goes out when preheating is
completed.
Starting the Engine
TCS OFF Indicator Light

"ON" position, the TCS OFF indicator
light turns on before going out after
approximately 3 seconds. The TCS OFF
function is normal if the indicator light goes
out. When you wish to cancel the TCS OFF
after the engine is started, press the ESC
OFF switch for approximately 1 second,
and the TCS OFF indicator light in the
meter will turn on.
When the TCS OFF indicator light does
any of the following, the TCS OFF function
may be faulty. Please contact the nearest
Isuzu Dealer.
• When the TCS OFF indicator light
comes on during driving (when the
ESC OFF switch is not operated).
• The TCS OFF indicator light does
not turn on when the starter switch is
turned to the "ON" position.

NOTE
• In models with 4WD, the ESC OFF indicator light will turn on and the ESC
(excluding the TCS brake control) will not activate when the 4WD switch is set
to 4L (4WD low). If you wish to turn the TCS brake control off as well, press this
ESC OFF switch for approximately 5 seconds to cancel the TCS brake control
and cause the TCS OFF indicator light in the meter to turn on.

ESC OFF Indicator Light

"ON" position, the ESC OFF indicator
light turns on before going out after
approximately 3 seconds. The ESC OFF
function is normal if the indicator light goes
out.
When you wish to cancel the ESC after
the engine is started, press the ESC OFF
switch for approximately 5 seconds to
cancel the ESC and cause the ESC OFF
indicator light in the meter to turn on.
When the ESC OFF indicator light does
any of the following, the ESC function may
be faulty. Please contact the nearest Isuzu
Dealer.
• When the ESC OFF indicator light
comes on during driving (when the
ESC OFF switch is not operated).
• The ESC OFF indicator light does
not turn on when the starter switch is
turned to the "ON" position.

NOTE
• In models with 4WD, the ESC OFF indicator light will turn on and the ESC
(excluding the TCS brake control) will not activate when the 4WD switch is set
to 4L (4WD low).

Cruise Control Main Indicator Light

This indicator light comes on when the
cruise control main switch is pressed.
Cruise control main switch
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light

vehicle enters the cruise control mode after
the cruise control set switch is operated to
set the vehicle speed.
Cruise control set switch

4WD Indicator Light
The 4WD indicator light comes on when
the 4WD switch is used to select "4H (4WD
high)" or "4L (4WD low)".
Whenever you use the 4WD switch, check
that the 4WD indicator light has come on or
gone out as expected before driving.
4WD Switch → Refer to page 4-113
4WD Low Indicator Light

The 4WD low indicator light comes on
when the 4WD switch is used to select "4L
(4WD low)".
Whenever you use the 4WD switch, check
that the 4WD low indicator light has come
on or gone out as expected before driving.
DPD Operator Regeneration Indicator Light

starter switch is turned to the "ON" position,
and goes out when the engine is started.
This indicator light will flash when operator
regeneration of DPD is required. In this
case, perform operator regeneration
as soon as possible according to the
"Operator Regeneration Procedure".
When operator regeneration begins, the
indicator light will switch from intermittent
flashing to continuous illumination, and will
go off once regeneration is complete.
Operator Regeneration of DPD
Operator Regeneration Procedure

Warning Buzzer
A warning buzzer sounds under the following conditions.
Warning Buzzer pattern Condition

When the driver's door is opened if the key
Key remain Short, repeated beeps has not been removed and the starter switch
is in the "ACC" or "LOCK" position.
Continuous beeps When the starter switch is placed in the
(Model without MID) "LOCK" position and the driver's door is
Light control OFF
Short, repeated beeps opened while the light control switch is set to
(Model with MID) " " or " ".
When the vehicle speed exceeds
Parking brake
Short, repeated beeps approximately 5 km/h (3.1 MPH) during
release
driving with the parking brake engaged.
When the vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h
Seat belt
Short, repeated beeps (12 MPH) during driving with the seat belt
(Driver seat)*
unfastened.
Seat belt When the vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h
(Front passenger Short, repeated beeps (12 MPH) during driving with the seat belt
seat)* unfastened.
Manual When the gearshift lever is placed in the "R
One short beep
transmission (reverse)" position
When the transmission is shifted to a low
Automatic gear while the vehicle speed is too fast.
Three repeated beeps
transmission When the transmission is shifted to a high
gear while the vehicle speed is too slow.
When the vehicle speed, engine r/min,
gearshift lever (manual transmission models)
or the selector lever (automatic transmission
4WD Short, repeated beeps
models) position conflict with the changing
conditions and when changing is not possible
due to a 4WD system abnormality.
*: Models with side airbag and curtain airbag.
ADVICE
• The warning buzzer may not sound if there is a problem with the system. If this
occurs, the system needs to be inspected. Please contact the nearest Isuzu
Dealer.

SWITCHES
● Starter Switch 4-64

● Combination Light Control Switch 4-66
● Headlight Leveling Switch 4-68
● Front Fog Light Switch 4-69
● Rear Fog Light Switch 4-69
● Hazard Warning Flasher Switch 4-70
● Windshield Wiper and Windshield Washer Switch 4-71
● Horn Button 4-73
● Remote Control Mirror Switch 4-73
● Retractable Power Mirror Switch 4-74
● Illumination Control Switch 4-75
● Heated Seat Switch 4-76
● Rear Window Defogger Switch 4-77

Starter Switch
WARNING
• While driving, never turn the starter switch to the "LOCK" position. The key
could be removed from the switch, which then locks the steering wheel. This is
extremely dangerous.
ADVICE
• Using a key sticking with dirt or dust, etc. may possibly damage the starter
switch. Make sure to wipe off any dirt or dust, etc. before inserting the key.
• After starting the engine, do not turn the starter switch to the "START" position.
Otherwise, the starter motor may be damaged.
• Using electrical devices such as the audio system for an extended time period
with the engine stopped can completely discharge the battery.

Starter Switch
LOCK : In this position, the key can be
inserted or removed.
Remove the key and turn the
steering wheel until it locks. The
steering wheel will be locked
to help prevent theft. To place
the starter switch in the "LOCK"
position, press and hold the key
in the "ACC" position and then
turn it to the "LOCK" position.
ACC : In this position, the audio and
other accessories can be used
with the engine stopped.
ON : The key stays in this position
while the engine is running.
This position is also used for
preheating before starting the
engine.
START : The engine is started in this
position. Release the key as
soon as the engine has started.
The key automatically returns to
the "ON" position.
NOTE
• If the key cannot be turned
from the "LOCK" position to the
"ON" position, lightly move the
steering wheel clockwise and
counterclockwise while trying to turn
the key.

Combination Light Control Switch
Light Control Switch

Turning the light control switch to the
position indicated in the table causes the
relevant lights to illuminate.
ADVICE
• Each light will come on regardless
Do not operate the combination
lights for an extended time period
with the engine stopped. Otherwise,
the battery may go dead, making it
impossible to restart the engine.
NOTE
• When repeatedly turning the
headlight bulbs on and off frequently,
the service life of the headlight bulbs
will be reduced.
Position
Name
OFF
Headlight Off
Clearance light
Taillight On
Off On On
License plate light
Illumination light control
Rear fog light Off Off
Daytime running light (if equipped)* On Off
* The daytime running light will come on when the following conditions are met.
1) The engine has been started. 2) The light control switch is "OFF" position. 3) The
selector lever is placed in any position other than the "P" position (only for automatic
transmission models). 4) The parking brake has been released.

Switching between High Beam and
Low Beam
With the headlights on, move the lever
forward and backward to switch between
the high beam and low beam.
Moving the lever forward selects high
beam; moving the lever backward selects
low beam.
While the headlights are on high beam, the
high beam indicator light on the instrument
panel remains on.
When the Bulb Does not Come On
Switching between High and Low

Beams (Flash-to-Pass Signal)
By lightly pulling the light control switch
lever and releasing it, the high beam
comes on and off. At the same time, the
high beam indicator light on the instrument
panel comes on and off. Use this function
as a signal for flash-to-pass a vehicle or
other purposes.
Turn Signal Switch

When turning left or right, move the lever
up or down to flash the turn signal light.
ADVICE
• The turn signal lights come on when
the starter switch is in the "ON"
position. Do not operate the turn
signal lights for an extended time
period with the engine stopped.
Otherwise, the battery may go dead,
making it impossible to start the
engine.
NOTE
• If the steering wheel is only turned a small amount, turn off the signal manually.
Lightly press and hold the lever up or down when overtaking or changing lanes.

Headlight Leveling Switch

The headlight aim can be adjusted at four
different angles. When the cargo load
causes the headlights to aim upwards, this
feature can be used to lower the aiming
angle.
When your vehicle is not loaded with cargo,
the switch should be set at the uppermost
position. ("0" position)
Make adjustments in accordance with the
following table.
Up
CAUTION
• Do not lower the aiming angle too
Down much.
Otherwise, the illuminated range
may be so reduced that you may be
involved in an accident.
Position Load
0 No Load.
1 When loaded to about 300 kg (660 lb).
2 When loaded to about 650 kg (1,430 lb).
3 When loaded up to the maximum.

Front Fog Light Switch

When the light control switch is placed
in the " " or " " position, turn this
switch to the "ON" position to come on
the front fog lights, and then the front fog
light indicator light will come on. To turn off
the lights, place the switch in the "OFF"
position. The front fog lights are useful
when forward visibility is poor such as in
fog.
Front fog light indicator light
WARNING
• When replacing a front fog light
bulb, do not use one of a larger
wattage than the specified wattage.
Otherwise, the wiring may be
burned.

Rear Fog Light Switch

When the light control switch is placed in
" ", the rear fog light comes on and the
rear fog indicator light comes on. Use this
feature in low visibility such as in fog.
WARNING
• When replacing a rear fog light
bulb, do not use one of a wattage
Rear fog light indicator light larger than the specified wattage.
Otherwise, the wiring may be
burned.


Hazard Warning Flasher Switch

The hazard warning flasher is used to
signal other vehicles that your vehicle
is stationary on the road because of an
accident or component failure.
With the starter switch in any position,
when this switch is pressed, all of the turn
signal lights and the turn signal indicator
lights flash to signal an emergency. To
turn off the hazard lights, press the switch
again.
ADVICE
• Do not leave the hazard warning flasher operating for an extended time
period with the engine stopped. Otherwise, the battery may go dead, making it
impossible to restart the engine.

Windshield Wiper and Windshield Washer Switch

To use the windshield wiper and washer switches, the starter switch must be in the
"ON" position.
Windshield Wiper Switch
ADVICE
• Clear ice or packed snow from the wiper blades before using the wipers.
• Before operating the wiper, ensure that the wiper rubber is not stuck on to the
windshield. If the wiper rubber is stuck to the windshield and you still operate
the wiper, the wiper may break or the wiper motor may fail.
• Do not operate the wiper on a dry windshield surface. Otherwise, the windshield
surface may sustain damage. Always use the windshield washer when wiping a
dry glass surface.
• The safety system may work to stop the wiper when excessive load is applied
on the motor. In this case, turn the switch to the "OFF" position and, a few
minutes later, check to see if the wiper is back to normal operation. If the wiper
frequently stops operation, refrain from using it and contact the nearest Isuzu
Dealer.
The windshield wiper switch has the

Fast following positions, which correspond to the
(Mist)
Slow states of the wiper.
(Off)
(Intermittent)
(Low speed)
(High speed)
Intermittent ring
Lever position Wiper state

MIST Operated while the lever is only held upward
OFF Stopped
Intermittent (Light rain)
LO Low speed (Moderate rain)
HI High speed (Heavy rain)

Variable Intermittent Windshield

Wiper
Fast
(Mist)
The wipers will operate intermittently
Slow when the intermittent ring is rotated to the
(Off)
" " position. The interval between wiper
(Intermittent)
sweeps can be adjusted within a range of
(Low speed) approximately 1.5 to 15 seconds by turning
(High speed) the intermittent ring.
Intermittent ring
Windshield Washer Switch

Windshield washer fluid is sprayed over
the windshield when this switch is pressed.
At the same time, the windshield wiper
operates.
The windshield washer is used when the
windshield is being wiped during clean.
CAUTION
• At extremely low temperatures, washer fluid may freeze on the windshield after
being sprayed, obstructing your forward view. In such a case, warm up the
windshield before using the windshield washer.
ADVICE
• If windshield washer fluid does not come out in sufficient quantity, immediately
release the switch. Otherwise, the windshield surface may sustain damage.
• Do not hold the switch pressed for more than 30 seconds. Otherwise, the
washer pump may sustain damage.
• If windshield washer fluid does not come out, release the windshield washer
switch immediately. Otherwise the motor may seize up.
• When the vehicle is used in a cold-climate region, use washer fluid with
appropriate concentration for the season to prevent frozen fluid.


Horn Button
To sound the horn, press the pad with a
horn symbol on the steering wheel.
Remote Control Mirror Switch

The remote control mirror switch is active
only when the starter switch is in the "ACC"
or "ON" position.
Adjust
1. Press the left/right selector switch on
the "L" or "R" side to adjust the mirror
in the desired direction.
2. Press the angle adjustment switch
Left/Right Angle adjustment
to adjust the mirror angle. After
selector switch switch
adjusting, return the left/right selector
switch to the middle position.
WARNING
• Adjust the mirrors when the vehicle
is stationary, not while the vehicle is
in motion.
ADVICE
• Do not try to forcefully move the
mirror surface by hand. Otherwise,
the mirror motor may sustain
damage.

Retractable Power Mirror Switch

The retractable power mirror switch is
active only when the starter switch is in the
"ACC" or "ON" position.
Press the switch to retract the right and left
mirrors. To extend the mirrors, press the
switch again.
WARNING
• Adjust the mirrors when the vehicle
is stationary, not while the vehicle is
in motion.
• Do not operate the retractable
power mirrors while driving as this
is dangerous and could cause an
Retractable power mirror switch accident.
• Do not drive with the mirrors folded
in. Before driving, be sure to adjust
both the driver's side mirror and
passenger's side mirror to their
original positions.
CAUTION
• Do not touch the mirrors with a
hand while the mirrors are moving.
It could cause your hands to be
pinched or a mirror malfunction.
ADVICE
• When moving the mirror manually,
do not use more force than
necessary.
• Although the retractable power
mirror can be moved manually
as well, we recommend that you
electrically move the mirror to
prevent malfunction.

Illumination Control Switch

This switch is used to adjust the brightness
of the illumination in the instrument panel.
Turning the switch up brightens the lights,
and turning the switch down darkens them.
The brightness can be adjusted with the
light control switch in the " " or " "
position.
NOTE
Bright • In models with MID, meter
brightness is not adjusted in
coordination with illumination control
switch operation.
Dark • In models without MID, the
brightness of meter dials and
needles is adjusted in coordination
with illumination control switch
operation. (However, the illumination
brightness of the center display is
automatically adjusted according
to the brightness inside the vehicle
and is not adjusted in coordination
with illumination control switch
operation.)

Heated Seat Switch

The heated seat can be used when the
Press the "HI" side of the switch to warm
High side
indicator light
the seat quickly. The high side indicator
light of the switch comes on. After the seat
has been warmed, press the "LO" side to
keep the seat warm. The low side indicator
light of the switch comes on. When the
Low side
indicator light switch is placed in the neutral position, the
function is set to off.
CAUTION
Heated seat switch
(right front seat)
Heated seat switch • The following persons should be
(left front seat) careful so as not to receive a low
temperature burn.
- Babies and infants, elderly
persons, sick persons and
physically-disabled persons
- Children
- Persons who take drowsy
medicines
- Persons with delicate skin
- Persons who are extremely
exhausted
- Persons who have drank alcohol
• To prevent overheating, do not use
the seat with blankets and cushion
that keep it too warm.
• To prevent low temperature burn,
do not use the heated seat function
when napping in the vehicle.

ADVICE
• Do not use the heated seat when the engine is not running. The heated seat
consumes a lot of electricity and could discharge the battery completely.
• Do not place or set on the seats items such as a solid and heavy material, or
nails and screws that have a sharp protruded edge. This could cause the heater
wiring to break to be disconnected.
• If you spill water or a beverage on the seat, wipe it off with a dry cloth
immediately.
• Do not use organic solvents such as mineral oil, benzine, thinner, or gasoline to
clean the seats. Doing so may result in damage to the heater or seat covering.
Rear Window Defogger Switch

Heater/Manual Air Conditioner
Automatic Air Conditioner


DRIVING CONTROLS
● Pedals 4-80
● Parking Brake Lever 4-81
● Gearshift Lever 4-82
● Selector Lever 4-83
● Model with Automatic Transmission 4-85
● Cruise Control 4-95
● Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) 4-100
● Electronic Braking force Distribution (EBD) 4-103
● Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 4-104
● Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Model 4-112
● Diesel Particulate Defuser (DPD) 4-120

Pedals
Manual transmission model Sit in a correct driving position on the
seat and operate the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal with your right foot. To
avoid accidentally pressing the wrong
pedal, check the pedal positions and
practice putting your foot on the desired
pedal.
Footrest Brake pedal WARNING

Clutch pedal Accelerator pedal
• A can or bottle rolling on the floor
Automatic transmission model may prevent brake pedal operation
if it is caught under the pedal. This
is very dangerous. A floor mat must
be placed correctly. An incorrectly
installed floor mat may hinder the
free movement of each pedal.
Keep the Floor around the Driver's Seat

Clean and Tidy → Refer to page 2-14
Footrest Brake pedal
Making Sure the Floor Mats Laid Out
Accelerator pedal
Correctly → Refer to page 2-15
ADVICE
• Do not race the engine; engine
components as well as fuel
economy may be badly affected.
• If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, do not drive with your
foot resting on the clutch pedal.
Doing so may damage the clutch.

Parking Brake Lever
CAUTION
• Although the brake system/parking brake warning light will come on if the
parking brake is engaged, this does not mean the parking brake is fully
engaged, so always make sure the lever is fully pulled up.
• Simply pressing the release button does not return the lever to its original
position. You should always press the release button while pulling the parking
brake lever up slightly.
• If the parking brake lever is not completely returned to its original position during
driving, it may cause damage or a fire.
• In manual transmission models, if the vehicle is parked facing up a hill, place
the gearshift lever in the "1 (1st)" gear, and if parked facing down a hill, place
the lever in the "R (reverse)" gear. In addition, chocks must always be applied in
either of these situations.
• Never park the vehicle on a steep slope.
Operation of Parking Brake

Release button When parking the vehicle, fully apply the
Parking brake lever parking brake lever without pressing the
release button. The brake system/parking
brake warning light in the instrument panel
will come on when the lever is pulled up.
To release the parking brake, press the
release button while raising the lever a
little and then lower the lever. The brake
system/parking brake warning light in the
instrument panel will go out.
Brake system/parking brake
warning light

Gearshift Lever
Manual Transmission Model

A manual transmission model requires fully
depressing the clutch pedal when making a
gearshift.
When the gearshift lever is placed into "R
(reverse)" position, the back up lights come
on and a buzzer sounds.
ADVICE
• Make a shift into the reverse gear
from a forward gear or into a
forward gear from the reverse gear
only when the vehicle has come to
a complete stop. In addition, do not
shift gears without fully depressing
the clutch pedal.
Otherwise, the transmission may be
damaged.
NOTE
• As there is strong detent, apply
ample force when shifting to the "R
(reverse)" position.

Selector Lever
Automatic Transmission Model (5 Speeds)

Move the selector lever to shift into each gear position.
Park
Reverse
Push button
Neutral
Shift lock
Upshift
release button
Drive Drive
(auto mode) (manual mode)
Downshift
: Operate the selector lever while pressing

the push button with the brake pedal pressed.
: Operate the selector lever while pressing

the push button.
: Operate the selector lever without pressing

the push button.
: Operate the selector lever without pressing

the push button. The selector lever will return
to the manual mode position when you release
your hand after operating the lever in the
direction of the arrow.

Shift indicator in
Selector the instrument panel
lever Gear position
position Model without Model with
MID MID
Park:
P
Used when parking and starting the engine.
Reverse:
R
Used when backing up the vehicle.
Neutral:
The engine can be started in this position but
N for safety reasons get in the habit of starting
the engine with the selector lever in the "P"
position.
Auto mode (automatic gearshift):
The system automatically selects an optimum
D
gear (1st to 5th gear) according to the vehicle
speed.
Manual mode (manual gearshift):
Manually selecting the "+" (upshift) or the "-"
+, -
(downshift) position allows the driver to select
the desired gear (1st to 5th gear).
WARNING
shift indicator for safety reasons.
• If you always operate the selector lever while pressing the push button, it is
possible to accidentally shift the lever to the "P" or "R" position in some cases.
• Get in the habit of shifting the selector lever from the "N" to "D" or "D" to "N"
position without pressing the push button. Incorrect operation may cause a
serious accident.
NOTE
• For safety reasons, the shift lock system operates to prevent shifting of
the selector lever to any position other than "P" unless the brake pedal is
depressed, the starter switch is in the "ON" position. When pulling away, be
sure to keep the brake pedal depressed as you operate the selector lever.
Shift Lock System → Refer to page 4-93


An automatic transmission is a transmission system that allows the driver to move the
vehicle from a standstill, drive the vehicle with gears changing and bring the vehicle
to a stop by only using the selector lever, accelerator pedal and brake pedal, without
using the clutch pedal. Make sure you fully understand the characteristics of the
automatic transmission model and familiarize yourself with its operation.
WARNING
• Fully depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from moving even if it is
stopped on a level road, and place the selector lever into "P" and securely set
the parking brake as needed.
How to Use Automatic Transmission
CAUTION
• Before starting the engine, place the selector lever into "P", pull up the parking
brake lever and then fully depress the brake pedal.
• When moving the selector lever from "P" into any other position, be sure to
depress the brake pedal.
• Do not leave the driver's seat with the selector lever placed in "D" (auto mode or
manual mode) or "R" while the engine is running. The vehicle may start moving.
When leaving the driver seat, be sure to place the selector lever into "P" and
securely set the parking brake.

To Start Your Vehicle - on Normal

Roads
1. Fully depress the brake pedal, and
make sure that the selector lever is
placed in "P" and that the parking
Brake brake lever is fully pulled up.
Turn the starter switch to the "ON"
position.
2. Start the engine while fully depressing
the brake pedal with your right foot.
Place the selector lever into "D" (auto
mode or manual mode) for forward
movement or into "R" for backward
movement.
Model without MID 3. Make sure that the shift indicator
indicates "D" (auto mode or manual
mode) for forward movement or "R"
for backward movement, release
the parking brake, release the
brake pedal, and then slowly press
the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
Model with MID starts moving as you depress the
accelerator pedal further.

WARNING
shift indicator for safety reasons. If you always operate the selector lever while
pressing the push button, it is possible to accidentally shift the lever to the "P" or
"R" position in some cases.
• Get in the habit of shifting the selector lever from the "N" to "D" or "D" to "N"
position without pressing the push button. Incorrect operation may cause a
serious accident.
• Carefully operate the accelerator pedal because the speed is controlled only
using the accelerator pedal when starting or accelerating the vehicle.
NOTE
• When the brake pedal is not pressed, the shift lock system operates and the
selector lever cannot be shifted from "P" to any other position.
• On a snowy or icy road, by depressing the brake pedal you can make a
standing start in the manual mode 2nd gear and move the selector lever to the
"+" (upshift) position.
Shift Lock System → Refer to page 4-93

To Start Your Vehicle - on a Steep Slope

1. Firmly depress the brake pedal and make sure the parking brake lever is fully
pulled up.
2. Place the selector lever into the "D" (auto mode or manual mode) position
for forward movement or the "R" position for backward movement while fully
depressing the brake pedal with your right foot.
3. Make sure that the shift indicator indicates "D" (auto mode or manual mode) for
forward movement or "R" for backward movement, check the surrounding area to
make sure it is safe to move the vehicle, ease your right foot off the brake pedal,
and slowly press the accelerator pedal.
4. After you feel the vehicle start moving, slowly release the parking brake lever and
pull away the vehicle.
WARNING
• Carefully operate the accelerator pedal because the speed is controlled only
using the accelerator pedal when starting or accelerating the vehicle.
ADVICE
• When the vehicle is stopped, do not keep depressing the accelerator pedal with
the selector lever placed in the "D" (auto mode or manual mode) or "R" position
while depressing the brake pedal. Doing so may cause a failure.
• When stopping the vehicle on a slope, be sure to fully apply the brakes.
Keeping the vehicle stopped by depressing the accelerator pedal to produce a
strong creeping effect may cause a failure.
To Drive on Normal Roads - Auto Mode

When you change the selector lever from "P" into "D" (auto mode), shifting takes place
in the automatic mode. Check that "D" is displayed on the shift indicator.
CAUTION
• Do not place the selector lever into the "N" position while driving. The engine
brake does not work at all, possibly causing an accident. Doing so may also
cause a failure in the automatic transmission.

To Drive on Normal Roads - Manual
Mode
When the selector lever is shifted from "D"
(auto mode) to the manual mode position
Brake (shifted to the right side) while the vehicle
is stopped or being driven, the mode
changes to the manual mode and the gears
can be shifted manually as with a manual
transmission model.
• When changing the gear, move the
lever towards the "+" (upshift) or "–"
(downshift) direction as necessary to
select the desired gear. The currently
selected gear ("1" to "5") is displayed
on the shift indicator.
• Gears are not automatically shifted
in the manual mode. To return to the
auto mode, place the selector lever
into the "D" (auto mode) position.
Make sure that "D" is displayed on the
shift indicator.
ADVICE
• Shift into the gear that is appropriate for the vehicle speed. If an inappropriate
gear shift position is selected, a warning buzzer will sound and the shift will not
occur.
• Driving using an inappropriate gear in the manual mode will result in a failure of
the transmission system. In particular, avoid selecting higher gears when driving
uphill or towing. Doing so will cause overheating.
NOTE
• The gear is automatically shifted down to the 1st gear when the vehicle is
stopped.

2nd Start Mode on a Snowy or

Frozen Road - Manual Mode
Use 2nd start mode only when driving on
slippery road conditions due to snow, ice,
Brake etc.
1. Depress the brake pedal and stop the
vehicle.
2. Shift the selector lever from the "D"
(auto mode) position to the manual
mode position (shifted to the right
side). Press the selector lever forward
to "+" (upshift).
3. Make sure that the shift indicator
display changes from "1" to "2".
4. To disengage the 2nd start mode,
shift the selector lever to the "D" (auto
mode) position or select a gear other
than "2".
ADVICE
• Driving during normal road conditions using 2nd start mode will cause the
automatic transmission fluid temperature to rise, leading to breakdown.
To Accelerate (Auto Mode)

When you depress the accelerator fully while driving with the selector lever in the
"D" (auto mode) position, the transmission automatically shifts to a lower speed
gear according to the vehicle speed and the engine speed rises to enable sufficient
acceleration.
Uphill/Downhill Transmission Control System

On steep uphill grades or when towing a heavy load, the system senses a lack of
engine torque in the upper gears and prevents upshifting or forces downshifting. This
feature provides more suitable gear selection for driving uphill and unnecessary gear
changes are eliminated.
On steep downhill grades, the system automatically downshifts when the service brake
is applied as a trigger. Engine braking power is utilized to reduce the service brake
load.

Lock-up Clutch Slip Control System
This system provides increased transmission efficiency and fuel economy.
The system automatically operates to reduce torque converter slip loss during
moderate acceleration at low speed and to increase the effects of engine fuel-cut when
coasting.
NOTE
[What is lock-up clutch]
• It is a device that raises transmission efficiency in the 2nd to 5th gears (all gears
except 1st and reverse) when a certain speed is reached, and improves fuel
efficiency.
• The lock-up clutch will be released when the accelerator pedal is pressed
forcefully.
To Stop the Vehicle

When stopping the vehicle temporarily, firmly press the brake pedal with the selector
lever in the "D" (auto mode or manual mode) position.
WARNING
• When the vehicle is likely to be stopped for a long time, place the selector lever
into the "N" position, fully depress the brake pedal and firmly set the parking
brake. When the selector lever is placed in the "D" position, the torque converter
of the transmission generates heat and the oil temperature of the automatic
transmission fluid increases.
CAUTION
• When leaving the driver's seat, be sure to place the selector lever into the "P"
position, make sure that the shift indicator displays "P" and firmly set the parking
brake.
• Do not race the engine while the vehicle is stopped. If the selector lever is
placed in any position other than "P" or "N", the vehicle will suddenly move and
it may cause an accident.

ADVICE
• When the vehicle is stopped, do not keep depressing the accelerator pedal with
the selector lever placed in the "D" (auto mode or manual mode) or "R" position
while depressing the brake pedal. Doing so may cause a failure.
• When stopping the vehicle on a slope, be sure to fully apply the brakes.
Keeping the vehicle stopped by depressing the accelerator pedal to produce a
strong creeping effect may cause a failure.
NOTE
• When stopping the vehicle to wait for a traffic light, it is recommended that you
place the selector lever into the "N" position for improved fuel economy.
To Start Your Vehicle After Stopping

When starting the vehicle after stopping, visually check the selector lever position and
the shift indicator and start the vehicle by slowly pressing the accelerator pedal.
When Parking Your Vehicle

1. Set the parking brake while
depressing the brake pedal with your
right foot.
2. Place the selector lever into the "P"
position, make sure that the shift
indicator displays "P", and then slowly
ease your right foot off the brake
pedal.
3. Stop the engine and remove the key.
When the selector lever is not placed
in the "P" position, the shift lock
system operates and the key cannot
be removed.

WARNING
• Do not leave the vehicle while the engine is running. If the selector lever is
placed in any position other than "P" or "N" position, creep may cause the
vehicle to move or the vehicle may suddenly move by accidentally pressing the
accelerator pedal when getting in the vehicle. While the air conditioner is used
in models with an air conditioning system, the engine speed rises when the air
conditioner operates and the vehicle may start moving even when it is stopped
temporarily.
• When parking the vehicle, be sure to use the parking brake together with the "P"
position of the selector lever. Avoid parking only with the selector lever placed in
the "P" position.
• When parking the vehicle on a slope, place the selector lever into the "P"
position and chock the tires.
Shift Lock System

When Starting Your Vehicle
The selector lever cannot be operated from the "P" position to any other position when
the brake pedal is not depressed. Be sure to operate the lever while depressing the
brake pedal.
When Parking Your Vehicle

The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is fully placed in the "P" position
(key interlock system). Be sure to place the selector lever in the "P" position when
parking the vehicle.
NOTE
[Use the shift lock system correctly]
• The shift lock system is a system for safety to prevent incorrect operation of the
automatic transmission model. Use it correctly and drive safely.

When the Selector Lever Cannot be Operated from the "P" Position to
Any Other Position
When the selector lever cannot be operated from the "P" position to any other position
after the engine starts, perform the following checks.
• Check whether the brake pedal is firmly depressed.
When the brake pedal is not pressed, the shift lock system operates and the
selector lever cannot be shifted from "P" to any other position.
• Check whether the parking location is on a slope.
When the vehicle is parked on a downslope, operation of the push button of the
selector lever can become heavy. In that case, it can be operated smoothly when
pressing the push button while pressing the selector lever toward the front of the
vehicle.
Shift Lock Release

Push button When the selector lever cannot be
operated from the "P" position to any other
position even after checking depression of
Shift lock
release button the brake and the condition of the parking
location and performing the operation as
above, perform the following operations.
1. Fully depress the brake pedal and
securely set the parking brake.
2. Press the shift lock release button.
3. Press the push button and operate
the selector lever while pressing the
shift lock release button.
WARNING
• When the selector lever cannot be operated from the "P" position to any other
position even after performing the operation above repeatedly, the shift lock
system may have a failure. Have your vehicle inspected at the nearest Isuzu
Dealer at once.

Cruise Control
The cruise control function allows you to drive the vehicle at a constant speed without
operating the accelerator pedal. Cruise control can be used at vehicle speeds of
approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) or higher. This function should only be used when
driving without frequent starting and stopping, such as when driving on an expressway.
WARNING
• Do not use the cruise control function on the following roads, where using it
could be dangerous.
- A road with a heavy traffic, such as an urban road
- A road that includes sharp curves and steep downhill slopes
- An icy, snowy or otherwise slippery road
CAUTION
• Remember that taking your foot off the accelerator when the cruise control is
engaged will not reduce vehicle speed. When going up or down hills (particularly
when towing) it is possible for the vehicle to gain or lose speed, even though
the cruise control is engaged. If this happens while going up a hill, depress the
accelerator pedal to maintain the desired speed. If going down a hill, depress
the brake pedal, which will both disengage the cruise control and slow down the
vehicle.
• If you feel any abnormality when using cruise control, cancel cruise control
with the cruise control main switch and have your vehicle inspected as soon as
possible at your Isuzu Dealer.

Setting to Your Desired Vehicle Speed

Cruise control main switch 1. Press the cruise control main switch
to set it to "ON". The cruise control
main indicator light will come on.
In models with an MID, the cruise
control main indicator light is first
displayed prominently in the center
of the MID. After that, the size of the
display is decreased.
Cruise control main indicator light
Cruise control set switch 2. Use the accelerator pedal to adjust

the vehicle to the desired speed
above approximately 40 km/h (25
MPH). Upon reaching the desired
speed, operate the cruise control
set switch. The vehicle speed at the
moment you operate the switch is
set in the system, enabling you to
drive with the set speed automatically
maintained without using the
Cruise control set indicator light accelerator pedal.
At the same time the cruise control
set indicator light comes on.
In models with an MID, the cruise
control set indicator light is first
displayed prominently in the center
of the MID. After that, the size of the
display is decreased.
Accelerating during Cruise Control Driving

If you want to accelerate temporarily to pass another vehicle while driving using the
cruise control, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the accelerator pedal,
the speed returns to the original set vehicle speed.

Changing the Cruise Control Speed Setting
Cruise control resume switch When Increasing Vehicle Speed
When the cruise control resume switch is
operated, the speed increases while the
switch is held.
After the speed is increased to the desired
vehicle speed, and the switch is released,
the speed is set at the increased vehicle
speed. If you want to increase the speed
quickly, depress the accelerator pedal and
accelerate to the desired vehicle speed.
Then, operate the cruise control set switch.
When Increasing Vehicle Speed

Slightly
If the cruise control resume switch is
operated and released immediately, the set
vehicle speed increases 1 km/h (0.6 MPH)
per operation.
Cruise control set switch When Decreasing Vehicle Speed

When the cruise control set switch is
operated, the speed decreases while the
switch is held.
After the speed is decreased to the desired
vehicle speed, and the switch is released,
the speed is set at the decreased vehicle
speed. If you want to decrease the speed
quickly, depress the brake pedal to cancel
cruise control and decelerate to the desired
vehicle speed. Then, operate the cruise
control set switch.
When Decreasing Vehicle Speed

Slightly
If the cruise control set switch is operated
and released immediately, the set vehicle
speed decreases 1 km/h (0.6 MPH) per
operation.

When Canceling Cruise Control

Cruise control main switch Press the cruise control main switch again
to set it to "OFF". The cruise control main
indicator light will go out.
The cruise control is canceled in the
following cases.
• When the brake pedal is depressed.
• When depressing the clutch pedal
(manual transmission model).
• When the vehicle speed decreases to
Cruise control cancel switch approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) or
less.
• When there is an abnormality in the
engine control system.
• When shifting gears.
• When operating the cruise control
cancel switch.
• When the vehicle has been
temporarily stopped and the selector
lever has been placed in the "N"
position (automatic transmission
model).
• When the electronic stability control
(ESC) or traction control system (TCS)
is activated.
ADVICE
• When not using the cruise control,
be sure to turn it off.
• When placing the starter switch into
"ACC", reset the cruise control after
pressing the cruise control main
switch to turn off the cruise control.

When Returning to Cruise Control Driving
If you have canceled cruise control under the following conditions, you can return to
the cruise control driving condition before cancellation when you operate and release
the cruise control resume switch. The moment the resume switch is released, the
cruise control set indicator light comes on.
• When depressing the brake pedal.
• When shifting gears.
• When operating the cruise control cancel switch.


Wheels may be locked and slip during sudden braking or braking on a slippery
road surface such as a snowy road. ABS is a device to prevent the wheels from by
detecting a slippery condition during braking and to secure directional stability and
handling stability of the vehicle. ABS is only to assist in slippery conditions and will
not prevent an accident if you exceed safe driving speeds for road conditions. Always
drive safely.
CAUTION
• The braking distance on slippery road surfaces is longer than that on a normal
dry paved road even with an ABS-equipped vehicle. In addition the braking
distance can be slightly longer in deep snow and on a gravel road when ABS is
activated. Therefore, always keep in mind the road condition and tire condition
(type of tires and worn condition), observe safe driving habits and drive the
vehicle while keeping a proper distance between vehicles.
• ABS does not prevent accidents if you do not drive safely. Drive the vehicle at
a safe speed.
• Install tires of the specified size, same brand and same tread design (including
winter tires) on all wheels. If different tires are installed, the braking distance
becomes longer and directional control stability of the vehicle decreases. This is
very dangerous.
• Steering during sudden braking (when the ABS is working) will feel slightly
different than it does when the brakes are not applied. Operate the steering
wheel carefully keeping this in mind.
ADVICE
• Driving in sand or on a muddy road may adversely affect the brakes and ABS
sensors. Wash the vehicle to remove sand and mud after operating the vehicle
in sandy or muddy conditions.
• Before washing the vehicle, provide necessary protection to prevent water from
being splashed on the ABS components (sensors and actuators). Especially
when using high-pressure washing, be careful not to allow water to be directly
sprayed onto the ABS components and their harness connectors.

NOTE
[These are not signs of ABS malfunction]
• Immediately after the engine is started, a motor sound may be heard from the
engine compartment. This sound is from a self-check by the ABS. In addition,
you may also feel some vibration if the brake pedal is pressed at this time.
• When ABS is operating, vibration is felt on the brake pedal and steering wheel
and you may hear the system operating. This is normal when ABS is properly
operating.
• ABS is more likely to be activated when the brake is applied during cornering or
driving over a bump. This is because inside wheels or wheels that have gone
over a bump tend to lock.
• ABS is not activated immediately after starting the vehicle. It is activated
only when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 10 km/h (6 MPH). ABS
operation is inactive when the vehicle speed reduces to approximately 5 km/h (3
MPH).
ABS Operation Indications and Signs

ABS warning light Operation Indications of ABS
When the starter switch is placed into the
"ON" position, the ABS warning light comes
on and then goes out in approximately 3
seconds. The ABS is normal if the warning
light goes out.
Operation Signs of ABS

When ABS is activated, slight vibration is
generated on the brake pedal and steering
wheel, and an operating sound can be
heard from the ABS equipment.
NOTE
• If the ABS warning light does any of the following, the ABS may be faulty.
- If the ABS warning light comes on during driving
- The light does not come on when the starter switch is placed into the "ON"
position
• Even if a problem has occurred with the ABS, the regular brakes will still work
normally. However, ABS will not operate.
ABS Warning Light


Precautions for Driving an ABS-Equipped Vehicle

ABS is not a device that enables driving and stopping under conditions exceeding safe
driving limits. Always drive safely.
CAUTION
• When braking suddenly, continue pressing brake pedal hard so that the ABS
can take effect.
• When braking suddenly, do not pump the brakes (pushing and releasing the
brake pedal little by little). Pumping brakes will increase the braking distance.
• The braking distance on slippery road surfaces is longer than that on a normal
dry paved road even with an ABS-equipped vehicle. When ABS is activated
in the following road surface conditions, the braking distance may be slightly
longer compared to that of vehicles not equipped with an ABS. Therefore,
always be aware of the road and tire condition (tire type and wear condition),
observe safe driving habits and drive the vehicle while keeping a safe following
distance.
- When driving on a gravel road, or a road with a deep snow covering.
- When tire chains are used.
- When driving over road joints or bumps such as light reflectors on the road.
- When driving on a bumpy road, stone-paved road or track.
- When driving over an iron plate or manhole lid.
• ABS does not work for wheel skid during a standing start, acceleration and
cornering which do not involve braking. On a very slippery icy road, tires may
lose grip and steering wheel operation may not be able to control the vehicle's
direction, resulting in very unstable driving. Always drive the vehicle observing
a safe speed well matched with both road surface and tire conditions, and avoid
sudden braking.
• If powerful engine braking is applied on a very slippery icy road, the drive
wheels may be locked (the ABS then does not work), resulting in loss of vehicle
control. If this happens with a manual transmission vehicle, disengage the
clutch or place the gearshift lever into the "N" position to prevent engine braking
from acting on the drive wheels. Then, drive the vehicle with the gearshift lever
placed in an appropriate gear.
• When ABS is activated, a slight vibration (especially when the road surface is
different between right and left wheels) and pulling may be felt on the brake
pedal and steering wheel. In addition, an operating sound is produced from the
ABS actuators. This does not indicate any abnormal condition. Stay calm and
operate the steering wheel properly.

Electronic Braking force Distribution (EBD)

EBD is a function that uses the ABS to distribute braking force ideally between the front
and rear wheels in order to compensate for changes in load conditions or any shift of
the load due to acceleration or deceleration, thus preventing premature locking of the
rear wheels.
CAUTION
• If a problem should occur with the EBD function, the ABS warning light and the
brake system/parking brake warning light will come on simultaneously.
• The rear wheels will lock more easily if there is a problem with the EBD function.
Have it checked and serviced at the nearest Isuzu Dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE
• When the EBD operates, the brake pedal may push back slightly or you may
hear a sound similar to that generated by the ABS when operational. Neither of
them indicate any abnormal condition.


The ESC improves safety and a vehicle's stability. The ESC controls the engine power
and applies the brakes to the wheels that need it in order to suppress wheelspin
when starting or accelerating on slippery road surfaces, maintain drive power, prevent
skidding to the side and improve vehicle stability. The ESC has various sensors that
detect rapid changes in the vehicle conditions while driving. The traction control system
(TCS) suppresses wheelspin when starting or accelerating. The TCS is included in
the ESC. The ESC is automatically activated when the engine is started. However, by
using the ESC OFF switch, the ESC can be canceled (operation stopped status) or
only the function of the TCS can be canceled (operation stopped status).
CAUTION
• When the ESC is activated, the ESC warning light flashes.
• The ESC warning light will also flash when only the TCS function is operating.
• When the ESC warning light is flashing, the road surface is slippery or
acceleration is too fast. Loosen pressure on the accelerator pedal and drive
conservatively.
• The ESC warning light may also flash when fully depressing the accelerator
pedal on roads that are not slippery such as dry asphalt roads. This is a normal
condition that predicts slipping and operates control.
• Even with an ESC-equipped model, when driving on a snowy or icy road,
install tire chains or winter tires, and carefully drive the vehicle. The ESC is not
a device for drastically improving the vehicle stability when driving or starting
performance, so drive carefully on snowy or icy roads.
• When tire chains are installed, it may be easier for you to start the vehicle to
move on an icy slope if just the TCS is canceled. Be aware, however, that TCS
deactivation will result in reduced vehicle stability.
• Install tires of the specified size, same brand, same type and same tread design
(including winter tires) on all wheels. In addition, do not install or use tires with
significantly varying degrees of wear. If tires other than the specified size,
different types, or tires with significantly varying degrees of wear are used, the
ESC may not operate properly.
• If the tire diameter is different such as when installing tire chains or a spare tire,
the ESC may not operate properly.
• If suspension-related parts, brake-related parts, or engine-related parts are
replaced with parts other than Isuzu genuine parts or modified, the ESC may
not operate properly.
CAUTION (Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)
• Be sure to consult with your Isuzu Dealer for replacement or repair of the
steering wheel or steering-related parts. There is a sensor on the steering
wheel that detects driving operation conditions, and the ESC may not operate
properly if the steering wheel center position is misaligned.
• Do not tow the vehicle with the starter switch turned to the "ON" position with
just the front wheels or rear wheels raised. The ESC may operate and cause an
accident.
NOTE
[These are not signs of ESC malfunction]
• Immediately after the engine is started, a motor sound may be heard from the
engine compartment. This sound is from a self-check by the ESC. In addition,
you may also feel some vibration if the brake pedal is pressed at this time.
• When the ESC is operating, the brake pedal movement may wiggle or feel tight.
In addition, the vehicle body may vibrate or you may hear operating sounds.
This is normal for ESC operation.
• The ESC will not operate immediately after starting until the vehicle reaches
approximately 15 km/h (9 MPH).

ESC OFF Switch

When getting unstuck from mud or fresh snow with the ESC and TCS operating, the
engine output may not rise even when the accelerator pedal is depressed, making
getting unstuck difficult. In times like this, pressing the ESC OFF switch will make
getting unstuck easier. The ESC can be turned off using the ESC OFF switch, or just
the TCS (function for suppressing tire spinning when starting or accelerating) in the
ESC system can be turned off.
When Canceling the TCS

When the ESC is active after the engine
is started, press the ESC OFF switch for
approximately 1 second to cancel the TCS
and cause the TCS OFF indicator light in
the meter to turn on. When the switch is
pressed again for approximately 1 second,
the TCS function turns back on.
CAUTION
• When you turn off the TCS, it will
not be available to assist you in
slippery driving conditions. Always
use caution when driving on slippery
roads.
• Be sure to enable the TCS during
TCS OFF indicator light normal driving.
• Even when the TCS is off, partial
brake control will operate. The
ESC warning light will flash during
operation.
ESC warning light

NOTE
• If the engine is turned off and then
restarted again while the TCS is
off, the TCS will be automatically
reactivated.
• In models with 4WD, the ESC OFF
indicator light will turn on and the
ESC (excluding the TCS brake
control) will not activate when the
4WD switch is set to 4L (4WD low).
If you wish to turn the TCS brake
control off as well, press this ESC
OFF switch for approximately 5
seconds to cancel the TCS brake
control and cause the TCS OFF
indicator light in the meter to turn
on.
When Canceling the ESC

When the ESC is active after the engine
is started, press the ESC OFF switch for
approximately 5 seconds to cancel the ESC
and cause the ESC OFF indicator light in
the meter to turn on. When the switch is
pressed again for approximately 1 second,
the ESC function turns back on.
CAUTION
• When you turn off the ESC, it will
not be available to assist you in
slippery driving conditions. Always
use caution when driving on slippery
roads.
• Be sure to enable the ESC during
ESC OFF indicator light normal driving.
• When the ESC is turned off, the
TCS will also be turned off, thus
be careful when driving on slippery
roads.

NOTE
• If the engine is turned off and then
restarted again while the ESC is
off, the ESC will be automatically
reactivated.
• In models with 4WD, the ESC OFF
indicator light will turn on and the
ESC (excluding the TCS brake
control) will not activate when the
4WD switch is set to 4L (4WD low).
The ESC warning light will flash
during operation.

ESC Operation Check, Operation, Error
ESC warning light ESC Operation Check
"ON" position, the ESC warning light,
TCS OFF indicator light, and ESC OFF
indicator light turn on before going out
after approximately 3 seconds. The ESC
is normal if the warning light and indicator
TCS OFF indicator light light go out.
When the ESC is Operational

When the ESC is operating, the ESC
warning light flashes.
ESC Faulty
ESC OFF indicator light When the ESC warning light does any
of the following, the ESC may be faulty.
• The ESC warning light remains on
while driving.
• The TCS OFF indicator light and
ESC OFF indicator light turn on while
driving (when the ESC OFF switch is
not operated).
• The ESC warning light, TCS OFF
indicator light, and ESC OFF indicator
light do not turn on when the starter
NOTE
• If the ESC is faulty, it does not
interfere with normal driving.
However, the ESC will not function.

Driving Precautions for Vehicles Equipped with ESC
CAUTION
• The ESC is not a device that enables driving under conditions exceeding safe
limits. Always drive safely.
• Always concentrate on driving safely and do not be overconfident just because
the vehicle is equipped with the ESC, so do not drive too fast and turn the
steering wheel too sharply.
• The ESC does not increase the road grip of tires although it controls slipping
and sliding of vehicles and improves the vehicle stability on a slippery road
surface during starting and acceleration when compared to a model without
ESC. On an icy or otherwise slippery road, the grip of the tires decreases which
also reduces steering control, resulting in unstable vehicle behavior. Always
drive the vehicle observing a safe speed well matched to the road surface and
tire conditions, and also avoid speeding.
• The ESC is a system for maintaining drive power and vehicle stability. Turn the
system on even when it is not needed. When the system is turned off, drive
carefully at a safe speed well matched to the road surface.
• Even if ESC is equipped, avoid sudden operation of the accelerator pedal,
clutch pedal (manual transmission models) and steering wheel. Especially when
starting the vehicle on a slippery road, start up slowly as you would in a vehicle
without ESC.
• When the ESC is activated, the ESC warning light flashes.
• The ESC warning light will also flash when only the TCS function is operating.
• When the ESC warning light is flashing, the road surface is slippery or
acceleration is too fast. Loosen pressure on the accelerator pedal and drive
conservatively.
• The ESC warning light may also flash when fully depressing the accelerator
pedal on roads that are not slippery such as dry asphalt roads. This is a normal
condition that predicts slipping and operates control.
• Even with an ESC-equipped model, when driving on a snowy or icy road,
carefully drive the vehicle, and install tire chains or winter tires.
• When tire chains are installed, it may be easier for you to start the vehicle to
move on an icy slope if just the TCS is canceled. Be aware, however, that TCS
deactivation will result in reduced vehicle stability.
• Do not install a commercially available limited slip differential (LSD). The ESC
may not operate properly.

NOTE
• When the ESC is operating, the brake pedal movement may wiggle or feel tight.
In addition, the vehicle body may vibrate or you may hear operating sounds.
This is normal for ESC operation.
• If there is significant wear or degradation on parts related to the suspension,
tires, brakes, etc., the ESC warning light may turn on. In such cases, the ESC
may not function properly.
• The ESC warning light may turn on when the vehicle is on a turntable at the
entrance of a parking garage or on a moving object , etc. In such cases, re-start
the engine after the vehicle has left the turntable.
• The ESC warning light may turn on when driving on roads with extreme inclines
(the banks seen on race tracks, etc.). In such cases, the ESC may not function
properly, so do not drive on such roads.
• The ESC warning light may turn on when the battery cables are disconnected
or the battery voltage is low. The ESC function turns off while the ESC warning
light is on, but the ESC warning light will turn off by driving the vehicle normally
for a while, then the ESC function will resume. If the ESC warning light remains
on even after driving for a while, contact the nearest Isuzu Dealer.


2WD and 4WD ("4H (4WD high)" or "4L (4WD low)") operation can be selected using
the 4WD switch. Change them according to the driving conditions.
4H
4L
2H
CAUTION
• Even a 4WD vehicle does not exempt you from safe driving practices. Operate
the accelerator pedal, steering wheel and brake pedal with the same level of
caution as when driving a standard rear-wheel drive vehicle.
• Install tires of the specified size, same brand and same tread design (including
winter tires) on all wheels.

4WD Switch
Use the 4WD switch to select 2WD or 4WD
("4H (4WD high)" or "4L (4WD low)").
CAUTION
• Driving in 4WD mode on dry, well-paved roads can accelerate wearing of the
front tires and reduce fuel efficiency. As this action can also increase vehicle
noise levels and lead to drive system damage, 2WD should always be used
under these driving conditions.
NOTE
• When the vehicle speed, engine speed, gearshift lever (manual transmission
models) or the selector lever (automatic transmission models) position conflict
with the changing conditions and when there is an abnormality in 4WD system,
a warning buzzer sounds to alert you that switching is not possible.
• In the event that the 4WD indicator light or 4WD low indicator light fail to either
go off or come on even when the 4WD switch is operated, have the vehicle
inspected and serviced at your Isuzu Dealer.
• When the check 4WD warning light is on, have the vehicle inspected and
serviced at your Isuzu Dealer.
4WD Indicator Light

4WD Low Indicator Light
Check 4WD Warning Light

Guidelines for 2WD to 4WD Switching

Drive type 2WD 4WD
2H 4H (4WD high) 4L (4WD low)
4WD switch
Indicator
OFF
light
Model with
MID* 2H 4H 4L
Wet roads, snow- Steep slopes, rough
covered roads, icy roads, sand, mud or
During normal driving
Driving roads, and other roads deep snow, and other
on an ordinary road or
conditions where the vehicle roads where the vehicle
highway.
needs more traction needs significant
than 2WD. traction.
*: When the 4WD switch has been operated in each position, it will be displayed on the
MID for approximately 3 seconds.
ADVICE
• Do not set the 4WD switch midway between the "2H" and "4H" positions or the
"4H" and "4L" positions. Doing so could cause a malfunction.

Switching from "2H" to "4H (4WD
High)"
WARNING
• Do not operate the 4WD switch from
"2H" to "4H" while the wheels are
spinning.
Stop the slipping or spinning first,
and then operate the 4WD switch.
1. Keep the vehicle moving straight and

operate the 4WD switch to the "4H"
position at a constant speed below
100 km/h (60 MPH).
NOTE
• When the 4WD switch is operated
at vehicle speeds over 100 km/h
(60 MPH), the 4WD indicator light
flashes and a warning buzzer
sounds.
4WD indicator light 2. The 4WD indicator light comes on

when "2H" is switched to "4H".
The 4WD indicator light continues
flashing until the operation is
complete.
NOTE
• If the 4WD indicator light does not
come on, move the vehicle slowly
Switching from "4H (4WD High)" to

"2H"
1. Keep the vehicle moving straight and
operate the 4WD switch to the "2H"
position at a constant speed below
100 km/h (60 MPH).

2. The 4WD indicator light goes off when

"4H" is switched to "2H".
The 4WD indicator light continues
flashing until the operation is
complete.
NOTE
• If the 4WD indicator light does not
go off, move the vehicle slowly
Switching between "4H (4WD High)" and "4L (4WD Low)"
NOTE
• Operate the 4WD switch when all of the following conditions are fulfilled. If the
4WD switch is operated when the conditions are not fulfilled, a warning buzzer
sounds while the 4WD indicator light and 4WD low indicator light flash (at about
1/2-second intervals) to inform the driver that switching to "4H" or "4L" is not
possible.
- The vehicle is stationary.
- The engine speed is less than 3,000 r/min.
- The gearshift lever is placed in the "N" position in the manual transmission
model, and the selector lever is placed in the "N" position in the automatic
transmission model.
• If the status before the 4WD switch operation is any of the following, a waiting
time is needed before switching to "4H" or "4L" can be performed (waiting time:
A maximum of approximately 3 minutes).
The 4WD indicator light and 4WD low indicator light flash (at about 1/2-second
intervals) until switching is complete.
In these cases, the waiting time can be reset by turning the starter switch to the
"LOCK" position.
- The vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time with the gearshift lever
in the "1 (1st)" position and the clutch pedal depressed (manual transmission
model).
- The vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time with the selector lever
in the "D" position and the brake pedal depressed (automatic transmission
model).

1. Stop the vehicle.
2. On the manual transmission model,
shift the gearshift lever to the "N"
position and fully depress the clutch
pedal.
On the automatic transmission
model, shift the selector lever to the
"N" position and check that the shift
indicator indicates "N".
3. Select "4H" or "4L" while pressing the
4WD switch.
4WD low indicator light 4. When "4H" is switched to "4L", the

4WD low indicator light comes on,
and when "4L" is switched to "4H",
the 4WD low indicator light goes off.
NOTE
• If the 4WD low indicator light
does not come on or go off, move
the vehicle slowly forward and
backward.

Switching between "2H" and "4L (4WD Low)"
CAUTION
• Do not operate the 4WD switch while the rear wheels are spinning on a snow-
covered, frozen or slippery road.
NOTE
• Operate the 4WD switch when all of the following conditions are fulfilled. If the
4WD switch is operated when the conditions are not fulfilled, a warning buzzer
sounds while the 4WD indicator light and 4WD low indicator light flash (at about
1/2-second intervals) to inform the driver that switching to "2H" or "4L" is not
possible.
- The vehicle is stationary.
- The engine speed is less than 3,000 r/min.
- The gearshift lever is placed in the "N" position in the manual transmission
model, and the selector lever is placed in the "N" position in the automatic
transmission model.
• If the status before the 4WD switch operation is any of the following, a waiting
time is needed before switching to "2H" or "4L" can be performed (waiting time:
A maximum of approximately 3 minutes).
The 4WD indicator light and 4WD low indicator light flash (at about 1/2-second
intervals) until switching is complete.
In these cases, the waiting time can be reset by turning the starter switch to the
"LOCK" position.
- The vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time with the gearshift lever
in the "1 (1st)" position and the clutch pedal depressed (manual transmission
model).
- The vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time with the selector lever
in the "D" position and the brake pedal depressed (automatic transmission
model).

1. Stop the vehicle.
2. On the manual transmission model,
shift the gearshift lever to the "N"
position and fully depress the clutch
pedal.
On the automatic transmission
model, shift the selector lever to the
"N" position and check that the shift
indicator indicates "N".
3. Operate the 4WD switch to "4L" or
"2H".
4WD indicator 4WD low indicator 4. When "2H" is switched to "4L", the
light light 4WD indicator light and 4WD low
indicator light come on, and when
"4L" is switched to "2H", the 4WD
indicator light and 4WD low indicator
light go off.
NOTE
• If the 4WD indicator light and 4WD
low indicator light do not come on
or go off, move the vehicle slowly


The DPD purifies diesel exhaust gases of particulate matter (PM). PM is filtered
from the exhaust gas and accumulated in the DPD. When PM accumulates to level
predetermined by the engine control module, the DPD automatically burns the PM in a
process called regeneration. Regeneration may not be completed under certain driving
conditions. If this occurs, the DPD operator regeneration indicator light will flash to
prompt for the completion of DPD regeneration.
Automatic Regeneration of DPD

The DPD will regenerate itself as part of normal operation. The engine control module
controls this function based on several factors. During regeneration, the engine idle
speed will increase. When this occurs, the DPD is automatically regenerated. This
does not indicate a failure.
ADVICE
• The DPD performs regeneration automatically when a certain amount of PM
accumulates in the DPD. Regeneration occurs during driving and the DPD
operator regeneration indicator light does not come on during regeneration.
Depending upon driving conditions, however, the regeneration may sometimes
not be completed. In this case, the DPD operator regeneration indicator light will
flash, so perform operator regeneration as soon as possible according to the
"Operator Regeneration Procedure". This operation recovers the function of the
DPD. It does not mean that a failure has occurred.
NOTE
• In models with MID, the amount of PM accumulated in the DPD and the
progress status for DPD regeneration can be displayed with the MID.
• Regeneration time may differ depending on outside temperature, engine coolant
temperature and driving conditions.
• During regeneration, white smoke may be temporarily produced from the
exhaust pipe. This results from combustion of PM, it does not indicate a failure.
• The engine coolant temperature may rise during regeneration.
NOTE (Continued)

NOTE (Continued)
• Automatic regeneration is performed under normal driving conditions, however,
operator regeneration may be required under the following conditions.
- If the vehicle is only driven at low speeds
- If the engine is frequently started and stopped
- If the engine frequently idles for extended periods (1 hour or more)
- If the engine is habitually stopped before engine warming is complete
DPD PM Level → Refer to page 4-37

Operator Regeneration of DPD

DPD operator regeneration Steps for regenerating the DPD should be
indicator light taken when the DPD operator regeneration
indicator light flashes. Perform operator
regeneration as soon as possible according
to the "Operator Regeneration Procedure".
If driving is continued with the light slowly
flashing (1 Hz), the light will begin to flash
more quickly (3 Hz). If driving is continued
in this state for too long, the DPD may fail.
Therefore, perform operator regeneration
immediately according to the "Operator
Regeneration Procedure".
ADVICE
• If the status of DPD regeneration continues to be incomplete, the malfunction
indictor light (MIL) will come on. If this occurs, have your vehicle inspected/
serviced at your Isuzu Dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE
• Depending on usage conditions, the light may begin flashing quickly (3Hz).
If this occurs, perform operator regeneration immediately according to the

Operator Regeneration Procedure

1. Drive at a constant speed more than 70 km/h (45 MPH) while paying attention to
the vehicle surroundings.
2. When vehicle speed, engine coolant temperatures and other factors are met, the
DPD operator regeneration indicator light will switch from intermittent flashing to
continuous illumination and DPD regeneration will begin.
3. Drive at as constant of a speed as possible. Operator regeneration of DPD is
complete once the DPD operator regeneration indicator light will go off.
WARNING
• It is not always necessary to continue driving under the conditions mentioned
above. Always drive safely in accordance with road and traffic conditions.
ADVICE
• Although operator regeneration of DPD is usually completed within
approximately 15 minutes, the time may differ depending on outside
temperature, engine coolant temperature and driving conditions. As a guide, for
completing operator regeneration in cold regions, continue driving in 4th gear (for
automatic transmission models, maintaining 4th gear in manual mode) at more
than 70 km/h (45 MPH) for approximately 15 minutes.
NOTE
• During regeneration, the engine idle speed will increase.
• In models with MID, the amount of PM accumulated in the DPD and the
progress status for DPD regeneration can be displayed with the MID.
• DPD regeneration process will continue even in the case of deceleration or
vehicle stoppage. In addition, it is possible to turn off the engine during the
process. In this case, the regeneration will stop, but the next time the engine
coolant becomes warm after being started, the DPD operator regeneration
indicator light will flash to prompt for the completion of DPD regeneration. If this
occurs, perform operator regeneration as soon as possible according to the

(5 Speeds) → Refer to page 4-83
DPD PM Level → Refer to page 4-37

COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE 5
● Air Outlets 5-2 ● Small Article Storage Pocket

5-37
(Upper Side of Dashboard)
● Heater/Manual Air
5-4
Conditioner
● Small Article Storage Pocket
5-38
● Automatic Air Conditioner 5-15 (Driver's Side)
● Interior Lights 5-26 ● Center Console Box 5-39

● Overhead Console 5-28 ● Cup Holder 5-40
● Sun Visor 5-29 ● Cup Holder and Small Article
5-41
● Ticket Holder 5-29 Storage Pocket
● Vanity Mirror 5-30

● Bottle Holder and Small
● Cigarette Lighter 5-30 Article Storage Pocket (Front 5-43
● Accessory Socket 5-32 and Rear Doors)
● Ashtray 5-33 ● Grip 5-43

● Small Article Storage Pocket 5-34 ● Coat Hook 5-44
● Small Article Storage Pocket ● Antenna 5-45
5-35
(Passenger's Side)
● Steering Wheel Remote
5-47
● Glove Compartment 5-36 Control
● Dashboard Tray 5-37
4510393_sec05_COMFORT AND CONVEN5-1 5-1 2015/01/16 9:22:53

5-2 COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE
Air Outlets
Front outlets
4 4 4
2
2
1 3
5
1
5
5 5
Rear seat outlets
No. Outlet Features

Air flow direction is adjustable with the
1 Driver side outlet
tab.
Air flow direction is adjustable with the
2 Passenger side outlet
tab.
3 Door windows outlet Air is delivered towards the door windows.
4 Windshield outlet Air is delivered towards the windshield.
5 Foot outlet Air is delivered towards the feet.
6 Rear seat outlet (If equipped) Air is delivered towards the rear seat.

COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE 5-3
Air Flow Direction Control Tab
Front center outlet Use the tab to control the air flow direction
from the outlet. To close the outlet, move
the tab fully down.
Air flow direction

control tab
Front side outlet
Air flow direction control tab

Heater/Manual Air Conditioner

Use the heater and manual air conditioner only when the engine is running.
ADVICE
• Do not use the heater or manual air conditioner when the engine is not running.
The heater and manual air conditioner consume a lot of electricity and could
discharge the battery completely.
How to Use the Controls

Model with the heater (without cooler) Model with the air conditioner (cooler
and heater)
1 2 1 2 3
6 5 4 6 5 4
No. Name No. Name

Rear window defogger switch 4 Temperature control dial
1
(if equipped) 5 Air selector lever
2 Fan speed control dial 6 Outlet selector dial
3 Air conditioning switch (A/C switch)

1. Rear window defogger switch (if equipped)
Use this switch for defogging or defrosting the rear window glass. With the starter
switch in the "ON" position, press the rear window defogger switch to turn on the
rear window defogger. The indicator light comes on. Press the switch again to
turn it off. The indicator light goes out.
ADVICE
• Do not use the rear window defogger while the engine is not running. The rear
window defogger consumes a lot of electricity and could discharge the battery
completely.
• Turn the switch off promptly after the rear window is defogged or defrosted.
NOTE
• Since the rear window defogger function consumes a lot of electricity, operation
will automatically turn off after approximately 10 minutes of operation.
• In models with a mirror heater, press the rear window defogger switch to
activate the mirror heater at the same time and defog the mirror surface.
2. Fan speed control dial

The fan speed can be adjusted to any of the 4 speeds that are available. To stop
the air flow, return the fan speed control dial to the "OFF" position.
3. Air conditioning switch (A/C switch)
In models with an air conditioner (cooler and heater), press the A/C switch to use
the air conditioning system. The indicator light inside the switch will come on to
show that the air conditioning system is in operation. The indicator light will go
out when the air conditioning system is not operating. The air conditioning system
can also be used for dehumidifying while the heater is being used.
NOTE
• Even if the A/C switch is turned on, the air conditioning system will not operate
when the fan speed control dial is placed in the "OFF" position. Make sure that
the fan speed control dial is in a position other than the "OFF" position.
• In models with an air conditioner, even in seasons when the air conditioning
system is not used, occasionally operate the system for a few minutes with
the engine running at a low speed in order to keep the system's components
lubricated.

4. Temperature control dial

The interior temperature can be set as necessary. The outlet temperature will be
low when the temperature control dial is set to the leftmost position, and the outlet
temperature will be high when the dial is set to the rightmost position.
5. Air selector lever
Lever
Purpose
position
Outside air
Use this position to ventilate the interior of the cab.
ventilation
Use this position to prevent dusty or otherwise
Inside air
polluted outside air from entering the cab (such as in
recirculation
a tunnel or in congested traffic).
NOTE
• Extended use of the inside air recirculation position can cause the windshield
and windows to fog up easily, which leads to poor visibility.
6. Outlet selector dial
Dial position Air delivery Outlet

Face Air flows through outlets 1 and 2.
Bi-level Air flows through outlets 1, 2, 5 and 6 (if equipped).

Feet Air flows through outlet 5 and 6 (if equipped).
Air flows through outlet 5, 6 (if equipped), and
Feet and defroster
slightly through outlets 3 and 4.
Defroster Air flows through outlets 3 and 4.
NOTE
• When you set to the " " position, the air sent to the feet and legs is
comparatively less than the air sent to the upper body.

Ventilation
Outside Air Ventilation (model with
2 the heater (without cooler))
Turn the outlet selector dial (6) to the
preferred position. Move the air selector
lever (5) to the " " position. Set the
temperature control dial (4) to the preferred
position depending on the season and
climate.
Adjust the fan speed control dial (2) to the
preferred speed.
6 5 4
Outside Air Ventilation (model with

2 3 the air conditioner (cooler and
heater))
Press the A/C switch (3) to turn it off. Turn
the outlet selector dial (6) to the preferred
position. Move the air selector lever (5) to
the " " position. Set the temperature
control dial (4) to the preferred position
depending on the season and climate.
Adjust the fan speed control dial (2) to the
6 5 4 preferred speed.

How to Use the Heater

Normal Heating
2 3 Set the outlet selector dial (6) to the
" " or " " position. Use the " "
position for warming your feet while
defogging the windshield. Set the air
selector lever (5) to the " " position.
Adjust the temperature control dial (4)
and the fan speed control dial (2) to the
preferred positions.
If your vehicle is equipped with an air
6 5 4 conditioning system, to dehumidify the cab
interior while heating, press the A/C switch
(3) to turn it on.
NOTE
• Because the heater uses the heat
from the engine coolant, its heating
effect is weak when the engine
coolant temperature is low.

Maximum Heating
2 Turn the outlet selector dial (6) to the " "
position, set the air selector lever (5) to the
" " position, and turn the temperature
control dial (4) fully towards the rightmost
direction (high temperature direction).
Set the fan speed control dial (2) to the
maximum speed position.
NOTE
6 5 4
• Extended use of the inside air
recirculation position can cause the
windshield and windows to fog up
easily, which leads to poor visibility.

Bi-level Heating
2 Set the outlet selector dial (6) to the " "
position.
Set the air selector lever (5) to the " "
position.
Set the temperature control dial (4) to the
middle position.
Adjust the fan speed control dial (2) as
necessary.
6 5 4 NOTE
• When you set to the " " position,
the air sent to the feet and legs is
comparatively warmer than the air
sent to the upper body.

Defogging and Defrosting the Windshield
Defogging
position.
position.
Turn the temperature control dial (4) to
a right side position (high-temperature
position) according to your preference.
For defogging in the summer, set the
temperature control dial (4) to any preferred
6 5 4 position.
Adjust the fan speed control dial (2) as
necessary.
If your vehicle is equipped with an
air conditioning system, using the
dehumidifying effect of the system is very
effective for defogging.
NOTE
• Do not use the maximum cooling
position when operating the air
conditioning system with the outlet
selector dial (6) set to the " "
position. The outside surface of the
windshield and windows will fog up,
which leads to poor frontal visibility.

Defrosting
position.
position.
Turn the temperature control dial (4) fully
towards the rightmost direction (high-
temperature direction).
maximum speed position.
6 5 4
NOTE
• After defrosting, be certain to return
the air selector lever (5) to the
" " position. Failure to do so will
cause the windshield and windows
to fog up, which leads to poor frontal
visibility.

Cooling (Model with the Air Conditioner)
Normal/Moderate Cooling
2 3 This setting is suitable for extended periods
of cooling or moderate cooling.
Press the A/C switch (3) to turn it on.
Set the outlet selector dial (6) to the " "
position for normal cooling (or set it to the
" " position for moderate cooling).
Adjust the temperature control dial (4) to
the preferred position depending on the
season and climate.
6 5 4 Adjust the fan speed control dial (2) as
necessary.
NOTE
• When using the air conditioning
system with the engine idling in
extremely hot weather, place the
air selector lever (5) in the " "
position.

Maximum Cooling
2 3 Set the outlet selector dial (6) to the " "
position.
Press the A/C switch (3) to turn it on.
Move the air selector lever (5) to the " "
position.
Turn the temperature control dial (4)
fully towards the leftmost direction (low-
temperature direction).
6 5 4 maximum speed position.
NOTE
• After prolonged parking in direct
sunlight, open the windows or doors
to ventilate the interior of the cab
and release the heat before turning
the air conditioning system on.
• Prolonged use of the air conditioning
system in the maximum cooling
setting will make the interior air
become stale. Occasionally move
the air selector lever (5) to the
outside air introduction position or
open the windows to allow fresh air
into the cab.
• During the cooling operation, mist
may come out of the air outlets.
This results from sudden cooling of
humid air, and it does not indicate
any problem.

Automatic Air Conditioner

Use the automatic air conditioner only when the engine is running.
ADVICE
• Do not use the automatic air conditioner when the engine is not running. The
automatic air conditioner consumes large amounts of electricity and could
discharge the battery completely.
How to Use the Controls

1 2 3 Display
10 9 8 7 6 5 4
No. Name No. Name

Automatic air conditioning off switch 5 Windshield defroster switch
1
(OFF switch) 6 Outside air ventilation switch
2 Air conditioning switch (A/C switch) 7 Inside air recirculation switch
Automatic air conditioning switch 8 Rear window defogger switch
3
(AUTO switch) 9 Temperature control dial
4 Fan speed control switch 10 Outlet selector switch (MODE switch)

1. Automatic air conditioning off switch (OFF switch)

Press this switch to stop both the fan and air conditioning system.
2. Air conditioning switch (A/C switch)
Press the A/C switch to use the air conditioning system while the fan is operating.
The indicator light inside the switch will come on to show that the air conditioning
system is in operation. The indicator light will go out when the air conditioning
system is not operating. The air conditioning system can also be used for
dehumidifying while the heater is being used.
To turn off the air conditioning system, press the A/C switch again. The indicator
will go out and the air conditioning system will turn off.
3. Automatic air conditioning switch (AUTO switch)
Press the AUTO switch to use the air conditioning system in the fully automatic
mode. When the switch is pressed, "AUTO" is shown in the display and the
system automatically selects the most suitable air outlets, fan speed and all other
air conditioning parameters.
4. Fan speed control switch
Use this switch when manually selecting the fan speed. Pressing "+" increases
the fan speed and pressing "-" reduces the fan speed. The fan speed can be
adjusted through 5 levels.
Fan speed Low Medium Fast Maximum
Displayed
symbol
NOTE
• Even in seasons when the air conditioning system is not used, occasionally
operate the system for a few minutes with the engine running at a low speed in
order to keep the system's components lubricated.
• The air conditioning system is operated by pressing the fan speed control
switch.
5. Windshield defroster switch

Use this switch for defogging or defrosting the windshield. Pressing the switch
causes the display to show the " " symbol and the indicator light inside the
switch to come on. The air conditioning will turn on in this case. Pressing the
switch again will return the display to the setting prior to " ".
Displayed symbol Purpose Outlet

Defroster Air flows through outlets 3 and 4.

6. Outside air ventilation switch
Pressing the outside air ventilation switch causes the indicator light inside the
switch to come on, and the mode switches to the outside air ventilation. Use this
mode to ventilate the interior of the cab.
7. Inside air recirculation switch
Pressing the inside air recirculation switch causes the indicator light inside the
switch to come on, and the mode switches to the inside air recirculation. Use this
mode to prevent dusty or otherwise polluted outside air from entering the cab (such
as in a tunnel or in congested traffic).
NOTE
• Extended use of the inside air recirculation position can cause the windshield
and windows to fog up easily, which leads to poor visibility.
8. Rear window defogger switch

Use this switch for defogging or defrosting the rear window glass. With the starter
switch in the "ON" position, press the rear window defogger switch to turn on the
rear window defogger. The indicator light comes on. Press the switch again to
turn it off. The indicator light goes out.
ADVICE
• Do not use the rear window defogger while the engine is not running. The rear
window defogger consumes a lot of electricity and could discharge the battery
completely.
• Turn the switch off promptly after the rear window is defogged or defrosted.
NOTE
• Since the rear window defogger function consumes a lot of electricity, operation
will automatically turn off after approximately 10 minutes of operation.
• In models with a mirror heater, press the rear window defogger switch to
activate the mirror heater at the same time and defog the mirror surface.

9. Temperature control dial

Use the temperature control dial for setting the preferred interior temperature. The
display will show the set temperature. Each turn of the dial by one notch changes
the temperature by 1°C (1.8°F). The adjustable temperature range is between 18
°C (64°F) and 32°C (90°F). If you set the temperature at 18°C (64°F), the system
invariably sets the control for maximum cooling; if you set it at 32°C (90°F), the
system sets the control for maximum heating.
10. Outlet selector switch (MODE switch)
The air outlet will change each time you press the MODE switch (" " or " ").
The outlet currently selected will be shown on the display.
Displayed symbol Air delivery Outlet

Face Air flows through outlets 1 and 2.
Bi-level Air flows through outlets 1, 2, 5 and 6 (if equipped).
Air flows through outlet 5, 6 (if equipped), and a
Feet
miniscule amount flows through outlets 3 and 4.
Feet and Air flows through outlet 5, 6 (if equipped), and
defroster slightly through outlets 3 and 4.
NOTE
• When you set to the " " position, the air sent to the feet and legs is
comparatively less than the air sent to the upper body.

Automatic Air Conditioning Mode
3 1. Press the AUTO switch (3). The air
conditioning system will turn on, and
automatically select the air outlets
and fan speed most suitable for the
condition of the interior of the cab.
The display will then show "AUTO".
2. Use the temperature control dial (9)

to set the interior temperature to the
preferred level. The display will show
the set temperature. Each turn of
the dial by one notch changes the
temperature by 1°C (1.8°F).
NOTE
• The number that is shown on the display shows an approximate set
temperature. You may thus need finer adjustments for the preferred interior
temperature.
• The adjustable temperature range is between 18°C (64°F) and 32°C (90°F). If
you set the temperature at 18°C (64°F), the system invariably sets the control
for maximum cooling; if you set it at 32°C (90°F), the system sets the control for
maximum heating.
• Because the heater uses the heat from the engine coolant, its heating effect is
weak when the engine coolant temperature is low.
1 2 3. To turn off the air conditioning system,

press the A/C switch (2). To turn off
both the fan and air conditioning
system, press the OFF switch (1).

Manual Air Conditioning Mode

Outside Air Ventilation
2 Press the A/C switch (2) to turn off the air
conditioning system. The indicator light
inside the switch will go out.
Select the preferred settings with the
temperature control dial (9) and the MODE
switch (10).
Press the outside air ventilation switch (6).
The indicator light inside the switch will
come on, and the mode switches to the
10 9 6 4 outside air ventilation. Adjust the fan speed
with the fan speed control switch (4) as
necessary.

Maximum Heating
Turn the temperature control dial (9) to the
maximum heating temperature (32°C (90
°F)) and set the fan speed control switch (4)
to the maximum speed setting by pressing
"+". Select the preferred air outlets with the
MODE switch (10).
10 9 4

Defogging
Press the windshield defroster switch (5)
to turn the defroster on. The display will
show the " " sign and the indicator
light inside the switch will come on. The air
conditioning system starts operating.
preferred setting.
Turn the fan speed control switch (4) to
10 9 5 4 the preferred setting. The efficiency of
defogging will be lower when " " (inside
air recirculation) is selected than when
" " (outside air ventilation) is selected.
Press the MODE switch (10) to select the
preferred air outlets. If you press the switch
so that the " " sign appears on the
display, the windshield can be defogged
while warming your feet as well.
NOTE
• Do not use the maximum cooling
position when operating the air
conditioning system with the
windshield defroster switch (5) to
turn the defroster on. The outside
surface of the windshield and
windows will fog up, which leads to
poor frontal visibility.
• To defog quickly, set the temperature
to a high temperature position with a
high fan speed.

Defrosting
Press the windshield defroster switch (5)
to turn the defroster on. The display will
show the " " sign and the indicator
light inside the switch will come on. The air
conditioning system starts operating.
maximum temperature position (32°C (90
°F)).
9 7 6 5 Press the inside air recirculation switch
(7). The indicator light inside the switch will
come on, and the mode switches to the
inside air recirculation.
CAUTION
• After defrosting, make sure to press
the outside air ventilation switch
(6) so that it will be switched to the
outside air ventilation. Failure to do
so will cause the windshield and
windows to fog up, which leads to
poor frontal visibility.

Maximum Cooling
2 Turn the temperature control dial (9) to
the maximum cooling position (18°C (64°F))
and turn the fan speed control switch (4)
to the maximum speed setting by pressing
"+". Select the preferred air outlets with
the MODE switch (10) and press the
inside air recirculation switch (7). The
indicator light inside the switch will come
on, and the mode switches to the inside air
10 9 7 6 4 recirculation.
You must press the A/C switch (2) before
doing the above operation to turn the air
conditioning system on.
NOTE
• After prolonged parking in direct
sunlight, open the windows or doors
to ventilate the interior of the cab
and release the heat before turning
the air conditioning system on.
• Prolonged use of the air conditioning
system in the maximum cooling
setting will make the interior air
become stale. Occasionally press
the outside air ventilation switch
(6) to change to the outside air
introduction mode or open the
windows to allow fresh air into the
cab.
• During the cooling operation, mist
may come out of the air outlets.
This results from sudden cooling of
humid air, and it does not indicate
any problem.

Temperature Sensors
The air conditioning system uses a sun
Sun sensor sensor, interior temperature sensor and
outside air temperature sensor to ensure
effective and comfortable air conditioning.
Do not place anything on the sensors or
get them wet. Air conditioning control will
become inaccurate.
Interior temperature sensor
Outside air
temperature
sensor

Interior Lights
Dome Light
The dome light operates regardless of the
starter switch position.
ON:
The light stays on regardless of the doors being open or closed.
NOTE
• In models with a keyless entry system (radio remote control units for door-
lock), the dome light will automatically turn off after approximately 20 minutes
to prevent battery discharge when all the doors are securely closed with the
starter switch turned from the "ON" position to another position and the dome
light switch in the "ON" position.
• In models with a keyless entry system (radio remote control units for door-lock),
the light turns off in a different manner when the vehicle is locked depending on
its switch position ("ON" or "DOOR").
DOOR:
The light turns on when a door is opened and off when the door is closed.
In addition, in models with a keyless entry system (radio remote control units for door
locks), the light also turns on and off under the following conditions.
• When the starter switch is turned to a position other than the "ON" position and a
door is open, closing the door will turn the light on for approximately 30 seconds,
then it will turn off automatically.
• When the starter switch is turned to the "ON" position, opening and then closing a
door will turn the light off.
• When the doors are closed, removing the key from the starter switch will turn the
light on for approximately 30 seconds, then it will turn off automatically.
• When the doors are closed, turning the starter switch to the "ON" position will turn
off the light.
OFF:
The light stays off regardless of the doors being open or closed.

Map Lights
Type 1 Type 1
When the map light is pushed, the map
light on the pushed side will come on. If it is
pushed again, it will turn off.
When the door switch is "ON", they will
come on in conjunction with opening/
closing of the doors.
In addition, in models with a keyless entry
system (radio remote control units for door
locks), the light also turns on and off under
Door switch
the following conditions.
• When the starter switch is turned to a
ON OFF position other than the "ON" position
and a door is open, closing the door
will turn the light on for approximately
30 seconds, then it will turn off
automatically.
• When the starter switch is turned to
the "ON" position, opening and then
closing a door will turn the light off.
• When the doors are closed, removing
the key from the starter switch will
turn the light on for approximately
30 seconds, then it will turn off
automatically.
• When the doors are closed, turning
the starter switch to the "ON" position
will turn off the light.
Type 2 Type 2
When the map light switch is pushed, the
map light on the side the switch is pushed
will come on. If the map light switch is
pushed again, it will turn off.

Overhead Console
Use them for storing small articles.
Press the indented portion of the overhead
console to open it.
WARNING
• For safety, close the overhead
console lid during driving as there is
a risk of injury from the open lid or
from objects stored in the overhead
console.
• Do not place heavy objects inside
the overhead console. It is designed
for storing light articles such as
eyeglasses. The lid may open and
objects may fall out, resulting in an
accident.
CAUTION
• Do not leave eyeglasses or lighters
inside the cab. Lighters may explode
and plastic lenses or frames may
deform or crack if the interior
temperature becomes very hot.

Sun Visor
Driver's side The sun visor protects your eyes in strong
Sun visor sunlight. Use it when sunlight is too bright.
To reduce side glare, unhook the sun visor
and swing it around to the side.
Hook CAUTION
• For safety, make sure to fold up the
sun visor after use.
Passenger's side
Sun visor
Hook
Ticket Holder
Driver's side Use this to hold your tickets.
Ticket holder
Sun visor

Vanity Mirror
Passenger's side The vanity mirror is on the rear side of the
front passenger's sun visor.
Cigarette Lighter
Cigarette lighter The cigarette lighter can be used when

the starter switch is in the "ACC" or "ON"
position.
1. Push the lighter in until it locks.
2. When the heater element becomes
hot, the lighter pops out to the original
position. Pull out and use it.

WARNING
• As the lighter's tip can become extremely hot, take due precautions against
burns.
• Do not leave your finger on the cigarette lighter once it has been pushed in. The
lighter will overheat and be damaged or cause a fire.
• If the cigarette lighter does not pop out after more than 25 seconds, the lighter is
defective. Pull out the lighter by hand immediately.
• Do not leave the vehicle with the cigarette lighter pushed in. This could cause a
fire.
• As there is a burn hazard, do not touch the heater element when using the
cigarette lighter.
• Do not bend the cigarette lighter. A bent lighter does not function properly and is
dangerous.
CAUTION
• Check with your Isuzu Dealer if you have no alternative to using the cigarette
lighter socket as an accessory outlet.
• If the cigarette lighter has to be replaced, use an Isuzu genuine replacement.
Do not use other cigarette lighters.
• When cleaning the cigarette lighter, do not use too much force. It may become
bent.
• Keep the cigarette lighter socket and the heater free of ash and dirt.
ADVICE
• Do not use the cigarette lighter while the engine is not running. The cigarette
lighter consumes a lot of electricity and could discharge the battery completely.

Accessory Socket
You can use this when the starter switch is
in the "ACC" or "ON" position.
Use it to supply power to commercially
available vehicle accessories, etc. Open
the cap to use. When using a commercially
available electrical accessory, follow
the instruction manual of the electrical
accessory.
Accessory socket
WARNING
• The maximum allowable load on the socket is 120 W (10 A).
If you subject the socket to more than the allowable load, the wiring may
overheat and cause a fire. Use the socket within the allowable load.
• The socket uses 12 V power. Connecting electrical accessories other than 12 V
accessories could cause overheating and may result in a fire.
• Be sure to insert the plug of the electrical accessory all the way into the socket.
Using an accessory when the plug is not completely inserted could cause
abnormal heat generation and may result in the vehicle's fuses blowing.
• Do not insert the cigarette lighter into the socket. Doing so could generate heat.
• When not in use, be sure to attach the cap. If foreign matter enters the socket,
or if water or drinks contact it, it could be damaged. Also, do not insert fingers or
any metallic objects other than plugs into the socket.
ADVICE
• When not in use, turn off electrical accessories.
• Using the socket for a long period of time while the engine is stopped will
deplete the battery.
• As the internal part of the socket may become deformed depending on the size
of the plug used, do not attempt to force the plug into the socket. In this case,
replace the socket.
• When inserting or removing the plug of an electrical accessory, turn the
electrical accessory off or place the starter switch in the "LOCK" position.

Ashtray
WARNING
• Do not put any paper trash or other flammable material in the ashtray.
• After using the ashtray, be sure to close it. If a cigarette butt has not been
extinguished completely, other butts in the ashtray may catch fire.
• Do not leave the ashtray full of cigarette butts.
• Put matches and cigarette butts in the ashtray only after they are fully
extinguished.
• Never throw lit cigarette butts out the window. They not only litter the road and
around but also can cause a roadside fire.
Ashtray Open the lid to use.

Put out lit cigarettes on the crush-out tab.
Remove the ashtray to clean it.

Small Article Storage Pocket

Use them for storing small articles.
CAUTION
• Do not leave eyeglasses or lighters inside the cab. Lighters may explode
and plastic lenses or frames may deform or crack if the interior temperature
becomes very hot.
• Do not place lidless containers such as paper cups containing drinks in the
center console small article storage pocket. Liquid in the container could be
spilled inside the vehicle.
Center of instrument panel Lower part of driver's side
Storage
Storage
Lower part of center of Front seatback

instrument panel
Storage
Pocket

Side access panel (Extended cab
model)
Storage
Small Article Storage Pocket (Passenger's Side)

Pull up the cover to open.
CAUTION
• For safety, close the small article
storage pocket (passenger's side)
during driving. There is a risk of
injury from the open lid or items
stored in the small article storage
pocket (passenger's side).
ADVICE
• Do not place an object in the small article storage pocket (passenger's side)
that is so large that the lid of the compartment cannot be closed. If you attempt
to close the lid in this condition, you are likely to break the lid of the small article
storage pocket (passenger's side).

Glove Compartment
Pull the lever to open it.
Insert the key into the key lock and turn
counterclockwise to unlock or clockwise to
lock.
CAUTION
Unlock • For safety, close the glove
compartment during driving. There
is a risk of injury from the open
Lock lid or items stored in the glove
compartment.
ADVICE
• Do not place an object in the glove compartment that is so large that the lid
of the compartment cannot be closed. If you attempt to close the lid in this
condition, you are likely to break the lid of the glove compartment.

Dashboard Tray
Use it for storing small articles.
CAUTION
Small Article Storage Pocket (Upper Side of Dashboard)

Press the button to open the lid.
CAUTION
storage pocket (upper side of
dashboard) during driving. There
is a risk of injury from the open lid
or items stored in the small article
storage pocket (upper side of
dashboard).
ADVICE
• Do not place an object in the small article storage pocket (upper side of
dashboard) that is so large that the lid of the compartment cannot be closed. If
you attempt to close the lid in this condition, you are likely to break the lid of the
small article storage pocket (upper side of dashboard).

Small Article Storage Pocket (Driver's Side)

Pull towards you to open.
CAUTION
storage pocket (driver's side) during
driving. There is a risk of injury from
the open lid or items stored in the
small article storage pocket (driver's
side).
ADVICE
• Do not place an object in the small article storage pocket (driver's side) that
is so large that the lid of the compartment cannot be closed. If you attempt to
close the lid in this condition, you are likely to break the lid of the small article
storage pocket (driver's side).

Center Console Box

Pull up the lid to open.
CAUTION
• For safety, close the center console
box during driving. There is a risk
of injury from the open lid or items
stored in the center console box.
ADVICE
• Do not place an object in the center console box that is so large that the lid
of the compartment cannot be closed. If you attempt to close the lid in this
condition, you are likely to break the lid of the center console box.

Cup Holder
CAUTION
• Do not place objects in the cup holder if they have an improper size or shape.
Sudden braking or pulling away could cause the object to fly out of the cup
holder, leading to an injury.
• Do not place a cup that is too full in the cup holder. Spillages could cause
damage to the other electrical circuits. If there is a spill, wipe it up immediately
with a dry cloth.
Front Side
This can be used as a cup holder.
CAUTION
• Placing a water bottle in the cup
holder could interfere with driving,
leading to an accident.
Rear Side
Pull towards you to open.

Cup Holder and Small Article Storage Pocket
WARNING
• Do not use the small article storage pocket as an ashtray or place any ashtrays
inside. Doing so is dangerous and could lead to a fire in the vehicle.
CAUTION
• Do not place objects in the cup holder if they have an improper size or shape.
Sudden braking or pulling away could cause the object to fly out of the cup
holder, leading to an injury.
• Placing a water bottle could obscure the driver's view and interfere with driving,
and this could lead to an accident.
• Do not place a cup that is too full in the cup holder. Spillages could cause
damage to the radio and other electrical circuits. If there is a spill, wipe it up
immediately with a dry cloth.
• There may be a danger of the cup holder and small article storage pocket
breaking if the weight on it exceeds 0.75 kg (26 oz).

Driver's side 1. Pull towards you to open.
Passenger's side
Driver's side 2. If only the cup holder is returned to its

original position it can be used as the
small article storage pocket.
3. If it is used as a cup holder before
being returned to its original position,
it will be a cup holder when it is
opened again.
If it is used as a small article storage
pocket before being returned to its
original position, it will be a small
article storage pocket when it is
Passenger's side
opened again.

Bottle Holder and Small Article Storage Pocket
(Front and Rear Doors)
Use as a bottle holder and small article
storage pocket.
CAUTION
• Do not place lidless containers
such as paper cups containing
drinks in the bottle holder and small
Bottle holder and small
article storage pocket article storage pocket. Liquid in the
container could be spilled inside the
vehicle.
Grip
Folding type There are grips near the top of the
windows.
A-pillar A-pillar grips are equipped on 2WD (High-
Ride) and 4WD models.
Grip
WARNING
curtain airbag, if hard objects such
as hangers or accessories are
Fixed type in the event of system activation.
A-pillar
Grip

Coat Hook
Crew cab model Use this to hang clothing.
Hook
WARNING
• To prevent hook cracking or
breakage, do not hang heavy or
large objects in the coat hook.
curtain airbag, if hard objects such
as hangers or accessories are
Extended cab model
Hook

Antenna
NOTE
[Radio reception]
• Compared with AM signals, FM signals are of better quality and compatible
with stereo broadcasting. However, due to the nature of FM signals, conditions
in which the quality of signals received in a moving vehicle may not be
sustainable.
- The directness of FM signal transmission
As FM signals are more strongly directional than AM signals, they are blocked
easily by large objects such as mountains and buildings and as such their
reception area is much narrower than AM signals.
- Sound loss
FM signals are reflected easily by objects, so when driving through built-up
areas, the sound may be interrupted or disturbed by noise.
- Sound distortion
Simultaneous reception of direct signals from the radio station and reflected
signals from buildings may cause flutter or noise disturbance.

Pillar Type
When receiving radio signals, pull the
antenna out by hand to extend it to its full
length.
ADVICE
• To prevent breaking the antenna,
shorten it when passing through
areas with low clearance or a car
wash, or when attaching a vehicle
cover.
Center Type
When receiving radio signals, adjust the
angle of the antenna as appropriate.
Turn the antenna rod counterclockwise to
remove it.
ADVICE
• To prevent breaking the antenna
when in an automatic car wash,
remove the antenna. When the
antenna has been removed in order
to wash the vehicle, be careful not
to misplace the antenna and be
sure to reinstall it before driving the
Retracted position vehicle again.
• To prevent breaking the antenna,
retract it when passing through
areas with low clearance or when
attaching a vehicle cover.

Steering Wheel Remote Control

You can use the steering wheel remote control to perform various audio operations.
The operations differ depending on the type of audio system that you use.
CAUTION
• While driving, be sure that audio control operations do not interfere with your
driving.
No. Description
1 1 [VOL +/-] button
2 2 [ ], [ ] buttons
3
4 3 [MODE] button
4 [ ] button


SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE 6
BEFORE SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE 6-3
DAILY CHECKS 6-13
ENGINE-RELATED SERVICE AND

MAINTENANCE 6-17
CHASSIS-RELATED SERVICE AND

MAINTENANCE 6-45
OTHER SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE 6-81
INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR

MAINTENANCE 6-97
MAINTENANCE DATA 6-105
4510393_sec06_SERVICE AND MAINTE6-1 6-1 2015/01/16 9:24:49

SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE 6-3
BEFORE SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
● Precautions for Checking and Adjustments 6-4

● Discarded Parts, Oils and Other Liquids 6-6
● Isuzu Genuine Oils and Grease 6-6
● Tools 6-7
● Engine Hood 6-10

6-4 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
Precautions for Checking and Adjustments

Your Isuzu Dealer has factory trained technicians and Isuzu genuine parts to service
your vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see your Isuzu Dealer.
WARNING
• To help avoid personal injury, take care when doing any maintenance or making
any check or repair. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for all materials used
during service and maintenance of this vehicle. If used or handled improperly,
they may be hazardous. Improper or incomplete service can also affect the
vehicle and result in personal injury, or damage to the vehicle or its equipment.
If you have any questions about carrying out some service, contact an Isuzu
Dealer.
• Make sure to turn off the engine and remove the key from the starter switch
before performing any checks.
• Pull firmly on the parking brake lever and put the transmission in neutral.
- If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, make sure the
gearshift lever is in "N" position.
- If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, place the selector
lever in "P" position and make sure the shift indicator displays "P".
• Select a place with a solid and level surface to perform the checking and
maintenance work. Make sure to chock the wheels. It would be very dangerous
if the vehicle started to move.
• To prevent personal injury, keep hands, tools and clothing clear of the engine
cooling fan when the engine is running.
• When raising the vehicle, use a suitable jack, not the one provided on the
vehicle.
• After raising the vehicle and before going underneath to perform work, make
sure the vehicle is supported with jack stands.
• When performing work on the electrical system, begin by turning the starter
switch to the "LOCK" position, wait at least 1 minute, and then disconnect the
negative cable from the negative terminal on battery. If the negative cable is
disconnected within 1 minute, the engine control module may malfunction.
• The engine, exhaust pipe, radiator and power steering fluid reserve tank will be
hot immediately after the vehicle is driven. In addition, the oil and fluids will also
be hot. Be careful around these parts to prevent burns. Perform all checks when
the engine is cold.
• Do not perform work near an open flame or other heat sources.
WARNING (Continued)

WARNING (Continued)
• When working on the fuel line or fuel filter, remove the fuel tank filler cap. The
fuel system is under pressure and the fuel will overspill unless the pressure is
relieved, possibly leading to combustion or a fire.
• Do not let the engine run in poorly ventilated garages or sheds. This could cause
carbon monoxide poisoning, resulting in death.
• Hands, tools, or clothing could become entangled in the belts while the
engine is in operation. Do not allow them to come close to the engine (remove
wristwatches, neckties, rings, etc.).
• Fuel and batteries generate flammable gas that could explode. Do not use fire
and avoid creating sparks.
• Protect your eyes with protective goggles from oil, fluids, and falling objects.
• Use only Isuzu genuine parts for replacement parts.
CAUTION
• Discarded parts, oil, grease and fluids could have an adverse effect on the
environment. It is difficult to dispose of these, so have your Isuzu Dealer handle
all checks and replacements.
• Oils, brake fluid, battery fluid and engine coolant have lubrication, cooling
and rust prevention functions. If these liquids deteriorate through loss or
contamination, it will cause a decline in the performance of the parts and such
problems as seizure or malfunctioning. Replenish or change these liquids when
performing the checks (daily and periodic checks) as required by the relevant
regulations or in accordance with the Maintenance Schedule (when either the
specified driving distance or period of time, whichever comes first, has expired).
ADVICE
• Use only appropriate tools.
• Confirm that all systems and components are normal after performing the work.
• Do not leave the removed parts or tools in the engine compartment. They could
damage the equipment if caught in the belts or other moving components.
• Dirty water, dirt and other impurities seriously impair the effectiveness of the oil,
grease and fluids, and damage the parts. Exercise all due caution to prevent
waste or other refuse from coming in contact with parts or materials that have
been removed when changing or replenishing them.

Discarded Parts, Oils and Other Liquids

• When changing oils, filters, engine coolant or other liquids, be sure to have a
container ready in advance for their disposal.
• Use methods conforming to legal requirements for discarding or disposing of
parts, oils, filters or engine coolant after change or replacement.
Isuzu Genuine Oils and Grease

Periodically replenishing and changing the
oil and grease is extremely important for
maintaining your vehicle's performance and
preventing malfunctions.
Isuzu Motors guarantees the quality and
performance of the Isuzu genuine oils and
grease. We recommend the use of Isuzu
genuine oils and grease for maintenance
and service of your vehicle.
CAUTION
• Flames or other heat sources near
spilled oil can cause a fire. Make
sure to clean up all oil spills.

Tools
ADVICE
• It is recommended that you familiarize yourself with the contents and use of the
various tools and the jack before using them.
• After finishing work with the tools, return them to the correct storage location
and ensure that they will not move while the vehicle will be in motion.
• Store the jack in its original position and turn the jack socket clockwise so that it
is secured (as a guide, with a force of 0.5 N·m (0.05 kgf·m/0.36 lb·ft)).
Storage Location
Regular Cab Model
The jack and tools are positioned behind
the right seat. Tilt the seatbacks forward to
take out the jack and tools. To remove the
jack, turn the jack socket counterclockwise
so that the ram is lowered away from the
holder. Remove the jack when the ram is
fully lowered.
Driver's Seat → Refer to page 3-37
Extended Cab Model

The jack and tools are positioned in the
storage compartment behind the right front
seat. Open the cover to take out the jack
and tools. To remove the jack, turn the jack
socket counterclockwise so that the ram is
lowered away from the holder. Remove the
jack when the ram is fully lowered.

Crew Cab Model

Hook The jack and tools are positioned under
the right rear seat. Pull the strap forward to
raise the seat cushion. Remove the hook
Seat cushion of the strap edge from the strap button and
secure the hook to the headrest stay.
To remove the jack, turn the jack socket
Button
counterclockwise so that the ram is lowered
away from the holder. Remove the jack
Hook storage when the ram is fully lowered.
pocket
WARNING
• Do not raise the seat cushion while
driving.
• When raising the seat cushion, the
Strap
storage position.
Tools • After returning the seat cushion to
return the hook to the hook storage
pocket.
Jack
original position.

Tools Carried in Your Vehicle
1 7 No. Tool name
6 1 Jack bar/Spare tire removal bar
2 Wheel nut wrench (Jack handle)
3 Spanner
4 Pliers
2 Screwdriver (with switchable Phillips

5
3 and flat heads)
4
5 6 Jack
7 Tool bag
ADVICE
• Be sure to carry all of the provided
tools in the vehicle.

Engine Hood
WARNING
• Keep your hands and clothing away from the moving fan and engine drive belts
when the engine is running.
• Upon inserting the support rod into the hood slot, make sure that the rod
supports the hood securely to prevent injuries due to unexpected and sudden
closing of the hood.
• Do not open the engine hood when steam is coming out of the engine
compartment.
ADVICE
• Do not open the engine hood with the wiper arms standing. The wiper arms and
engine hood may be damaged.
To Open
1. Pull the engine hood release lever.
The lock is released, and the front
edge of the engine hood will rise.
2. Insert a hand into the space at the

Safety latch front edge of the engine hood, push
the safety latch upward and release
the lock to open the engine hood.

3. Remove the support rod from the clip,
and then install the support rod edge
hook into the groove of the engine
Support rod
hood.
Clip
To Close
WARNING
• The engine hood is very heavy. When you close the engine hood, be careful not
to trap your hands or anything else.
ADVICE
• Do not drop the engine hood from a height of over 60 cm (23.6 in). The engine
hood and radiator grille may be damaged by the impact.
1. Remove the support rod from the groove of the engine hood and install it into the
clip.
2. Lower the engine hood slowly, and release your hands at a height of
approximately 20 to 25 cm (7.9 to 9.8 in).
3. Gently push and pull the edge of the engine hood to make sure that it has been
securely locked in place.
WARNING
• Do not drive unless the engine hood is complete closed. Driving with the engine
hood open could lead to an accident. Before driving, confirm that the engine
hood is securely locked.


DAILY CHECKS
● Daily Checks (Preoperational Checks) 6-14
● Checking Components that Showed Abnormalities during

6-16
Previous Operation


Check your vehicle for the items listed below before starting the day's operation to
ensure safe, trouble-free operation. Also, make note of the distance the vehicle has
covered and the conditions under which the vehicle has been operated to be able
to determine the inspection intervals most appropriate for your specific vehicle and
adequately service it according to inspection results.
If the checks reveal an abnormality or if there are components that showed
abnormalities during the previous operation, have the vehicle repaired by your Isuzu
Dealer before using the vehicle.
Daily Check (Preoperational Check) Items

[1. Checking components that showed abnormalities during the previous
operation]
Checking components that showed abnormalities during the previous
6-16
operation
[2. Checks performed with the engine hood opened]

Fan belt looseness and damage 6-36
Engine oil level 6-20
Engine coolant level and radiator cap looseness 6-30
Power steering fluid level 6-79
Brake fluid level (For a manual transmission model, brake fluid doubles
6-46, 6-76
as clutch fluid.)
Windshield washer fluid level 6-82
Battery fluid level 6-87

[3. Checks performed in the driver's seat]
Brake pedal free play 6-48
Operation of meters, gauges and warning/indicator lights 4-10, 4-17
Engine startability, abnormal noise and color of exhaust gases 6-18
Parking brake lever stroke 6-51
Windshield washer fluid spray condition and windshield wiper
6-82, 6-83
effectiveness
Rearview mirror condition 3-46
Steering wheel free play and mounting condition 3-45, 6-78
Operation of horn and turn signal lights 4-67, 4-73
Fuel level 4-15
Operation of door locks 3-7, 3-15
[4. Checks performed during a walk around the vehicle]

Illumination, flashing or for stained or damaged lights 6-86
Suspension springs damage ―
Leakage of oil, engine coolant, fuel, brake fluid, and power steering fluid ―
[5. Checking wheels and tires]

Air pressure 6-52
Cracks and other damage 6-54
Abnormal wear 6-54
Tread depth 6-54
Disc wheel mounting condition 6-55
[6. Checks performed while driving the vehicle]

Brake effectiveness 6-50
Driving condition at low speeds and during acceleration 6-19

Checking Components that Showed Abnormalities

during Previous Operation
Check the components that showed
abnormalities during the previous
operation. Have any abnormalities repaired
by your Isuzu Dealer before using the
vehicle.

ENGINE-RELATED SERVICE AND
MAINTENANCE
● Engine Conditions 6-18

● Engine Oil 6-20
● Engine Coolant 6-30
● Handling the Radiator and Intercooler 6-35
● Fan Belt and Air Conditioning Compressor Belt 6-36
● Air Cleaner 6-38
● Fuel Filter 6-41

Engine Conditions
Checking the Engine for Startability and Abnormal

Conditions
1. Make sure the parking brake is securely engaged. Step firmly on the brake pedal.
2. If your vehicle is a manual transmission model, check that the gearshift lever is in
the "N" position, and fully depress the clutch pedal.
In an automatic transmission model, check that the selector lever is in the "P"
position, and firmly depress the brake pedal.
CAUTION
• If your vehicle is equipped with the automatic transmission, the engine will not
start unless the transmission is actually in "P" or "N" position.
• For safety, firmly press the brake pedal before starting the engine.
3. Turn the starter switch to start the engine.

Check that the engine starts quickly without any abnormal conditions (abnormal
noises, vibration, etc.). If there are any abnormalities, stop the engine and contact
your nearest Isuzu Dealer.
Starting the Engine

Checking Condition of the Engine at Low Speeds
and during Acceleration
1. Make sure that the parking brake
lever is fully pulled.
If your vehicle is a manual
transmission model, make sure
that the gearshift lever is in the "N"
position and then depress the clutch
pedal and brake pedal fully.
In an automatic transmission model,
make sure that the selector lever is in
the "P" position and then depress the
brake pedal fully.
2. Turn the starter switch to start the
engine, and run it to warm up.
Starting the Engine
3. Check that the engine is running at a
speed within the standard idle speed
range.
4. Drive the vehicle, making sure the
accelerator pedal does not stick when
gradually accelerating, the engine
speed rises smoothly and it does not
knock. If there are any abnormalities
(accelerator pedal sticking, rough
engine acceleration, knocking, etc.),
stop your vehicle at a safe place, stop
the engine, and contact your nearest
Isuzu Dealer.

Engine Oil
Engine oil is an important factor in determining engine performance and longevity. Be
sure to use only specified oil and oil filter. The engine oil level must be checked and
the oil and oil filter should be regularly changed at the same time according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
NOTE
• When particulate matter (PM) has accumulated to a preset level in the diesel
particulate defuser (DPD), the DPD is automatically regenerated through
combustion. To make this regeneration (combustion) possible, a small amount
of fuel is injected into the engine combustion chamber after combustion. A
small amount of the injected fuel gradually mixes with the engine oil, and the
engine oil level rises beyond the original level. This does not indicate an engine
malfunction. If the engine oil level exceeds the specified level, change the
engine oil even if the regular oil change period on the Maintenance Schedule
has not arrived yet.
Engine Oil Indicator Light


Checking the Engine Oil Level
Perform the engine oil level check on a
flat surface while the engine is cold before
starting it. If the engine has already been
started, stop it after it has sufficiently
warmed and wait 30 minutes or more
before performing.
1. Remove the oil dipstick and wipe off
any oil on the oil dipstick.
Oil dipstick 2. Reinsert the oil dipstick fully and then
gently remove it.
3. Check the front and back of the oil
Oil change is needed dipstick. If the highest position is
Inspection between the "MIN" and "Inspection
MAX MAX" marks (range 1), the oil is at the
correct level.
- If the oil level is below the "MIN"
1 mark, add oil by following the
procedures detailed on the following
Replenishment pages.
MAX
2 - If the oil level is beyond the
MIN "Inspection MAX" mark, have
Adding oil is needed engine oil replacement performed
at your Isuzu Dealer. If you perform
replacement yourself, please
Front Back Front Back replace the oil by following the
MIN procedures detailed on the following
pages.
ADVICE
• If the oil level is higher than the
"MIN" mark, there is a sufficient
amount of oil. In this case, the
engine oil supply does not need to
be replenished.
4. Reinstall the oil dipstick into position

after checking the oil level.

ADVICE
• Any oil level above the "Inspection MAX" mark on the oil dipstick may cause
engine malfunctions. Change the oil whenever its level exceeds the "Inspection
MAX" mark.
• Fuel will gradually become mixed with the engine oil, thinning it out. Be sure to
change the oil at the specified intervals.
• The oil level read by the oil dipstick changes depending on the amount of time
that elapses after the engine is turned off. In order to confirm the correct oil
level, perform the check while the engine is cold before starting it. If the engine
has already been started, stop it after it has sufficiently warmed and wait 30
minutes or more before performing.

Adding the Engine Oil
Oil filler cap If the oil level is found to be below the
"MIN" mark on the oil dipstick as a result of
the oil level inspection, add engine oil by
following the procedure below.
Add engine oil on a flat surface while the
engine is cold before starting it. If the
engine has already been started, stop it
after it has sufficiently warmed and wait 30
Oil dipstick
1. Clean around the oil filler cap so that
foreign matter does not enter.
2. Remove the oil filler cap.
Oil change is needed 3. Fill with 0.3 liters (0.08 US gal./0.07
Inspection
MAX Imp gal.) of the specified oil through
the oil filler.
4. Install the oil filler cap.
1 5. Wait 5 minutes or more without
starting the engine.
Replenishment 6. Remove the oil dipstick and wipe off
MAX any oil on the oil dipstick.
2
MIN 7. Reinsert the oil dipstick fully and then
Adding oil is needed gently remove it.
dipstick. If the highest position is
Front Back Front Back higher than the "MIN" mark, the oil is
MIN at the correct level.
- If the "Replenishment MAX" mark
is exceeded, drain oil until the
level is between the "MIN" and
"Replenishment MAX" marks (range
2).
- If below the "MIN" mark, return to
Step 2 and repeat the procedure for
adding 0.3 liters (0.08 US gal./0.07
Imp gal.) of the specified oil.
9. Reinstall the oil dipstick into position
after checking the oil level.

WARNING
• When adding oil, be careful not to spill any, but keep a workshop rag handy just
in case there are any spills. If any oil should spill onto the engine, carefully wipe
it away. If this precaution is not taken, the spilled oil could ignite and a fire could
spread.
• Do not leave flammable items, such as rags or gloves, in the engine
compartment. They could cause a fire.
• The engine oil and the area surrounding the engine are hot immediately after
engine operation, so be careful of burns.
ADVICE
• The oil level read by the oil dipstick changes depending on the amount of time
that elapses after the engine is turned off. In order to confirm the correct oil
level, perform the check while the engine is cold before starting it. If the engine
has already been started, stop it after it has sufficiently warmed and wait 30
• Prevent dirt from entering the oil filler when filling with oil. If foreign matter mixes
with the oil, it could damage the engine.
• Always use low ash content engine oil. Failing to do so could result in DPD
failure.
NOTE
• If the oil level is above the "MIN" mark, there is a sufficient amount of oil.

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Engine oil and the oil filter are important factors in determining engine performance
and longevity. Be sure to use only specified oil and oil filter. The engine oil level must
be checked and the oil and oil filter should be regularly changed at the same time
according to the Maintenance Schedule.
WARNING
• Hot engine oil can cause severe skin burns. Allow the engine to cool before
draining the engine oil.
ADVICE
• Use the oil quantities indicated below only as guidelines when changing the
engine oil. After changing the oil, make sure the oil is at the required level.
• Always use low ash content engine oil. Also, do not use engine oil additives.
Failing to do so could result in DPD failure.
Quantity of engine oil to be changed

Oil quantity [Reference value]
Engine model
When changing oil and filter
4JK1 (2WD) 5.4 liters (1.43 US gal./1.19 Imp gal.)
4JK1 (4WD) 5.9 liters (1.56 US gal./1.30 Imp gal.)

Changing the Oil and Oil Filter

Oil filler cap Change the engine oil and oil filter on a
flat surface while the engine is cold before
starting it. If the engine has already been
started, stop it after it has sufficiently
warmed, wait 30 minutes or more, and
perform after confirming that the oil has
sufficiently cooled.
1. Remove the engine cover.
Oil dipstick 2. Clean around the oil filler cap so that
foreign matter does not enter.
Engine cover
3. Remove the oil filler cap.
2WD model 4. Place a container for receiving the oil
beneath the oil pan. Remove the oil
pan drain plug to discharge the oil into
the container.
5. Wait until the flow of oil stops and the
oil pools into a drop inside the oil pan
drain hole.
ADVICE
Oil pan drain plug
• If the engine oil is not sufficiently
4WD model drained from the oil pan, the oil
level may be too high when oil is
replenished.
• Drained oil must be disposed of in a
method conforming to the regulatory
requirements in your country.
Oil pan drain plug

6. Remove the oil filter in one of the
following procedures:
- When replacing the oil filter without
using a drain hose, use the special
oil filter wrench to remove the oil
filter.
When the oil from the oil filter spills
out into the oil filter pan, remove the
oil from the oil filter pan. Wipe away
any spilled oil with a workshop rag,
Oil filter
etc.
- When replacing the oil filter using
Oil filter
a drain hose, remove the rubber
cap attached to the end of the drain
Drain pipe pipe for the oil filter pan and attach
a commercially available drain hose
to the drain pipe before removing
the oil filter. Then, place a container
under the end of the drain hose
after pulling the hose to the bottom
Rubber cap of the engine.
Oil filter pan Use the special oil filter wrench to
remove the oil filter.
Drain any oil remaining in the oil
filter pan from the drain hose into
the container. After oil drainage is
complete, remove the drain hose
and attach the rubber cap. Wipe
away any spilled oil with a workshop
rag, etc.
ADVICE
• Drained oil must be disposed of in a
method conforming to the regulatory
requirements in your country.
NOTE
• Engine oil will spill out from the
removed oil filter, so catch the
engine oil with a workshop rag, etc.

7. Lightly coat the gasket of the new oil

filter with clean engine oil.
8. Wipe the attachment surface of the oil
filter clean with a rag, etc.
9. Install the new oil filter. After the filter
gasket comes in contact with the
surface to which it will be attached,
use the special oil filter wrench and
tighten it by a 2/3 (two thirds) turn.
ADVICE
• When installing the oil filter, make
sure the gasket is not caught in the
screw threads. This could cause oil
leaks.
10. Replace the oil pan drain plug gasket.

Reinstall and tighten the oil pan drain
plug.
Drain plug tightening torque

44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m/33 lb·ft)
ADVICE
• The dirt on the plug must be wiped
off before reinstalling it.
11. Measure the specified quantity of the

specified oil.
12. Remove the oil dipstick and pour the
specified quantity of oil once from the
oil filler.
13. Install the oil dipstick and the oil filler
cap.
14. Wait 5 minutes or more without
starting the engine.

15. Remove the oil dipstick and wipe off
Oil change is needed any oil on the oil dipstick.
Inspection
MAX 16. Reinsert the oil dipstick fully and then
gently remove it.
1 dipstick. If the highest position is
higher than the "MIN" mark, the oil is
Replenishment at the correct level.
MAX
2 - If the "Replenishment MAX" mark
MIN is exceeded, drain oil until the
Adding oil is needed level is between the "MIN" and
"Replenishment MAX" marks (range
2).
Front Back Front Back 18. Reinstall the oil dipstick into position
MIN after checking the oil level.
19. Reinstall the engine cover.
WARNING
• Bringing flames or other heat sources near spilled engine oil could cause a fire.
Make sure to wipe it all up.
• Do not leave flammable items, such as rags or gloves in the engine
compartment. They could be the cause of a fire. Also, do not forget your tools.
ADVICE
• Do not start the engine until the oil level has been checked, because it will
become impossible to confirm the correct oil level.
NOTE
• If the oil level is above the "MIN" mark, there is a sufficient amount of oil.

Engine Coolant
The engine cooling system is a device for keeping the engine temperature at an
appropriate level.
The engine coolant must be changed according to the Maintenance Schedule.
Have engine coolant replacement performed at an Isuzu Dealer.
WARNING
• Check, replenish or change the engine coolant only after the engine has
sufficiently cooled down.
• Do not loosen or remove the cap of the radiator or reserve tank cap when the
engine coolant is still hot. Hot vapor or boiling water may burst out and cause a
burn. Cover the cap with a cloth, etc. and remove it gradually after the engine is
fully cooled down and the temperature of the engine coolant becomes low.
• When removing the radiator cap or reserve tank cap, use a thick cloth to cover
the cap and turn it slowly.
• Engine coolant is toxic and must not be ingested. If the engine coolant is
mistakenly ingested, immediately vomit it and seek prompt medical attention.
• If the engine coolant gets in your eyes, rinse it off immediately with a large
amount of water for 15 minutes or longer. Also, if still abnormality such as
irritation is felt, seek medical attention.
• If the engine coolant gets on your skin, rinse it off using a soap with a large
amount of water. Also, if abnormality is seen, seek medical attention.
• Engine coolant is flammable, and therefore, it must be kept away from flames
and other heat sources. Engine coolant also could ignite if it comes in contact
with a hot surface, such as the exhaust manifold. Exercise caution to prevent
this from happening.
ADVICE
• Replace the engine coolant periodically.
If the engine coolant is not replaced periodically, rust is generated due to
degradation of the engine coolant, which may cause a failure such as water
leakage or clogging of the radiator or heater core.

NOTE
• Engine coolant is fluid which is made by mixing coolant and water at an

To prevent the engine damage due to freezing of the engine coolant and to protect the
cooling system from corrosion, mix the Isuzu recommended coolant and water to be an
Outside temperature Coolant concentration*

-30°C (-22°F) or above 50%
* Direct use of "50/50 Pre-diluted" product which is already diluted to 50%
concentration is recommended.
ADVICE
• Isuzu does not guarantee the use of the engine or vehicle at the outside
temperature of -30°C (-22°F) or below.
• However, if the engine or vehicle is used at the outside temperature of -30°C (-22
°F) or below, the coolant concentration of 55% is recommended.
WARNING
• Coolant is toxic and must not be ingested. If the coolant is mistakenly ingested,
immediately vomit it and seek prompt medical attention.
• If the coolant gets in your eyes, rinse it off immediately with a large amount of
water for 15 minutes or longer. Also, if still abnormality such as irritation is felt,
seek medical attention.
• If the coolant gets on your skin, rinse it off using a soap with a large amount of
water. Also, if abnormality is seen, seek medical attention.
• For storage, close the cap securely and keep it in a place inaccessible to
children.
• Coolant is flammable, and therefore, it must be kept away from flames and other
heat sources. Coolant also could ignite if it comes in contact with a hot surface,
such as the exhaust manifold. Exercise caution to prevent this from happening.

CAUTION
• Use only an Isuzu recommended coolant.
• Using any coolant other than that Isuzu recommended could cause damage
to the engine, radiator or heater core. In particular, use of coolants containing
borate salts or silicates may result in engine or radiator corrosion, causing
engine coolant leaks and other problems.
ADVICE
• To dilute the coolant, use distilled water or deionized water.
• Do not use the coolant at any coolant concentration other than that specified. If
the coolant concentration is 60% or higher, overheating is likely to occur, while if
it is 30% or lower, anti-corrosion function is not provided sufficiently.
• Using coolant at any coolant concentration other than that specified may reduce
anti-freezing performance, and engine coolant may freeze.
• If the engine coolant decreases rapidly, go immediately to the nearest Isuzu
Dealer for a check or repair.
• Do not introduce additives to engine coolant other than coolant.

Checking the Engine Coolant Level
Reserve tank The reserve tank is located at the front right
side of the engine compartment. When the
engine has cooled down, make sure that
the engine coolant level in the reserve tank
is between the "MAX" and "MIN" line.
"MAX" line In addition, remove the radiator cap and
"MIN" line
check that the engine coolant is full to the
filler neck. Check the engine coolant level
only when it is cold.
Engine Hood → Refer to page 6-10
CAUTION
• The radiator cap opens and closes
in double action. When removing
the radiator cap, take caution not to
damage the cap and the filler neck.
Also, check to make sure there are no

leaks from the radiator or radiator hose.
Check for fluid or stains on the ground
Radiator cap showing leaks where the vehicle is parked.
Contact your Isuzu Dealer when you
discover leaks.
CAUTION
• Using the vehicle when there are
leaks can lead to engine seizure.

Adding the Engine Coolant

Reserve tank When the engine coolant level in the
reserve tank is below the "MIN" line, open
the tank cap and fill to near the "MAX"
line with engine coolant. Tighten the cap
securely after the engine coolant has been
"MAX" line
replenished.
"MIN" line
WARNING
• Check, replenish or change the
engine coolant only after the engine
has sufficiently cooled down.
ADVICE
• Do not overfill the reserve tank.
• Check the reserve tank to determine engine coolant level. In situations,
however, where the level in the reserve tank rises or falls suddenly, open the
radiator cap and check the level within the radiator itself.
• When the engine is still hot, take care to prevent engine coolant from contact
with the exhaust manifold. Any such contact could result in exhaust manifold
damage.
• If the level of engine coolant changes rapidly, have your vehicle inspected at
your Isuzu Dealer.

Handling the Radiator and Intercooler

Cleaning the Radiator Core and
Intercooler Core
Radiator Cooling efficiency is compromised when
there is dirt or dust plugging air passages
in the radiator core and intercooler core.
This can also cause corrosion of these
cores. Periodically wash the radiator core
and intercooler core with tap water.
WARNING
• Before cleaning cores, make sure to
Intercooler turn the engine off and remove the
key from the starter switch.
Intercooler core
Radiator core • The area around the engine is
extremely hot immediately after
vehicle operation, so wait until the
vehicle has cooled down before
cleaning. Otherwise, you could be
burned.
CAUTION
• When washing the radiator core and
intercooler core, make sure that they
have sufficiently cooled. Otherwise,
the cores could be damaged.
• Do not clean the radiator, intercooler
and their surrounding areas using
Fin
water that is supplied under high
pressure. Doing so may cause
damage.
• When cleaning the radiator core
and intercooler core, do not crush or
damage the fins.
• The fins are very fragile so be
careful not to bend them out of
shape. If they become deformed,
their cooling efficiency will be
impaired.
CAUTION (Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)
• Before cleaning, take steps to
ensure that no water will splash
onto the surrounding electrical
components and wires.
• If stubborn dirt still remains
even after the radiator core and
intercooler core have been cleaned,
have the vehicle inspected and
serviced at your Isuzu Dealer.
Fan Belt and Air Conditioning Compressor Belt
CAUTION
• A V-ribbed belt is used for the fan belt. This type of belt requires the tension
to be adjusted more accurately than is required with the conventional V belt.
Inappropriate tension could cause the belt to make noise or break. When the
fan belt is damaged, electricity is not properly generated or becomes a cause of
engine overheating. You must check the tension of the fan belt carefully.
• Inappropriate tension could cause the belt to make noise or break. You must
check the tension of the air conditioning compressor belt carefully.
• Use Isuzu genuine parts when changing the fan belt.
[Follow this to properly adjust belt tension]
• Adjust the belt using the following method after installing either a new or used
belt.
- Inspect the belt before starting the engine or 30 minutes after turning off the
engine to cool down.
- Align the belt and pulley grooves and adjust the belt tension using the
indicated method.
- Start the engine, and let it idle for about 1 minute to equalize the tension of
the belt at all spans between the pulleys.
- Stop the engine, and then check the belt tension. If the tension is
inappropriate, readjust it to the specified standard value.
- Use the new belt tension specification only after replacing the belt with a new
one.

Inspection
Press the center of the span between
Amount of pulleys (see the figure) of the belt with a
deflection force of 98 N (10.0 kgf/22 lb) and check
the amount of deflection. The amount of
deflection must fall within the standard
value range indicated below. Otherwise,
adjust the tension.
When inspecting by vibration frequency,
place and hold the sensor mike surface
parallel to the belt 10 mm (0.39 in) from
Air conditioning the center of the span between pulleys
compressor
(indicated by the arrow) and tap the belt
Amount of with a handle of screwdriver etc. to make
deflection Fan belt Air conditioning
Generator compressor belt the belt vibrated and measure the value.
Measure the value 2 or 3 times and
calculate the average value. The average
value must be within the standard value
range indicated below. Otherwise, adjust
the tension.
Also check the belt for cracks or other
damage. If there are cracks or damage
or if the inspected value is not within the
standard value range, replace the belt.
Have adjustment and replacement of the
fan belt or the air conditioning compressor
belt performed at an Isuzu Dealer.
Standard value Standard value

[amount of deflection] [vibration frequency]
7.7 - 8.5 mm/0.30 - 0.33 in 160 - 174 Hz
Fan belt
(New belt: 5.4 - 6.6 mm/0.21 - 0.26 in)* (New belt: 188 - 210 Hz)*
Air conditioning 16.5 - 19.1 mm/0.65 - 0.75 in 79 - 91 Hz
compressor belt (New belt: 12.5 - 16.5 mm/0.49 - 0.65 in)* (New belt: 92 - 112 Hz)*
*: The values in parentheses are the adjusted values for replacement with a new belt.

Air Cleaner
Use of clogged air cleaner element not only causes a deterioration in the engine output
but also increased fuel consumption. The air cleaner element should be serviced in the
following manner.
The air cleaner element must be inspected and changed according to the Maintenance
Schedule. Have air cleaner element replacement performed at an Isuzu Dealer.
ADVICE
• Be sure to use an Isuzu genuine air cleaner element.
• The cover should be reinstalled after aligning correctly to prevent dust from
entering. The engine air cleaner should be installed at all times unless
temporary removal is necessary during repair or maintenance of the vehicle.
Absence of the air cleaner could cause damage to the engine.
Air Cleaner Element Indicator Light

Checking the Air Cleaner

Remove the air cleaner element and check
to see if it is blocked by dirt.
If air cleaner element is blocked by dirt,
clean the air cleaner element.
1. Unfasten the 2 clips and open the air
cleaner cover.
Cover
Clip

2. Remove the air cleaner element by
Cover
pulling it out upward.
3. Remove the dirt that has accumulated
on the air cleaner cover and the air
Element
cleaner body.
4. Install the air cleaner element.
5. Clean the drain valve at the bottom of

the air cleaner.
ADVICE
• When installing, keep the air cleaner
element direction aligned, and firmly
lock the two clips of the air cleaner
cover.
Drain valve

Cleaning the Air Cleaner Element

1. Blow compressed air at a pressure
of up to 690 kPa (7.0 kgf/cm² / 100
psi) against the upward side of the
element to remove the dust.
2. Check to see if the element has been
damaged or become thin in places.
ADVICE
• Do not apply compressed air to
the outer face of the element as it
causes the dust to lodge in the inner
face.

Fuel Filter
Change the fuel filter (both the chassis-side and engine-side fuel filters for vehicles
with a pre-fuel filter) in accordance with the Maintenance Schedule. Have fuel filter
replacement performed at an Isuzu Dealer.
Drain the water when the water separator (fuel filter) warning light comes on.
Water Separator (Fuel Filter) Warning Light

When a certain amount of water has
collected in the water separator (the engine
side fuel filter), the water separator (fuel
filter) warning light comes on.
When this happens, drain the water and
make sure that the warning light has gone
out.
CAUTION
• Water remaining that is not discharged from the water separator could freeze
and damage the vehicle.
• If the warning light comes on while the engine is in operation, immediately drain
the water from the water separator (fuel filter). Continuing to drive with the light
remaining on could damage the fuel injection system. If this happens, have the
vehicle checked and serviced by the nearest Isuzu Dealer.



Have water separator (fuel filter) drain work performed at an Isuzu Dealer. If performing
water separator (fuel filter) drain work yourself, dispose of the oil in a method
conforming to the regulatory requirements in your country.
1. The fuel filter is located at the rear

left side of the engine compartment.
Connect one end of a plastic hose to
the drain plug at the bottom of the fuel
filter and place the other end of the
hose inside a container to receive the
Drain plug drained fluid.
WARNING
• Perform drain work in a location
without any flammable material.
Failure to do so could cause a fire.
2. Loosen the drain plug and move the

Priming pump priming pump up and down by hand
between 10 and 20 times.
3. Fully tighten the drain plug and move
the priming pump several times.
4. Test run the engine and check that
there are no fuel leaks from the drain
plugs of the fuel filter. Also check
that the water separator (fuel filter)
warning light stays off.

CAUTION
• Be sure to stop the engine when draining water from the fuel filter.
• Clean off any fuel that has adhered to the vehicle body.
• Starting the engine immediately after draining the water from the fuel filter
requires a little more time than usual. If the engine doesn't start in 10 seconds,
wait for a while and try again.
• Fuel will be mixed in the drained water. Dispose of it in a method conforming to
the regulatory requirements in your country.
• If the water separator (fuel filter) requires frequent draining, have the fuel tank
drained at your Isuzu Dealer. It would be better not to use the water separator
(fuel filter), since it may possibly exert a bad effect on the fuel system.


CHASSIS-RELATED SERVICE AND
MAINTENANCE
● Brakes 6-46
● Parking Brake 6-51
● Wheels and Tires 6-51
● Tire Rotation 6-57
● Spare Tire 6-58
● Handling the Jack 6-62
● Changing Tires 6-67
● Clutch (Manual Transmission Model) 6-76
● Automatic Transmission Fluid (Automatic Transmission

6-77
Model)
● Steering Wheel 6-78

● Power Steering Fluid 6-79

Brakes
WARNING
• If there are abnormalities with the brake system, avoid driving the vehicle and
contact the nearest Isuzu Dealer.
Brake Fluid
For a manual transmission model, the tank of the brake fluid is common with a tank of
the clutch fluid.
WARNING
• If the brake fluid gets in your eyes, rinse it off immediately with a large amount
of water for 15 minutes or longer. Also, if still abnormality such as irritation is felt,
CAUTION
• Before refilling the tank, clean the area around the cap and fill brake fluid from a
clean container. Foreign objects getting in the tank will lead to a brake system
failure.
• Inspect and change brake fluid according to the Maintenance Schedule.
• Use non-petroleum base brake fluid when adding brake fluid.
• Be careful not to let brake fluid come in contact with skin. If fluid comes into
contact with skin, wash away the fluid with water.
• Brake fluid melts paintwork and vehicle component materials such as plastic,
vinyl and rubber. It is also highly corrosive on metals. If it is spilled, immediately
wipe the area clean or wash away the fluid with water.
• If skin irritation persists, check with a doctor.
• Brake fluid readily absorbs moisture. Therefore, it is necessary to close the
container tightly for storage.
• Do not mix brake fluid with fluids of a non-specified brand. Due to chemical
reactions, any mixture of differently branded fluids will cause failure of the brake
system.
CAUTION (Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)
• If the brake fluid level decreases rapidly, there may be a problem in the brake
system or brake pads or shoe linings may have worn out. Have your vehicle
inspected by the nearest Isuzu Dealer immediately.
Checking the Brake Fluid Level

Brake fluid compartment Check that the fluid level in the reserve
tank is between the "MAX" and "MIN" lines.
Be sure to use the brake fluid compartment
section when checking the "MIN" line
section of the brake fluid level. The brake
fluid level cannot be accurately checked
if the brake fluid level is checked with
a method other than the brake fluid
compartment section.
"MAX" line
"MIN" line
If the fluid surface cannot easily be seen,
rock the vehicle gently.
CAUTION
• Be sure to check the fluid level
correctly. The clutch and brake fluid
level varies when the brake pads
are worn out.
Adding Brake Fluid

If the level of brake fluid has dropped below the "MIN" line, remove the cap and add
fluid. Take care to avoid filling beyond the "MAX" line.
Tighten the cap securely after the fluid has been added.
Changing Brake Fluid

Change the brake fluid according to the Maintenance Schedule using the specified
fluid. Since a brake fluid change requires disassembly of the related components, have
this service performed by your Isuzu Dealer.

Brake Pedal
Free Play
Shut off the engine and depress the brake
pedal about 10 times strongly, then check
the brake pedal for free play by lightly
pushing it by hand until you feel resistance.
If the free play is not within the specified
range, have your vehicle inspected and
Free play adjusted by an Isuzu Dealer.
Free play (measured at the tip of pedal)

6 - 10 mm (0.24 - 0.39 in)
Height and Allowance

Inspect the brake pedal height from the
floor.
Next, start the engine, wait at least 1
minute and inspect the brake pedal
allowance from the floor with the brake
pedal in a depressed position.
If the height and allowance are not within
the specified range, have your vehicle
Height
inspected and adjusted by an Isuzu Dealer.
Allowance
Height
Transmission model
Right-hand drive models Left-hand drive models
Manual transmission
177.4 - 189.4 mm (7.0 - 7.5 in) 176.3 - 188.3 mm (6.9 - 7.4 in)
models
Automatic transmission
179.6 - 191.6 mm (7.1 - 7.5 in) 178.5 - 190.5 mm (7.0 - 7.5 in)
models
Allowance (pressure of 490 N (50 kgf / 110 lb) applied to the brake pedal)
45 mm (1.77 in) or more

ADVICE
• If, after continued pressing of the
brake pedal, the clearance slowly
decreases or the pedal action feels
spongy, air may be trapped in the
brake hydraulic circuit. Have your
vehicle inspected at the nearest
• If your vehicle's brakes squeak
during normal driving or braking, the
cause may be one of the following.
- Brake pad wear
Brake pads are about to wear out.
If this happens, have your vehicle
inspected at the nearest Isuzu
- Adherence of sand, grit or mud
If sand, grit or mud adheres to
the brakes, a screeching sound
may be emitted upon contact
with rotating components. If this
happens, wash the vehicle to
remove all such adhering matter. If
cleaning alone does not eliminate
the squeaking sound, have your
vehicle inspected at the nearest
NOTE
• To check the clearance of the pedal from the floor, start the engine, depress
the accelerator pedal a few times, and use the first pressing of the brake pedal
to measure the clearance. The clearance cannot be correctly measured after
pressing the pedal two or more times in succession.

Brake Performance
Run the vehicle slowly on a dry road and apply the brakes. Check that the brakes
fully work and the vehicle does not pull on one side. If there are problems with brake
performance, avoid driving the vehicle and contact the nearest Isuzu Dealer.
CAUTION
• A brake performance check should be performed on a wide road with
good visibility while paying adequate attention to the traffic behind and the
surroundings.
Brake Hoses and Pipes

With the steering wheel turned fully to the
left, check the left front brake hose and
pipe visually and by touch, making sure
that they are free of scratches, cracks and
bulging. Also make sure that the hose
and pipe do not interfere with any chassis
part or wheel, and that their joints are not
leaking and free of any type of damage.
Check the right front brake hose and pipe
in the same way. The rear left and right
brake hoses and pipes should also be
checked. If there are abnormalities with the
brake hose or pipes (damage, scratches,
cracks, bulging, leakage, etc.), avoid
driving the vehicle and contact the nearest
Isuzu Dealer.

Parking Brake
Inspection
Release button Pull the parking brake lever slowly from
the fully released position while counting
Parking brake lever
the clicks produced as the lever engages
ratchet plate notches to check that it can
be raised the proper amount and the lever
is held firmly. If the number of notches is
not within the standard value range below,
adjust it to the standard value. Also, on a
dry sloping road, check that the parking
brake can hold the vehicle stationary.
Have adjustment of the parking brake and
inspections for parking brake performance
performed at an Isuzu Dealer.
Lever stroke*
6 to 9 notches
*:Number of notches before parking brake
is set when lever is pulled slowly from
released position with pull force of about
294 N (30 kgf/66 lb).
Wheels and Tires

The wheels have a major influence upon the safety and comfort of driving. Should any
wheel fall off the vehicle, it not only causes the vehicle to breakdown on the road and
block other traffic, but it may also lead to a serious accident. We strongly recommend
that you check the wheels and tires daily and maintain them in satisfactory condition.
WARNING
• Do not drive the vehicle unless the tires are properly inflated and in safe
condition.
• If you find anything abnormal with wheel bolts, wheel nuts, disc wheels or tires
when you check them, avoid driving the vehicle and contact the nearest Isuzu
Dealer.
• If you find anything abnormal on the left wheels, check the right wheels carefully
for similar defects. A defect on a wheel may be a sign of defects on other
wheels.

Checking Tires
Air Pressure
Too low or too high a tire air pressure not
only affects the ride or causes damage to
the cargo but also causes abnormal heat
buildup, premature wear, a tire puncture, or
may even cause the tire to burst.
• Use an appropriate tire air pressure
gauge when measuring the air
pressure of a tire. Tire air pressure
should be measured when the tire
is cold, or before the vehicle is
driven. (After driving, tire air pressure
increases by about 10%.)
• As the tire air pressure varies
depending on the vehicle model and
Air pressure label tire size, refer to the air pressure label
on the driver's door opening frame
if the air pressure label is attached
or the tire air pressure tables on the
following pages if the air pressure
label is not attached.
• Also check the air pressure of the
spare tire using a tire air pressure
gauge at the intervals specified by the
Maintenance Schedule.

Tire Size and Tire Air Pressure
Tire air pressure
Tire size
Vehicle model kPa (kgf/cm²/psi)
Front Rear Front Rear
2WD 215/70R15C 225 (2.25/33) 375 (3.75/54)
2WD High-Ride/ 245/70R16 200 (2.00/29) 280 (2.80/41)
4WD 255/65R17 200 (2.00/29) 250 (2.50/36)
WARNING
• Insufficiently inflated or worn-out tires are highly dangerous as they easily skid
and can even burst. Should they burst, the tires may burn and this could cause
a fire in the vehicle.
• If you drive on under-inflated or flat tires, the wheel bolts will be placed under
excessive stress. Under such conditions, the bolts may break and the wheel
may detach from the vehicle, possibly causing an accident.
CAUTION
• Over-inflated tires result in a harsh ride and are likely to cause damage to the
cargo. Under-inflated tires build up heat and could burst. Always keep the tires
of your vehicle adjusted at the standard air pressures.

Cracks and Other Damage

Check the tread and sidewall surfaces of each tire for cracks or other damage.
Especially check the tread for nails or other metal pieces embedded in grooves.
If you find anything abnormal with tires when you check them, avoid driving the vehicle
and contact the nearest Isuzu Dealer.
ADVICE
• When checking tires, pay special attention to: low air pressure; pebbles or nails
in tread grooves; cracks or other damage on tire surfaces; uneven wear.
Tread Depth and Abnormal Wear

Using worn-out tires is dangerous because
they might have an increased chance
of getting punctured or bursting while
driving. Check all tires to see if tread wear
Tread wear indicator position mark
(Example) indicators appear on their treads and also
check their entire tread for its depth with a
depth gauge to make sure that the grooves
are deeper than the specified depth.
A tire with tread wear indicators appearing
must be changed. Also, check the tires for
uneven or otherwise abnormal wear.
Tread wear If the tires are worn, contact your Isuzu
indicator
(Example)
Tread surface
CAUTION
• Tires with excessively shallow tread grooves will increase the chance of
skidding and, when driving at high speeds, hydroplaning.

Visual Checking of Wheel
Too much
Installation Condition
Loose nut Crack
protrusion Visually check the condition of installation
of bolt end of each disc wheel.
1. Check that there are no missing
wheel bolts and wheel nuts.
2. Check each disc wheel to see if there
is any rust seepage from wheel bolts
or nuts. Also check the disc wheel for
cracks or other damage.
3. Check the end of each wheel bolt for
proper length of protrusion from the
Missing nut Rust spots Broken bolt wheel nut. The protrusion should be
uniform among all bolts on a wheel
and among all wheels. If you find
anything abnormal with wheel bolts,
wheel nuts or disc wheels when you
check them, avoid driving the vehicle
and contact the nearest Isuzu Dealer.
CAUTION
• Any abnormality in wheel installation
is likely to lead to loose or missing
wheel nuts and/or broken wheel
bolts.

Spare Tire Air Pressure

Keep the air pressure of the spare tire
slightly higher than the standard pressure.
Adjust the pressure correctly when you use
it.
Tires heat up while driving, and their air
pressures become higher accordingly.
If you must wait until right after driving
to adjust the air pressure, determine the
target pressure for adjustment by adding
about 20 kPa (0.2 kgf/cm² / 3 psi) to the
standard pressure.
Tires Used for Long Term

Tires are made of rubber whose property
changes gradually by aging as time goes
on (even when it is stored fitted on the rim
like a spare tire). Tires must receive an
aging check after being used for up to 5 to
7 years if they are to be used continuously.
For further details, please contact your
Isuzu Dealer.

Tire Rotation
CAUTION
• Be sure to check the wheel bolts, wheel nuts and disc wheel for any abnormality
whenever the disc wheel is removed.
• If you find any abnormal condition on the wheel bolts, wheel nuts or disc wheel,
do not continue to use the wheel. Contact the nearest Isuzu Dealer as soon as
possible.
Tires at different locations wear differently. For uniform tire wear and longer tire life,
you should rotate the tires on your vehicle regularly.
If one-sided tire wear appears on radial tires, rotate the wheels as shown in the below
figure.
ADVICE
• The tightening torque of the wheel nuts may decrease after a tire change due
to their initial settlement. Upon driving 50 to 100 km (31 to 62 miles) after a
tire change, retighten the wheel nuts to the specified torques according to the
instructions in the "Retightening Wheel Nuts" section in this chapter.
• The spare tire disc wheel is steel (not aluminum). It is for emergency use
only for vehicles that are equipped with an aluminum wheel (do not use in the
rotation sequence).
Retightening Wheel Nuts


Spare Tire
Removal
1. Assemble the spare tire removal bars
and jack handle.
Jack handle
Spare tire
removal bar
Spare tire 2. When assembling the spare tire

removal bar removal bars to each other, tighten
the joint bolts by hand or with a
screwdriver (Phillips head).
Make sure that the concave side is
facing the bolt side of the other bar
before tightening the bolt.
Screwdriver
CAUTION
• Make sure that each screw joint is
tightened properly.
ADVICE
• All the joint bolts should be
tightened properly or the bars may
become loose and hit the body
panel, causing damage to the panel
or paint.
• To prevent paint damage, place
several pieces of paper above
painted parts.

Spare tire removal bar 3. Insert the spare tire removal bar into
the hole in the spare tire carrier, and
turn the jack handle counterclockwise
to remove the spare tire.
To lower
the tire
Jack handle
Storage
1. Set the disc wheel so that its outer
Plate surface faces up, and then insert the
plate into the center of the disc wheel.
2. Insert the hook of the plate into the

disc wheel nut hole and adjust its
position for secure engagement with
the spare tire before winding the chain
up.
Hook

Spare tire removal bar
To raise the tire
Jack handle
3. Let the chain rest in the center of the

disc wheel while it is raised halfway.
Then turn the jack handle to lift up the
tire.
Turn the spare tire removal bar
clockwise to fully wind up the chain,
apply at least 196 N (20 kgf/44 lb) of
force to the jack handle by hand, and
make sure that the spare tire is firmly
secured in place.
CAUTION
• Do not remove the spare tire while the vehicle is jacked up.
• If the chain twisted when it is wound, it becomes loose while running due to
vibrations or shocks and the tire might fall off; this is very dangerous.
• After storing the tire in the carrier, check that the tire is held firmly. If loosely
retained, the tire becomes loose while running due to vibrations or shocks and
the tire might fall off; this is very dangerous.

ADVICE
• After storing the spare tire, check that it is not loose by strongly pushing the tire
with your foot. If the tire is loose, fasten it again after checking that there are
no defects in the carrier such as a bent bracket or hanger plate. If you cannot
retighten the tire in the carrier, avoid driving the vehicle and contact the nearest
Isuzu Dealer.
Air Pressure
Check the air pressure of the spare tire using a tire air pressure gauge at the intervals
specified in the Maintenance Schedule.
A spare tire inflated to a normal pressure may lose its pressure gradually over time due
to leaks. You should therefore inflate it to a pressure a little higher than the normal
over time pressure.

Handling the Jack
WARNING
• Raising the vehicle with a jack could lead to an accident when carried out on
soft or inclined surfaces. Ensure that you always carry out this operation on flat,
solid surfaces.
• Do not place any objects above or below the jack while performing the jacking
operation.
• Always apply the parking brake fully and correctly chock the wheels with the
gearshift lever in the "R (reverse)" position for manual transmission models
and "P" for automatic transmission models before jacking the vehicle. A vehicle
blocked only with the parking brake could move, creating a very dangerous
situation when the rear wheels are jacked up.
• Place the front wheels in a straight position and remove the key from the starter
switch to lock the steering wheel.
• Ensure that there are no people or objects present in the vehicle before it is
jacked up.
• In order to ensure safety, doors should never be opened and the engine should
never be started during a jack-up operation.
• The jack must only be used at one of the specified jacking points. In addition,
you must confirm that it makes good contact with the specified point.
• In order to provide extra safety should the jack slip, once a spare tire has been
removed, it should be placed under the vehicle near the jack.
• Before starting a jacking operation, ensure that the jack and the jacking point
to be used are clear of dirt, oil and grease. Failure to observe this precaution
could lead to an accident should the dirt or oil cause the jack to slip.
• It might start moving when the engine power is transmitted to the rear axle even
when one of the wheels on the axle is raised clear of the ground. Do not start
the engine with any rear wheel in contact with the ground.
• The jack provided with your vehicle must be used only for changing defective
tires and fitting or removing tire chains. In order to ensure safety, furthermore,
only one wheel should be jacked up at a time.
• Do not use more than one jack at any one time.
• Lifting up both wheels at the same time is very dangerous. Be sure to jack up
one wheel at one time.
• The jack supplied with your vehicle is specifically for that vehicle. Do not use it
on another vehicle and never use another vehicle's jack.
WARNING (Continued)

WARNING (Continued)
• Be sure that the jack bar is tightly inserted into the jack handle before turning
the handle and bar. Serious personal injury can result if the bar slips from the
handle during the jacking procedure.
• Do not get under a vehicle and no person should place any portion of their body
under a vehicle that supported by a jack. Failure to observe this precaution
could lead to an accident if the jack were to slip.
• If the underside of the vehicle is to be worked on after jacking up, jack stands
must be used to support the vehicle.
Operating the Jack

Raising the Vehicle
1. Assemble the jack bars and jack
handle.
Jack handle
Jack bar

Jack bar 2. When assemble jack bars to each

other, tighten joint bolt by hand or a
screwdriver (Phillips side).
Make sure that the concave side is
facing the bolt side of the other bar
before tighten the bolt.
Screwdriver
CAUTION
• Make sure that each screw joint is
tightened properly.
3. Insert the jack bar end into the jack

socket.
4. Place the jack immediately below
the jacking point and ensure that it is
upright.
The jack must be placed on a flat,
solid surface.
5. Turn the jack handle, and check that
the jack moves correctly.
Front Wheel Jacking Points
Rear Wheel Jacking Points
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack
handle clockwise.
7. Confirm that the jack is in good
contact with the jacking point, and
then continue to raise the vehicle.

WARNING
1st level
• The jack has 2 levels. After
2nd level completion of the 2nd level lifting, the
handle becomes heavy to operate.
At this time, stop lifting up with the
jack. If lifting up is continued, the
jack may be damaged. If the vehicle
is lifted up with the jack excessively,
the vehicle becomes unstable and
very dangerous.
Lowering the Vehicle

Lower the vehicle by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise to the ground.

Jacking Points
WARNING
• Failure to position the jack as described could result in serious personal injury or
vehicle damage caused by the vehicle slipping off the jack.

Apply the jack head to the flat part of the bracket on the frame side.

Set the jack at a point within 90 mm (3.5 in) from the leaf spring under the axle tube.
Align the recess on the jack head to the curved surface of the axle tube center.
Jacking points Front wheel jacking points
Rear wheel jacking points
Less than 90mm (3.5in)

Changing Tires
Preparation
When you park the vehicle to change tires,
choose a place listed below.
• Your vehicle does not hinder other
traffic.
• The surface is level, flat and solid.
• You can change a tire safely.
When changing tires on a road, use
the hazard warning flasher and triangle
reflectors to alert other traffic to the
presence of your vehicle.
Fully pull the parking brake lever, put the
gearshift lever in the "R (reverse)" position
for manual transmission models or put
the selector lever in the "P" position for
automatic transmission models. Chock
both the front and back sides of the wheel
diagonally opposite to the one to be
changed with chocks (or stones, wood
blocks, etc.). (Example: When changing the
right rear wheel, chock the left front wheel.)
Have the passengers get out of the vehicle.
CAUTION
• Use a tire of the specified size and the same tread pattern as the one to be
replaced.

Removing a Wheel
WARNING
• Always apply the parking brake fully and put the gearshift lever in the "R
(reverse)" position for manual transmission models or put the selector lever
in the "P" position for automatic transmission models and correctly chock the
wheels before raising the vehicle. Applying only the parking brake is insufficient
to prevent the vehicle from moving. When a rear wheel is jacked up, the vehicle
blocked only by the parking brake would move, creating a very dangerous
situation.
• Ensure that there are no people or objects present in the vehicle before it is
jacked up.
• Never open doors or start the engine while jacking up the wheel. Do not try to
look into the underside of the vehicle or get beneath the vehicle. This is very
dangerous.
• To avoid danger in case of the jack slipping off, place the removed spare tire
near the jack under the vehicle.
• Never apply oil or grease to the wheel bolts or nuts. Wheel nuts may loosen,
causing the wheels to fall off and cause serious accidents.
• Never use heat to loosen tight wheel nuts. The application of heat to the hub
can shorten the life of the wheel and may cause damage to wheel bearings.
CAUTION
• The wheel is heavy. Carefully handle it to avoid getting hurt when removing and
installing the wheel.
• Do not touch the exhaust pipe or the diesel particulate defuser (DPD) just after
stopping the vehicle as they are very hot.
• Be careful for personal injuries when handling wheel ornaments.

Flat tire 1. Firmly apply the parking brake and put
the gearshift lever in the "R (reverse)"
position for manual transmission
models or put the selector lever
in the "P" position for automatic
transmission models. When changing
a front wheel, chock the rear wheel
diagonally opposite to the front wheel.
When changing a rear wheel, chock
Chocks the front wheel diagonally opposite to
the rear wheel.
2. Firmly apply the head of the jack to
the jacking point.
Handling the Jack
3. Raise the vehicle enough so that the
tire not quite clear of the ground.
4. In the case of aluminum wheel
models remove the wheel cover by
using the flat end of the jack handle.
Pry along the edge of the wheel cover
until it comes off. Using the wheel nut
wrench, loosen the wheel nuts just
enough so that the wheel remains
stable in position. Do not remove the
wheel nuts yet.
CAUTION
• Remove the wheel cover using the
flat end of the jack handle. If you
remove the wheel cover with bare
hands, you could be injured by the
edge of the wheel cover.
• Do not loosen the wheel nuts too
much. The wheel bolts would be
damaged.

ADVICE
• Wrap a piece of cloth or tape around
the flat end of the jack handle so as
not to damage the wheel and wheel
cover.
5. Jack up the vehicle so that the tire is

clear of the ground completely.
6. Remove all the wheel nuts that have
been loosened, and then remove the
wheel.
Remove the wheel being careful to
not damage the threads of the wheel
bolts.
ADVICE
• Do not put the wheel with its design
(outer) side down on the floor. It
may cause scratch on the wheel
surface.
7. Check the following parts: the disc

wheel for deformation and damage
such as cracks; the hub for excessive
wear of the disc wheel fitting surface;
and the wheel bolts and nuts for
damage to the threads. If anything
abnormal is found in the above parts,
check other parts as well, and replace
any defective part with a new one.

Installing a Wheel
WARNING
• A disc wheel, wheel bolts or wheel nuts in any abnormal condition could break
later, causing the wheel to be detached from the vehicle while driving.
• If you find anything abnormal with wheel bolts, wheel nuts or disc wheels when
you check them, avoid driving the vehicle and contact the nearest Isuzu Dealer.
• Do not repaint any mating surfaces, wheel nut seating surfaces (tapered
surfaces) and hub fitting surface of the disc wheel. Thick paint films would
cause loosened or broken wheel bolts.
• Do not assemble the wheel in a slanted state or with the center of the wheel
misaligned state.
• Never apply oil or grease to the wheel bolts or nuts. By applying them, nuts may
become over-tightened and cause damage to the bolts. Wheel nuts or bolts
may loosen, causing the wheels to fall off and cause serious accidents. If oil or
grease is found on any bolt or nut, clean it off.
CAUTION
• Change wheels only when the tire is clear of the ground. Otherwise, the wheel
will be installed improperly and the operation of the vehicle will be affected
adversely.
• Remove mud and rust from the hub fitting surface or wheel-to-wheel mating
surfaces. Otherwise, the wheel might become loose while driving.
Cracks around 1. Check the disc wheel for the following:

decorative hole Cracks in weld • Cracks or other damage around the
(Steel wheel only)
bolt holes and decorative holes
• Cracks or other damage or wear
on the wheel nut seating surfaces
(tapered surfaces)
• Cracks or other damage on welds
(steel wheel only)
Crack on
Wear in wheel • Wear or other damage on the hub
nut seating
wheel nut surface
fitting surface or wheel-to-wheel
seating surface mating surface
Wear in hub
fitting surface
If you find anything abnormal with disc
(or wheel wheels when you check them, avoid driving
mating surface)
the vehicle and contact the nearest Isuzu
Dealer.

2. Check the wheel bolts and wheel nuts

for the following:
• Cracks or other damage
• Bolt elongation or excessive rust
• Crushed, thinned or seized threads
If you find anything abnormal with wheel
bolts or wheel nuts when you check them,
avoid driving the vehicle and contact the
CAUTION
• Remove rust and dirt from a wheel
bolt and nut, and turn the nut on
the bolt. If the nut does not turn
smoothly, the threads are defective.
• If the threads are defective, replace
both wheel bolt and wheel nut as a
set.
• If any wheel bolt is broken, change
all the wheel bolts and wheel nuts
on the wheel.
3. Remove rust, dust and mud from the

fitting surface, hub fitting surface or
wheel-to-wheel mating surfaces, and
wheel nut seating surfaces (tapered
surfaces) of the disc wheel, and from
the threads of the wheel bolts and
nuts.
CAUTION
• Clean the disc wheel to remove dirt
and rust from its fitting surfaces,
hub fitting surface or wheel-to-
wheel mating surface. Also clean
the tapered portion of each nut. If
you fasten the wheel nuts without
removing dirt and rust, the wheel
nuts would later loosen and the
wheel might be detached from the
vehicle while driving. This could be
very dangerous.

4. Install the wheel while aligning the
bolt holes in the disc wheel with the
wheel bolts.
5. Screw in each wheel nut by hand until

it touches the nut seating surface on
the disc wheel, and then finger tighten
all wheel nuts until the wheel is held
in position without any looseness.
Face the tapered end of wheel nuts
inward.
6. Turn the bleeder screw of the jack
counterclockwise to lower the vehicle
slowly.
7. Tighten the wheel nuts in a diagonal

3 sequence and in two or three passes.
1
5 CAUTION
6
• Some impact wrenches available in
2
4 the market produce torques higher
than the maximum torque specified
for tightening the wheel nuts. If
the wheel nuts are tightened with
such an impact wrench, wheel bolts
might be broken. Before using
an impact wrench, check that the
torque it produces conforms to the
specification.
• When using an impact wrench,
carefully adjust the air pressure
regulator and select the tightening
time. As a final step, tighten to the
specified torque using a torque
wrench.

8. Finally, tighten all wheel nuts using a

torque wrench to the specified torque.
Tightening torque
120 N·m (12 kgf·m/87 lb·ft)
9. For aluminum wheel models, install

the wheel cover by tapping the wheel
cover into place with your hand. If
your vehicle has 255/65R17 size tires,
align the wheel cover groove and the
air valve when installing the wheel
cover.
WARNING
• Do not attach plastic wheel
ornaments that are heavily damaged.
These may fly off from the wheels
Wheel cover groove
of your vehicle and cause accidents
when the vehicle is driven.
• Make sure to secure all tools, jacks
and flat tires into their storage
locations before driving in order to
reduce the possibilities of personal
injury due to a collision or sudden
braking.
Air valve
ADVICE
• After changing a tire, turn the steering wheel in both directions to make sure
that the wheels do not interfere with the surrounding components. If you are
unclear about any of this, please contact the nearest Isuzu Dealer.
• The tightening torque of the wheel nuts may decrease after tire replacement
due to their initial settlement. Upon driving 50 to 100 km (31 to 62 miles) after
a tire change, retighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque according to the
instructions in the "Retightening Wheel Nuts" section in this chapter.


Check the wheel nuts to make sure they are tightened to the specific torque by using a
torque wrench.
Use the following methods to check loose wheel nuts. The tightening torque of the
wheel nuts may decrease after a tire change or rotation due to their initial settlement.
After driving 50 to 100 km (31 to 62 miles), be sure to retighten the wheel nuts to the
specified torque.
Tightening torque
120 N·m (12 kgf·m/87 lb·ft)
Turn the wheel nuts in the tightening

3 direction to the specified torque.
1
5
6
2
4
WARNING
• If you find any abnormal conditions with the wheel nuts such as frequent
loosening of retightened nuts, have your vehicle checked or serviced at the
nearest Isuzu Dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION
• Fully engage the wheel wrench on a wheel nut in order to tighten the nut to the
specified torque. However, do not use a pipe as a handle extension or your foot
to apply force on the wrench. This would tighten the nut more than required and
might damage components.
• Both under-tightening and over-tightening of wheel nuts may cause broken
wheel bolts or cracked disc wheels and could lead to wheel detachment. Adhere
to the specified tightening torques.
• When replacing a tire with a new one, use only a tire of the same type and size
as the replaced tire; otherwise, driving safety could be affected. Avoid mixed
use of different types or different size tires at all costs.

Clutch (Manual Transmission Model)
Clutch Fluid
The tank of the clutch fluid is common with a tank of the brake fluid.
WARNING
• If the clutch fluid gets in your eyes, rinse it off immediately with a large amount
of water for 15 minutes or longer. Also, if still abnormality such as irritation is felt,
CAUTION
• Before refilling the tank, clean the area around the cap and fill clutch fluid from a
clean container. Foreign objects getting in the tank will lead to a clutch system
failure.
• Be careful not to let clutch fluid come in contact with skin. If fluid comes into
contact with skin, wash away the fluid with water.
• Clutch fluid melts paintwork and vehicle component materials such as plastic,
vinyl and rubber. It is also highly corrosive on metals. If it is spilled, immediately
wipe the area clean or wash away the fluid with water.
• If skin irritation persists, check with a doctor.
• Use only the specified clutch fluid and change it according to the Maintenance
Schedule.
• Clutch fluid readily absorbs moisture. Close the cap of the container tightly
when storing it.
• Do not mix clutch fluid with fluids of a non-specified brand. Due to chemical
reactions, any mixture of differently branded fluids will cause failure of the clutch
system.
• If clutch fluid decreases too rapidly, there might be a problem in the clutch
system or the brake system, or the brake pads or shoe linings may have worn
out. Have your vehicle inspected by the nearest Isuzu Dealer immediately.

Checking the Clutch-Fluid Level
"MAX" line Clutch fluid compartment Confirm that the fluid level in the reserve
tank is between the "MAX" and "MIN" lines.
Be sure to use the clutch fluid compartment
section when checking the "MIN" line
section of the clutch fluid level. The clutch
fluid level cannot be accurately checked
if the clutch fluid level is checked with
a method other than the clutch fluid
compartment section.
"MIN" line If the fluid surface cannot easily be seen,
rock the vehicle gently.
Adding Clutch Fluid

If the level of clutch fluid has dropped below the "MIN" line, remove the clutch fluid tank
cap and add fluid. Add the specified clutch fluid up to the "MAX" line.
Changing Clutch Fluid

Change the clutch fluid according to the Maintenance Schedule using the specified
fluid. Since a clutch fluid change requires disassembly of the related components, have
this service performed by your Isuzu Dealer.
Automatic Transmission Fluid

(Automatic Transmission Model)
Have inspection and replacement of the automatic transmission fluid performed at an
Isuzu Dealer.

Steering Wheel
Checking the Steering Wheel

While the engine is idling, place the
steering wheel in the straight forward
position, then gently turn it to the left and
right by hand, and check the play in the
steering wheel as the peripheral distance
to the point where the tires start moving.
Standard value
(at the periphery of the steering wheel)
10 - 30 mm (0.39 - 1.18 in)
Grasp the steering wheel with both hands,

and move it in the axial direction and also
up and down, and left and right to see if
there is any looseness.
Also, drive the vehicle and check for
abnormal shaking of the steering wheel,
steering pull, sluggish steering, or inability
to return to the straight forward position.
CAUTION
• If the steering parts have excess
play or looseness or if any abnormal
condition is noted, have the steering
system checked at the nearest
Isuzu Dealer immediately.

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluid level must be checked and it must be changed according to
the Maintenance Schedule.
Have replacement of the power steering fluid performed at an Isuzu Dealer.
Checking the Power Steering Fluid Level

The reserve tank is located at the front of
the engine compartment on the left. The
"MAX" line
fluid level is correct if it is between the
"MIN" line "MAX" and "MIN" lines on the reserve tank.
If the level is lower than the "MIN" line, add
power steering fluid up to the "MAX" line.
Furthermore, perform an inspection for
power steering fluid leaks.
Adding Power Steering Fluid
CAUTION
• Before adding fluid, clean the area around the cap and pour fluid from a clean
jug or filler. Foreign matter getting in the tank will cause power steering system
failure.
• Do not mix the recommended power steering fluid with fluids of other brands.
Due to chemical reactions, any mixture of differently branded fluids will cause
failure of the system.
Remove the reserve tank cap, and add power steering fluid up to the "MAX" line.


OTHER SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
● Windshield Washer Fluid 6-82

● Windshield Wiper Blades 6-83
● Headlights and Turn Signal Lights 6-86
● Handling the Battery 6-87
● Refrigerant 6-96

Windshield Wiper/Washer
Check the level of fluid in the windshield washer tank. In addition, spray windshield
washer fluid and operate the windshield wipers to check for any areas not properly
wiped. At this time, also check the windshield washer's spraying condition.
Refilling Windshield Washer Fluid

Windshield 1. The windshield washer tank is located
washer tank at the rear of the engine compartment
on the left.
2. Open the cap and fill the tank with
windshield washer fluid to the
opening.
ADVICE
• Upon factory shipment, new vehicles contain only tap water in the washer fluid
tank. Adjust the concentration of the fluid to suit your own usage.
• Follow the instructions provided with the windshield washer fluid regarding the
ratio for mixing with tap water.
• Poor quality products, engine coolant, and soapy water must not be used.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in nozzle blockage or damage to
painted surfaces.
• The washer should never be used while the tank is empty. Operating the
washer with the tank empty can result in motor damage.

Windshield Wiper Blades

Daily Checks
Spray windshield washer fluid and then operate the windshield wipers to check for any
poorly wiped areas. In addition, confirm that each of the "MIST", " (intermittent)",
"LO", and "HI" functions operate normally.
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement

Removal
Wiper blade 1. Pull the wiper arm up to the vertical
position.
2. While pressing the wiper blade hook
towards the arm, slide the blade
1 downwards (towards the base of the
arm).
2-1
2-2
Wiper arm
3-2
3. With the blade and arm almost
3-1
perpendicular, remove the blade from
the arm.

Installation
1. Insert the blade while holding it almost
perpendicular to the arm.
2. Then, with the blade and arm oriented

in the same direction, push up the
blade until it locks into place on the
arm.
ADVICE
• Do not lower the wiper arm with its
Push up the blade. blade removed; the windshield glass
may be scratched.
• Whenever a wiper blade has been
attached, ensure that it is locked
into place. Failure to observe this
precaution can result in the wiper
blade becoming dislocated when
the windshield wiper switch is turned
on.

Replacement of Wiper Rubber Insert
Removal
Pull 1. Remove the wiper blade from the
wiper arm.
2. Pull the wiper rubber insert in the
direction indicated by the arrow and
extract it from the wiper blade.
Installation
Insert 1. Insert a new wiper rubber insert into
the wiper blade.
2. Continue pushing in the wiper rubber

insert until the wiper blade's hook
engages with the hole in it, and
then confirm that the rubber insert is
securely held in place.
3. Attach the wiper blade to the wiper
arm.

Headlights and Turn Signal Lights

Turn the starter switch to the "ON" position, and then check the way in which the
headlights, turn signal lights, and other exterior lights come on and flash.
In addition, depress the brake pedal to confirm whether the stop lights come on, and
shift the transmission to "R" position to confirm whether the back up lights come on.
Also examine the lights for discoloration, damage, and looseness.
Front Rear
High mounted stop light
Taillight and
stop light
Rear turn
signal light
Back up light/
Turn signal light
Headlight/ rear fog light License plate light
clearance light (model with step bumper)
Front fog light,
Daytime running
light
Turn signal light
(front door mounted type)
Turn signal light

(outside rearview mirror mounted type)
License plate light
(model without step bumper)
RTU
Rear (Horizontal type)
Taillight and stop light

Rear turn signal light
Back up light
Rear fog light
License plate light

DANGER
• Usage or charging of the battery when the battery fluid is below the lower level
line can accelerate deterioration and give rise to dangerous situations such as
the generation of heat and even explosion.
• If battery fluid should come in contact with an eye, immediately wash it out using
a large amount of water and continue washing for at least 5 minutes. Following
this, contact a doctor for a medical examination. If fluid adheres to any part of
the body, wash it off using a large amount of water and contact a doctor for a
medical examination.
• When using tools or other metal objects in the vicinity of the battery, take care to
prevent them from coming into contact with the positive terminal. As the vehicle
itself will conduct electricity, any such contact can result in a short-circuit and a
highly dangerous electric shock.
• A vehicle battery generates extremely flammable hydrogen gas. For this reason,
operations producing sparks or requiring the usage of an open flame must never
be carried out near a vehicle battery. Failure to observe this precaution can
result in explosion if the hydrogen gas ignites. Whenever wiping up battery fluid,
a damp cloth should be used.
WARNING
• Always stop the engine whenever the battery is to be inspected.
• Dilute sulfuric acid is used as the battery fluid. Wear protective goggles when
handling the battery. Special care must be taken to ensure that this fluid does
not come into contact with skin, clothing, or the vehicle body.
• Battery fluid should never be filled beyond the upper level line. Failure to
observe this precaution can result in battery fluid spillage and corrosion of
battery terminals and other components. Any spilled battery fluid should be
immediately washed away with water.
• Do not allow your face or head to come close to the battery except when
absolutely necessary.
• When disconnecting cables, turn the starter switch to the "LOCK" position, wait
at least 1 minute, and then disconnect the cables starting with the negative
cable from the terminals. If the negative cable is disconnected within 1 minute,
the engine control module may malfunction. When reconnecting them, the
negative cable should be reconnected last.
• Be careful not to inhale the hydrogen gas that emits from the battery.
WARNING (Continued)

WARNING (Continued)
• Recharge the battery in a well-ventilated area. Do not recharge the battery in an
enclosed room, etc.
• Wash your hands after handling battery posts, terminals and related
accessories.
• Be sure to keep the battery away from children.
ADVICE
• Whenever battery fluid has been added, the battery should be recharged (by
driving the vehicle). In winter months in particular, battery fluid can freeze and
damage the battery case if you fail to recharge the battery.
• If the battery fluid level continues to drop at an unusually fast rate, have an
inspection carried out immediately by the nearest Isuzu Dealer.
Battery Handling Precautions

Keep the battery clean. If the battery is left in a dirty condition, contaminants can get
mixed into the battery fluid, the battery plates can be damaged, short circuits can occur
on the top surface of the battery and the battery's service life can be reduced.
When Performing Inspection or

Maintenance
Before starting inspection and maintenance
of the battery or other parts of the electrical
system, turn the starter switch to the
"LOCK" position, wait at least 1 minute,
and then disconnect the negative cable
from the negative terminal. If the negative
cable is disconnected within 1 minute, the
engine control module may malfunction.
There is a danger that electrical
components could be damaged if
inspection or maintenance is carried out if
the battery remains connected.

Battery Installation Position
Second battery
First battery
Depending on the vehicle model, there
(If equipped) may be one battery (first battery) or two
batteries (first and second battery).
Removing the Battery

When the battery is to be removed, turn the starter switch to the "LOCK" position, wait
at least 1 minute, and then disconnect the cables starting with the negative cable from
the terminals.
WARNING
• If the battery cable remains connected to the negative terminal, any contact
made by tools and the like between the positive terminal and the vehicle body
could lead to a short-circuit and dangerous electrical shocks. The electrical
system can also be damaged.
• Do not tilt the battery.
CAUTION
• If the negative cable is disconnected from the negative terminal on the battery
within 1 minute after turning the starter switch to the "LOCK" position, the
engine control module may malfunction.

First battery 1. Turn the starter switch to the "LOCK"

position, wait at least 1 minute, and
then disconnect the negative cable
Fixing bolt from the negative terminal.
Holder 2. Disconnect the positive cable from the
positive terminal.
Battery
cover 3. Remove the fixing bolts and holder
Battery that secure the battery in place.
4. Remove the battery cover.
WARNING
• If the battery is removed together
with the battery cover, the battery
may become separated from the
battery cover and fall. Be sure to
remove the battery cover alone first,
then remove the battery.
Battery tray
5. Remove the battery.
Second battery
FRONT
Fixing bolt
Holder
FRONT
Battery Battery
cover
Battery
tray

Charging the Battery
Battery cable 1. Before charging the battery, remove
Battery cap
it from the vehicle to a location with
good ventilation and take off the
battery caps. If, on the other hand,
the battery is to be charged while
still on the vehicle, be sure to first
disconnect the battery cables.
2. Whenever a charger is being
connected to or disconnected from a
battery, ensure that it is turned off.
3. Battery cables must always be
disconnected when performing quick
charging.
Failure to observe this precaution can
result in generator burnout.
DANGER
• Do not use open flames in the vicinity of the battery when it is being charged.
Hydrogen gas is generated by the battery during the charging process;
accordingly, failure to observe this precaution can result in fire or explosion.
Installing the Battery

When connecting the battery cables, start with the positive terminal and then connect
the negative terminal.
CAUTION
• Take care to avoid mixing up the positive and negative terminals when
connecting battery cables. Incorrect connection to these terminals can result in
flow of excessive current and burnout of the generator or vehicle wiring.
• After installing a new battery, the battery cover must be installed in its original
position before the cables are connected.
ADVICE
• When installing the battery in your vehicle, ensure that it is oriented correctly
and securely fastened without any looseness. If the battery is not installed
correctly, the battery case and battery plates can be damaged as a result of
vibrations during driving.

NOTE
• In models with a keyless entry system (radio remote control units for door-
lock), the map light and dome light may not illuminate if the battery terminal is
connected with the door open. If this occurs, the lights can be illuminated by
closing the doors once or turning the starter switch to "LOCK" position form the
"ACC" or "ON" position.
• The electronic stability control (ESC) warning light may turn on when the battery
cables are disconnected or the battery voltage is low. The ESC function turns
off while the ESC warning light is on, but the ESC warning light will turn off by
driving the vehicle normally for a while, then the ESC function will resume. If the
ESC warning light remains on even after driving for a while, contact the nearest
Isuzu Dealer.

First battery 1. Install the battery tray.
2. Install the battery. Ensure that the
battery is oriented correctly and
Fixing bolt placed so as to be seated correctly
Holder without any looseness.
Battery
cover WARNING
Battery
• Do not install the battery together
with the battery cover. If the battery
is installed together with the battery
cover, the battery may become
separated from the battery cover and
fall.
3. Install the battery cover. Push the

battery cover down until it touches the
battery tray.
Battery tray
4. Install the holder and fixing bolts.
5. Connect the positive cable to the
Second battery
positive terminal.
6. Connect the negative cable to the
FRONT negative terminal.
Fixing bolt
Holder
FRONT
Battery Battery
cover
Battery
tray
Using the Battery as a Direct Power Source

The battery should not be used as a direct source of 12 V power.
If your battery must be used as a direct power source, please consult with your Isuzu
Dealer.

Checking the Battery Fluid Level

Daily Check
Upper level line Confirm whether the level of fluid inside the
Lower level line battery case is within the specified range.
The surface of the battery fluid should be
between the upper level and lower level
lines. If the surface of the fluid cannot
easily be seen, rock the vehicle gently.
Filling Battery Fluid

If the battery fluid level is below the lower
level line, remove the cap and add distilled
water up to the upper level line. After
refilling, firmly attach the cap.
WARNING
• Battery fluid should never be filled beyond the upper level line. Failure to
observe this precaution can result in battery fluid spillage and corrosion of
battery terminals and other components. Any spilled battery fluid should be
immediately washed away with water.
ADVICE
• Whenever battery fluid has been added, the battery should be recharged (by
driving the vehicle). In winter months in particular, battery fluid can freeze and
damage the battery case if you fail to recharge the battery.
• If the battery fluid level continues to drop at an unusually fast rate, have an
inspection carried out immediately by the nearest Isuzu Dealer.

Checking the Specific Gravity of Battery Fluid
1. Check the specific gravity of the
battery fluid using a hydrometer. If
the specific gravity is too low, the
Hydrometer
battery should be charged.
Specific gravity at a fluid temperature of

20°C (68°F)
1.27 - 1.29
Checking the Battery Terminals

1. Check the terminals for looseness,
cracks and corrosion. If there are
cracks at the terminal, have inspection
and replacement performed at an
Isuzu Dealer.
2. If a terminal is found to be corroded
and coated in white powder, wash
this away with warm water and then
wipe fully dry. Excessively corroded
terminals should be polished using a
wire brush or sandpaper.
3. When you have finished cleaning the
terminals, apply a thin layer of grease
and securely connect the battery
cables, taking care to ensure that they
are tight.
See "When the Battery Goes Flat"
regarding steps to be taken should
the battery be completely discharged.

Refrigerant
The air conditioning system will not be able to cool the cab interior effectively if the
refrigerant level is low. Accordingly, the refrigerant level must be topped up whenever
necessary.
Please contact your Isuzu Dealer whenever refrigerant must be added.
ADVICE
• Operating the air conditioning while the refrigerant level is too low leads not only
to poor cooling performance but also to air conditioning system damage.
• This vehicle uses the new refrigerant HFC134a (R134a) in the air conditioning
system. No other type of refrigerant can be used. In order to protect the
environment, care must be taken to ensure that refrigerant gas is never
released into open air. When refrigerant must be replaced, therefore, please
contact your Isuzu Dealer or other service facility equipped with a gas recovery
installation system.

INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR MAINTENANCE
● Exterior Maintenance 6-98

● Interior Maintenance 6-101

Exterior Maintenance
Washing
If the vehicle is operated with foreign
material adhering to the exterior, this
material may react chemically with paint or
plating, resulting in staining, discoloration,
rusting or corrosion of components. Also,
the material may become trapped within
mechanical components, adversely
affecting their functions or forming an
aerodynamic resistance. In the following
cases, therefore, the vehicle must be
washed and all foreign matter removed.
• When soot, iron powder, dead bugs,
bird droppings, pollen, tree sap or oily
matter from coal tar and smoke has
adhered to painted surfaces.
• When the vehicle has been driven in
coastal areas.
• When the vehicle has been driven
on roads where road chemicals have
been applied.
• When a large amount of mud or dirt
has adhered to the exterior.
1. Fully turn on the tap, and wash out
the undercarriage and suspension.
2. Close all openings and wash the cab
and cargo body panels using a neutral
detergent.
3. Clean wheels and tires using a brush
and detergent.
4. After washing away all remaining
detergent, use a shammy or other
clean cloth to fully remove all moisture
and water droplets.

WARNING
• When cleaning the bottom of the vehicle or chassis, be careful so as to prevent
burns and injuries. The area around the engine and exhaust pipe are extremely
hot immediately after vehicle operation, so wait until the vehicle has cooled
down before cleaning. Otherwise, you could be burned.
CAUTION
• Do not apply water directly in order to clean the cab interior. Failure to observe
this precaution can result in malfunction or breakdown of electronic control units
and electrical components, or in rusting of the cab floor.
• Do not apply water from a high-pressure washer nozzle directly to the electric
connectors. Failure to observe this precaution can lead to faulty operation of
the electrical system.
ADVICE
• Do not use solvents, gasoline, kerosene, benzine, or thinner, etc., to clean the
vehicle exterior.
• If an automatic car wash is used with vehicles having dark or metallic coating,
the painted surfaces can be damaged by the brushes, lose their luster or be
very noticeably scratched.
• Do not direct a large amount of water at the air inlet openings.
• Do not apply water to the engine compartment or at electrical components.
Failure to observe this precaution can lead to a poorly starting and operating
engine and problems in the electrical system.
• Ensure that mirrors and the antenna are retracted before washing the vehicle.
• If an automatic car wash must be used, avoid a high-temperature, high-pressure
type machine. Failure to observe this precaution can lead to heat deformation
and breakage of plastic components, or to water leaks into the cab.
• When using an automatic car wash, ensure that a distance of at least 0.4 m
(15.75 in) is maintained between the nozzle and the vehicle, and when washing
door windows, that the spray is perpendicular to the surface of the glass.
• Ensure that all detergent is fully washed and wiped away. Particularly in the
case of strong alkaline detergents (typically those for industrial uses), there is a
danger that hairline cracks can develop in lighting-cluster lenses if the vehicle is
operated without detergent being fully wiped away. Always read the detergent
manufacturer's instructions carefully before use.
ADVICE (Continued)

ADVICE (Continued)
• Airborne dirt that adheres to plastic front bumpers as a result of rain, for
example, can be difficult to remove.
In such a case, use a commercially-available cleaner to clean away the dirt, and
then apply a wax for use with plastic components.
Vehicle Storage
In order to maintain your vehicle's attractive appearance as long as possible, special
consideration must be given to its storage location.
If the vehicle is stored or kept for an extended period of time in any of the following
locations, a chemical change may occur in the paintwork, resulting in staining,
discoloration, rusting, and corrosion of components.
• Locations where a large amount of oily matter, soot, heavy smoke or metal
powder can adhere to the vehicle.
• Areas around pharmaceutical plants and other facilities that discharge chemical
matter.
• Coastal areas
• Locations where a large amount of dead bugs, bird droppings or tree sap can
adhere to the vehicle.
Waxing
Painted and chrome-plated surfaces should be waxed once or twice a month, or
whenever water is being poorly repelled on the surfaces. Ensure that wax is not
applied in direct sunlight, and that the temperature of the painted surface is no more
than 40°C (104°F).
Always follow the instructions provided with your wax product.
CAUTION
• Wax must not be applied to the windshield. Failure to observe this precaution
can result in irregular reflection of light, impairing your view.
ADVICE
• Do not use wax containing abrasive material. Failure to observe this precaution
can lead to scratching of painted surfaces or plastic components.
• The application of wax to rubber component surfaces can result in permanent
whitening.

Windshield Care
If not fully cleaned by the windshield
wipers, the windshield should be cleaned
using Isuzu genuine glass cleaner.
Interior Maintenance
Remove dust and dirt from the interior of the cab using an automotive cleaner or
vacuum cleaner, and gently wipe surfaces clean using a cloth wet with warm or cold
water.
WARNING
• When cleaning the interior of the cab, water should never be sprayed directly.
Failure to observe this precaution can lead to vehicle malfunction and possibly
to fire if water should enter the audio system or other electrical components
located underneath the floor carpet.
• Do not use organic solvents such as petroleum ether and gasoline or abrasive
cleaners to clean the seat belts.
In addition, seat belt webbing should be neither bleached nor redyed. Failure
to observe these precautions can lead to the performance or strength of the
seat belts being impaired. In the case of a collision, therefore, the belts could be
insufficiently effective, and serious life-threatening injuries could result. When
cleaning, use warm water in which a small amount of neutral detergent has been
dissolved to gently wipe the seat belts.
• Keep the seat belts in a clean, dry condition.

CAUTION
• Do not use organic solvents such as mineral oil, benzine, thinner, or gasoline,
nor acid or alkaline solvents or fatty acid ester. Failure to observe this
precaution can result in discoloration, staining, or damage. It should be noted
that certain types of cleaning products contain these compounds. Be sure to
read cleaning product labels carefully.
• Do not let perfume, cosmetics or air fresheners (liquid, solid, gel or plate types)
direct come into contact with or spill onto interior components such as the air
conditioning or audio system. Compounds contained in these products can
cause discoloration, staining, peeling of paint, or damage.
• Glass cleaners that contain these compounds must not be used to clean the
inside of the windshield or window glass. To clean the glass, wipe using a cloth
wet with warm or cold water.
• For models with a rear defogger, when cleaning the interior of the backlight
glass, lightly wipe along the defogger wires using a wet cloth to avoid
disconnecting the rear defogger. Use of glass cleaner, etc. may cause the
defogger to become inoperative.
ADVICE
• Do not apply a silicon-based spray to electrical components such as the audio
system or switches. It may cause faults with the points of contact.

Seat Belt Care
A dirty seat belt can develop retracting problems, and for this reason, regular inspection
and upkeep are required.
CAUTION
• Seat belt webbing can lose its strength when bleached or redyed, or when
cleaned using gasoline, paint thinners or other volatile substances.
• Do not disassemble the seat belt mechanism in order to remove any foreign
material or objects that may have entered the buckle. Instead, arrange for
inspection and maintenance to be carried out by your Isuzu Dealer.
Cleaning a Seat Belt's Fold-back

Seat belt's
Fitting Portion
fold-back 1. Fold a piece of cotton cloth, absorbent
fitting portion
gauze, or the like of approximately 50
Seat belt
mm (2 in) in width into a rectangle.
2. Mix one part neutral detergent into
approximately twenty parts warm
water.
3. Wet the cloth in the detergent mixture,
pass it through the fold-back fitting
portion of the belt, and slide it back
and forth and laterally until dirt can no
longer be seen.
4. Remove the cloth, remove moisture
Cloth from the fitting portion of the belt
using a dry cloth, and then allow it to
dry naturally out of direct sunlight.
5. Check to be sure the seat belt retracts
and pulls out correctly.
ADVICE
• Avoid using anything like a tool to
pass the cloth through the fold-
back fitting portion or try to remove
stubborn dirt. Using such an object
can result in plastic parts or seat
belt webbing damage.

Cleaning a Belt Webbing

Brush 1. Fully extract the belt and examine for
any difference in color between the
front and back surfaces.
2. Mix one part neutral detergent into
approximately twenty parts warm
water.
3. Wet a nail brush or another similar
brush having soft bristles (of nylon or
the like) in warm water, and use this
to clean away dirt.
Seat belt 4. Wipe the seat belt dry using a dry
cloth, and then allow it to dry naturally
out of direct sunlight.
Clearance 5. Check to be sure the seat belt retracts
and pulls out correctly.
Clearance
ADVICE
• If the above-described upkeep
operations do not improve the
operation of the seat belt through
the retractor, there is a possibility
that the belt is making contact
with the door pillar trim. In this
case, arrange for inspection and
maintenance to be carried out by
your Isuzu Dealer.
• If the belt is not winding and
unwinding correctly, or if inspection
reveals problems such as
loose mountings, metal parts
deformation, webbing damage,
fraying or discoloration, arrange for
replacement to be carried out by
your Isuzu Dealer.
Fabric Seat Covering and Carpet Care

Remove dirt and dust using a home-use electric vacuum cleaner.
Do not remove the carpet. Use standard household cleaning products and methods to
remove stains from food, drink and the like.
Be sure to use neutral detergents or cleaning products indicated as higher alcohol
based detergents.

MAINTENANCE DATA
● Inspection and Maintenance 6-106

Inspection and Maintenance

For safe and economic driving, be sure to have your vehicle inspected and serviced
regularly according to the schedule indicated in this chapter.
To drive your vehicle safely and at minimum cost, it is essential to have your vehicle
regularly inspected and serviced at your Isuzu Dealer as per the specified maintenance
schedule.
Contact your Isuzu Dealer for inspection that requires disassembly and/or special
equipment.
Letters Used to Indicate Maintenance Service Types

I : Inspect then clean, repair or replace as necessary
A: Adjust
R: Replace
T: Tighten to the specified torque
L: Lubricate
ADVICE
• When inspecting the items listed below, also inspect the routine inspection
items as well.
*: Your vehicle needs to be maintained more often if it is driven in severe conditions.

Maintenance Schedule for Severe-
condition Operations

Maintenance Schedule: TFR/S 86 (4JK1-TC Hi-Power)
I : Inspect then clean, repair or replace as necessary A: Adjust R: Replace
T: Tighten to the specified torque L: Lubricate
Service Service interval (Odometer reading or months, Reference

Service item
content whichever comes first) page
* Engine oil R Every 20,000 km (12,000 miles) or 24 months 6-20
* Engine oil filter R Every 20,000 km (12,000 miles) or 24 months 6-25
Engine oil leakage and
I Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months 6-20
contamination
Engine idling speed and
acceleration
Fan belt tension and
damage
Exhaust system I Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months ―
All hoses and pipes in
engine compartment for I Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months ―
clog or damage
Valve clearance I Every 40,000 km (24,000 miles) or 48 months ―
I Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months
* Air cleaner element 6-38
R Every 40,000 km (24,000 miles) or 48 months
Replace the fuel filter when the fuel filter 4-53
Fuel filter R
warning light comes on 6-41
Replace the fuel filter when the fuel filter 4-53
Pre fuel filter R
warning light comes on 6-41
Fuel tank I Every 20,000 km (12,000 miles) or 24 months ―
Fuel hoses and pipes for
I Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months ―
clog or damage
Drain the fuel filter when the water separator warning light 4-52
Draining of water separator
comes on 6-41
Engine coolant
concentration
Every 24 months
Engine coolant R 6-30
(when Isuzu recommended coolant is used)
Cooling system for water
leakage
Clutch fluid 6-76
Clutch pedal travel and
play
* [M/T] Manual
transmission oil
* [M/T] Transfer case oil I Every 20,000 km (12,000 miles) or 24 months ―
[M/T] Manual transmission
and transfer case oil I Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months ―
leakage
* Marks: Under severe driving conditions, additional maintenance is required.
Refer to "Maintenance Schedule for Severe-condition Operations".


Service item
Gear control mechanism
for looseness
* [A/T] Automatic
transmission fluid
* [A/T] Transfer case oil I Every 20,000 km (12,000 miles) or 24 months ―
[A/T] Automatic
transmission and transfer I Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months ―
case oil leakage
Propeller shaft loose
connections
* Propeller shaft universal
joints and splines for I Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months ―
wear
[4WD] Propeller shaft
universal joints and sliding L Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months ―
sleeve
R Initial 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months
* Differential gear oil (Front
and rear)
Front and rear axle oil
leakage
Shift on the fly system gear
oil
Front axle shaft rubber
boot for damage
Axle case for distortion or
damage
Axle shafts for distortion
or damage
Power steering fluid 6-79
Power steering oil leakage I Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months 6-79
* Steering system for
looseness or damage
Power steering hose ―
Steering wheel play I Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months 6-78
Steering function I Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months ―
Right and left turning
radius
Wheel alignment I Every 20,000 km (12,000 miles) or 24 months ―
Steering joint ball for oil
leakage or damage
Steering joint ball rubber
boot for damage

Service item
Brake fluid 6-46
Brake system for fluid
leakage
Brake function I Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months ―
* Front disc brake pad and
disc wear
* Rear brake lining and
drum wear
Brake pedal travel and play I Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months 6-48
Brake pipes and hoses
for loose connections or I Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months ―
damage
Parking brake function I Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months ―
Parking brake lever travel I Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months 6-51
Parking brake cables for
looseness or damage and I Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months ―
guide for damage
Ratchet for wear or damage I Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months ―
Leaf/coil springs for
damage
Suspension mount for
looseness or damage
Shock absorbers for oil
leakage
Shock absorbers mount for
looseness
Rubber bushes of
suspension wear or I Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months ―
damage
Spring action for loss of
balance due to weakening
Suspension joint ball
rubber boot for damage
Wheel nuts T Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months 6-75
6-55
Wheel disc for damage I Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months
6-71
Front hub bearing grease R Every 30,000 km (18,000 miles) or 36 months ―
Front and rear hub bearing
for looseness
Tire air pressure and 6-52
damage 6-54
Tire rotation Rotate as required 6-57
Other bolts and nuts on
chassis and body
Air conditioning filter R Every 15,000 km (9,000 miles) or 12 months ―

Maintenance Schedule for Severe-condition Operations

Driving condition
A: Repeated short trips
B: Driving on rough roads
C: Driving on dusty roads
D: Driving in extremely cold weather and/or on salted roads
E: Towing trailer or climbing mountain frequently
F: Continuous driving in low speed and/or with a low load
G: Frequently turning the engine off during DPD regeneration
Service item Service interval Condition

Engine oil Replace every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) C, F, G, A+D
Engine oil filter Replace every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) C, F, G, A+D
Exhaust pipes and mounting Inspect every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) A, B, D
Inspect every 5,000 km (3,000 miles)
Air cleaner element C
Replace every 20,000 km (12,000 miles)
Steering system for looseness or
Inspect every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) B
damage
Inspect for wear and lubricate every 5,000
Universal joints and sleeves B, C
km (3,000 miles)
Manual transmission oil after replacing at initial 10,000 km B
(6,000 miles)
Inspection every 40,000 km (24,000 miles)
Automatic transmission fluid B, E, A+D
Transfer case oil after replacing at initial 10,000 km B
(6,000 miles)
Differential oil after replacing at initial 10,000 km B
(6,000 miles)
Front brake pad and disc wear Inspect every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) A, B, C
Rear brake lining and drum wear Inspect every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) A, B, C

Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Diesel Fuels
It is extremely important to select correct lubricants and diesel fuels so that your Isuzu
vehicle demonstrates its full performance over the years.
Top up the lubricants in accordance with the Maintenance Schedule specified for your
vehicle. Use the Isuzu genuine lubricants or those recommended in the list below.
Also, do not use additives other than those specified. The lubricant change intervals
specified in the Maintenance Schedule and the terms and conditions of the new vehicle
warranty assume the use of the Isuzu genuine or Isuzu recommended lubricants listed
below.
GRADE
LUBRICATION FOR EXAMPLE
API ACEA JASO
CI-4 E6 DH-2 BESCO CLEAN (5W-30) (ISUZU)
CJ-4 E9 BESCO CLEAN (10W-30) (ISUZU)
BESCO CLEAN SUPER (10W-40) (ISUZU)
Vanellus Max Drain Eco (10W-40) (BP)
Vanellus Multi Fleet Eco (15W-40) (BP)
Techtion Global ES (15W-40) (Castrol)
* Diesel engine crankcase (Low ash oil) Performance Harmony (15W-40) (Elf)
Delvac XHP LE (10W-40) (ExxonMobil)
Delvac MX ESP (15W-40) (ExxonMobil)
Delvac 1300 Super (15W-40) (ExxonMobil)
Rimula R6 LM (10W-40) (Shell)
Rubia TIR 7900 (15W-40) (Total)
Rubia Works 2000 (10W-40) (Total)
GL-5 ― ― Multigear S (75W-90) (Chevron/Texaco/Caltex)
Manual transmission (Model with AY6)
MT1 JWS2250C (75W-90) (ExxonMobil)
CI-4 E7 DH-1 BESCO TRANSAXLE OIL (5W-30) (ISUZU)
Delo 400 Multigrade (15W-40) (Chevron/Texaco/Caltex)
Performance Victory (15W-40) (Elf)
Transfer case
Delvac MX (15W-40) (ExxonMobil)
Rimula R4X (15W-40) (Shell)
Rubia TIR 7400 (15W-40) (Total)
Automatic transmission Mobil ATF 3309 (ExxonMobil)
GL-5 ― ― BESCO SHIFT ON THE FLY (75W-90) (ISUZU)
Front differential MT1 Multigear S (75W-90) (Chevron/Texaco/Caltex)
Mobil Delvac Synthetic Gear Oil (75W-90) (ExxonMobil)
GL-5 ― ― BESCO SHIFT ON THE FLY (75W-90) (ISUZU)
MT1 BESCO GEAR OIL SH (80W-90), (90), (140) (ISUZU)
Syntrax Universal (80W-90) (Castrol)
Thuban GL-5 EP (80W-90), (85W-140) (Chevron/Texaco/Caltex)
Gearelf 5 (80W-90), (85W-140) (Elf)
Rear differential Mobil Delvac Synthetic Gear Oil (75W-90) (ExxonMobil)
Mobilube S (80W-90) (ExxonMobil)
Spirax S2 A IZ (80W-90) (Shell)
Spirax S3 AX (80W-90) (Shell)
Transmission XPM (80W-90) (Total)
Transmission TM (80W-90), (85W-140) (Total)
*: We recommend you to use a low ash content engine oil that is suitably compatible
with the DPD.

NOTE
• The factory filled SAE 5W-30 engine oil is optimal for fuel efficiency and low
carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions, as well as for low temperature starts.
Engine Oil and Gear Oil Viscosity Charts

LUBRICATION GRADE
BESCO ATF III (ISUZU)
Power steering
DEXRON® III or equivalent
Center bearing BESCO L-2 GREASE (No.2), L-3 GREASE (No.3) (ISUZU)
Kingpins NLGI #2 or #3 multi-purpose grease
Propeller shaft sliding yoke BESCO ONE LUBER MO GREASE (No.2) (ISUZU)
Universal joint NLGI #2 multi-purpose grease containing molybdenum disulfide
COOLANT GRADE
GENERAL MOTORS ENGINEERING STANDARDS GM6277M
Engine cooling system (Ethylene glycol based non-silicate and non-borate coolant) or
equivalent.
ADVICE
• Mix the coolant and water at an appropriate concentration.

FLUID MAKE BRAND GRADE

ISUZU BESCO BRAKE FLUID DOT 3
Clutch and brake fluid AC Delco Supreme 11 (FMVSS 116 or SAE J1703)
reservoir ― ― DOT 4
(FMVSS 116 or SAE J1704)
DIESEL FUEL / APPLICABLE STANDARD (Sulfur content below 10 ppm)

Deutsche Industrie Normen (DIN) Based on EN590 : 2009
British Standards (BS) Based on EN590 : 2009
WARNING

CAUTION
• Be sure to use extra-low-sulfur diesel fuel (with sulfur content no higher than 10
ppm).
• If you supply the vehicle with poor-quality fuel, water-removal additive or other
additive, gasoline, kerosene or alcohol-based fuel, it could harm the fuel filter,
prevent proper movement of fuel-lubricated parts in the injectors and adversely
affect engine components, possibly resulting in a breakdown. If you accidentally
put the wrong fuel in the tank, drain it all out. Starting the engine with the wrong
fuel in the tank could result in a fire and engine damage.
ADVICE
• Only use fuels listed above. Do not use other fuels as they may adversely affect
the engine.
Refueling Using Fuels that Contain Biodiesel Fuel

(Fatty Acid Methyl Esters (FAME))
Models for the European Market
• You can use standard type diesel fuels that meet EN590. A standard type diesel
fuel means the fuel that contains biodiesel fuel (FAME) which meets EN14214.
• Using diesel fuels that do not meet EN590, or using fuels that contain FAME
which does not meet EN14214 may, in the worst case, cause a serious engine
failure.
• Do not leave the diesel fuel that contains FAME unused in the vehicle for a long
period of time. FAME contents may block up the fuel system, causing a serious
engine failure.
• The vehicle is covered under the vehicle warranty given if the fuel that meets
EN590 is used. However, if the vehicle is left unused for a long period of time,
the characteristics of the fuel may change, causing a vehicle failure. The vehicle
warranty is not applicable in such cases.
NOTE
• When changing from 0% FAME diesel to the fuel that contains FAME which
meets EN590, there may be a negative impact on performance when pulling
away and driving in general.

Engine Oil and Gear Oil Viscosity Charts

Select appropriate engine and gear oils in accordance with the tables below. It is also
important to select the viscosity appropriate for the temperature at which your vehicle
operates. Use the following tables for making correct selections.
ENGINE OIL VISCOSITY CHART

ENGINE OIL VISCOSITY GRADE - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
[Single grade]
SAE 40, 50
SAE 30
2
SAE 30 *
-35°C -30°C -25°C -15°C 0°C 15°C 25°C 30°C 45°C
-31°F -22°F -13°F 5°F 32°F 59°F 77°F 86°F 113°F
1
SAE 10W-30 *
1,2
SAE 10W-30 *
1
SAE 10W-40 *
SAE 15W-40
1
SAE 5W-30 *
1,2
SAE 5W-30 *
[Multi grade]
*1: At ambient temperatures below -25°C (-13°F), this can only be used when starting aids
(oil pan heater, block heater, etc.) are used.
*2: Use is possible at ambient temperatures up to 45°C (113°F) only in the case of Isuzu genuine oil.
NOTE
• In extremely low temperatures, engine starts may be difficult when SAE 10W-30
or higher viscosity grade engine oils are used. Because of this, use of SAE
5W-30 engine oil is recommended.
• Higher viscosity grade engine oils may be better for when the vehicle is driven
at high speeds or when it is under extreme load conditions.

TRANSFER OIL VISCOSITY CHART

TRANSFER OIL VISCOSITY GRADE - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
[Single grade]
SAE 40, 50
SAE 30
1
SAE 30 *
-35°C -25°C -15°C -5°C 0°C 35°C 45°C
-31°F -13°F 5°F 23°F 32°F 95°F 113°F
SAE 10W-30
1
SAE 10W-30 *
SAE 10W-40
SAE 15W-40
SAE 5W-30
1
SAE 5W-30 *
[Multi grade]
GEAR OIL(front and rear axle) VISCOSITY CHART

GEAR OIL(front and rear axle) VISCOSITY GRADE - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
[Single grade]
SAE 140
SAE 90
1
SAE 90 *
SAE 80W
SAE 75W
-35°C -25°C -10°C 0°C 15°C 30°C 35°C 45°C
-31°F -13°F 14°F 32°F 59°F 86°F 95°F 113°F
SAE 75W-90
1
SAE 75W-90 *
SAE 80W-90
1
SAE 80W-90 *
SAE 85W-140
[Multi grade]


IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 7
● Troubleshooting 7-2
● When the Vehicle Breaks Down during Driving 7-6
● When the Tire Goes Flat 7-7
● When the Engine Stops While Driving 7-18
● When the Engine Stalls and Cannot be Restarted 7-19
● When the Brakes Do not Work 7-19
● When the Battery Goes Flat 7-20
● When the Fuel Runs Out 7-22
● When the Generator Warning Light Comes On 7-24
● When the Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light Comes On 7-25
● When the Warning Light Comes On 7-25
● When the Engine Overheats 7-26
● When the Bulb Does not Come On 7-28
● Replacing the Fuses and Relays 7-43
● When Driving on Bad Roads 7-51
● Towing 7-52
4510393_sec07_IN CASE OF EMERGEN7-1 7-1 2015/01/16 9:26:28

7-2 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Troubleshooting
Performing regular inspections and maintenance prevents damage. Be sure to
perform inspections and maintenance at regular intervals. Also, quickly rectify any fault
in the vehicle (even a small fault) to prevent it from becoming more serious.
If a symptom shown in the following table occurs, perform inspections and take
corrective action in accordance with the table. If you are unable to perform a repair, the
corrective action shown in the table does not eliminate a symptom or you cannot locate
a fault, contact the nearest Isuzu Dealer.
ADVICE
• Any item for which there is a in the "Corrective action" column requires
repairs and adjustments. Contact the nearest Isuzu Dealer.
Reference
page
Flat batteries Recharge or replace 7-20
After repairing corroded
Battery terminals detached,
section, connect the 6-95
loose or corroded
terminals firmly
Starter ground wire After repairing corroded
terminal detached, loose section, connect the ―
Starter or corroded terminals firmly
doesn't
turn over, Engine oil viscosity too Change to oil with proper
6-114
or is weak high viscosity
Starter or electrical system
―
is faulty
Selector lever is not in the Place selector lever in "P"
Engine "P" or "N" position or "N" position.
doesn't 4-83
(Automatic transmission (Automatic transmission
start vehicle) vehicle)
Make sure there are no
No fuel fuel leaks, and then add ―
fuel
Air in the fuel system Bleed fuel system 7-23
Fuel filter is clogged ―
Starter
turns over Warm fuel pipe with hot
Fuel is frozen water or wait until it gets ―
warmer
Common rail system is
―
faulty
Preheating system is faulty ―

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 7-3
Reference
page
6-38
Engine starts, but Air cleaner is clogged Clean or replace element
6-40
immediately stops
Common rail system is
―
faulty
There is water or air in the Drain water from fuel filter 6-42
Unsteady engine fuel system or bleed fuel system 7-23
speed
Fuel system is faulty ―
Engine not sufficiently Allow engine to warm up
―
warmed up sufficiently
Excessive engine oil Correct oil level 6-20
White or black
6-38
exhaust smoke Air cleaner is clogged Clean or replace element
6-40
Fuel system is faulty ―
DPD is faulty ―
No or low engine coolant Add engine coolant 6-30
Front of radiator is clogged
Wash clean with tap water 6-35
with dirt
Refill the engine coolant
Radiator cap not
and make sure the radiator 6-30
sufficiently tightened
Engine is overheating cap is firmly tightened.
Adjust the tension or
Fan belt loose 6-36
replace the belt
Engine coolant dirty ―
Fan clutch is faulty ―
Radiator cap dirty or faulty ―
Improper engine oil Change to oil with proper
6-114
viscosity viscosity
Engine oil level too low Add engine oil 6-23
Oil pressure is low Engine inner components
―
are faulty
Meter, indicator/warning
―
lights or switches faulty

Reference
page
Parking brake not fully Make sure it is fully
―
released released
Brake dragging ―
Clutch slipping (Manual
―
transmission model)
6-38
Not enough engine Air cleaner is clogged Clean or replace element
6-40
power
Engine control system
―
faulty
Common rail system faulty ―
Engine faulty ―
DPD clogged ―
Drum-to-lining gap too
―
large
Brakes not effective
Air in brake fluid ―
Brake system failure ―
Unbalanced air pressure in Adjust to proper air
6-52
tires pressure
Tire unevenly worn Replace tire 6-67
Uneven braking
Unbalanced drum-to-lining
―
gap of the wheels
Poor wheel alignment ―
Loaded too far forward Load properly 2-6
Power steering fluid level
Steering wheel hard Add fluid 6-79
too low
to turn
Adjust to proper inflation
Insufficient air in front tires 6-52
pressure
Tighten to the specified
Wheel nuts loose 6-75
torque
Unbalanced inflation Adjust to proper inflation
Excessive play in the 6-52
pressure in the tires pressure
steering wheel
Unbalanced tires ―
Excessive steering wheel
―
play
Poor lubrication in the
Poor steering wheel ―
steering mechanisms
return
Poor wheel alignment ―

Reference
page
Clutch disengages Insufficient clutch fluid Add fluid 6-76
poorly (Manual Excessive clutch pedal
transmission model) ―
free play
From the Insufficient transmission oil ―
transmis- Transmission inner
sion ―
components faulty
Insufficient differential gear
―
From oil
differential Differential inner
―
components faulty
Loud or
From the
abnormal Spring pins, shackles, or
suspen- ―
noises stoppers worn
sion
From the Poor lubrication in each
―
propeller component
shaft Splines or bearings worn ―
From the Insufficient transfer oil ―
transfer Transfer inner components
case ―
faulty

When the Vehicle Breaks Down during Driving

1. Operate the hazard warning flasher
and pull the vehicle immediately over
to a safe place that doesn't impede
traffic (shoulder, verge). Place the
triangle reflectors to alert other traffic
to the presence of your vehicle.
2. Have the other passengers get out
and wait in a safe place.
3. Walk to a safe place and take
appropriate measures by using the
closest telephone, etc.
WARNING
[If there is a fuel leak]
• Leaking fuel from the vehicle is dangerous due to possible combustion or
explosion. Stop the engine immediately.

When the Tire Goes Flat

When the tire gets flat while driving, avoid
hard braking, hold on to the steering wheel
firmly and stop the vehicle.
If a spare tire is equipped, change the
tire. If the emergency flat tire repair kit is
equipped, perform the repair using the
emergency flat tire repair kit.
Perform changing and repair of a tire using
the emergency flat tire repair kit on a flat
space to prevent obstructing other vehicles
or pedestrians.
WARNING
• If you continue to drive on a flat tire,
undue force will be applied to the
wheel bolts, possibly causing the
bolts to break and the wheel to come
off.

Spare Tire → Refer to page 6-58

How to Use the Emergency Flat Tire Repair Kit

(4WD Crew Cab Model)
WARNING
• The sealant is toxic. Avoid swallowing. If you mistakenly swallow any of the
sealant, drink as much water as you can and get medical attention immediately.
• Make sure to use and store the sealant out of the reach of children.
• If the sealant gets in your eyes, rinse it out immediately with a large amount
of water for 15 minutes or longer. If you continue to feel irritation or other
abnormality, seek medical attention.
• If the sealant gets on your skin, rinse it off using soap with a large amount of
water. If any abnormality occurs, seek medical attention.
• When performing emergency repairs, stop the vehicle in a safe and level
location.
• If the valve insert remover is used while air remains in the tire, the valve insert
may fly out.
• If the sealant bottle is shaken while the filler hose is attached, the sealant may
fly out.
• When performing emergency repairs, connect the filler hose firmly to the tire
valve.
• When filling with sealant, be sure to connect the filler hose firmly to the tire valve
to prevent the sealant from leaking.
• When the air compressor is running, heat is generated in parts and the air
compressor becomes hot. Handle with care during and after use.
• After filling with sealant, drive the vehicle slowly and carefully. Be especially
careful on curves and turns.

CAUTION
• The emergency flat tire repair kit cannot be used in the following cases. Contact
an Isuzu Dealer or roadside assistance service.
- If there are cuts larger than approximately 4 mm piercing the tire tread.
- If there are cuts on the sidewall of the tire.
- If the tire pressure is remarkably low and the tire is damaged by driving at a
reduced tire pressure.
- If the tire bead is completely unseated outside of the rim.
- If the rim is damaged.
• Small punctures in the tire tread caused by a nail or screw can be sealed with
the emergency flat tire repair kit.
• Do not remove nails or screws from the tire.
ADVICE
• Do not continue driving with a punctured tire, even for a short distance, as the
tire and/or wheel may become damaged beyond repair.
• If a nail or screw becomes stuck in the tire tread, perform emergency repair
without removing the nail or screw. If you remove the nail or screw first, you
may be unable to perform emergency repair using the Emergency Flat Tire
Repair Kit.
• Do not place the valve insert on dirty ground.
• Do not remove the inner lid of the sealant bottle.
• Turn the valve insert remover with your hand. Using tools to turn the valve insert
remover may cause damage.
• Do not use the air compressor continuously for more than 10 minutes, as the
motor may overheat and become damaged.
• The air compressor is not water-resistant. When using in rainy conditions,
protect the air compressor from water droplets.
• The air compressor uses DC 12 V power only. Do not use other voltages.
• Do not expose the air compressor to impact, as this may cause failure. Do not
disassemble or modify the air compressor.
• Do not lubricate the air compressor. Applying lubrication oil to the air
compressor may cause failure.
• Blowing dusty air into the air compressor may cause failure. Do not use the air
compressor on sandy locations such as on sand, etc.
• If the air compressor becomes sluggish or excessively hot while running, it is
overheating. If this occurs, switch it off and leave it for 30 minutes or more.

NOTE
• One sealant bottle is only sufficient to perform emergency repair of one tire.
• If sealant adheres to clothing, it may be impossible to remove.
• The sealant is usable within an ambient temperature range of -30°C to 60°C
(-22°F to 140°F).
• In low ambient temperatures, the sealant becomes viscous and difficult to
pour. In such cases, leave the sealant inside the vehicle to warm up and make
pouring easier.
• The expiration date of the sealant is 4 years after the date of manufacture. (The
expiration date is indicated on the container.)
• Replace the sealant with new sealant before the expiration date. Request
replacement from your Isuzu Dealer.
• Consult your Isuzu Dealer when purchasing sealant.
• The air compressor makes a loud noise when running. This does not indicate a
failure.
• Do not use the air compressor for any purpose other than filling automobile tires
with air.
• Use a soft cloth to wipe off any sealant adhering to the wheel. The wheel can
be used after the sealant is wiped off.

Storage Location
Hook The emergency flat tire repair kit are
positioned under the right rear seat. Pull
the strap forward to raise the seat cushion.
Seat cushion Remove the hook of the strap edge from
the strap button and secure the hook to the
headrest stay.
Button
WARNING
Hook storage
pocket • When raising the seat cushion, the
storage position.
Strap • When returning the seat cushion to

• After returning the seat cushion to
Emergency flat tire repair kit return the hook to the hook storage
(4WD models)
pocket.
original position.

Loosen the jack release knob to remove

the jack. Slide the cover of the emergency
flat tire repair kit sideways, then pull out the
WARNING
• Do not remove the cover except to
repair a puncture.
• If the cover is lost or damaged,
obtain or replace the cover. For
obtaining or replacing the cover,
consult your Isuzu Dealer. Do not
use a damaged cover or operate
without a cover, as the sealant bottle
may become damaged and leak
sealant.
Kit contents
Air compressor Sealant bottle Filler horse
Valve insert(spare)
Speed restriction label Extension hose

Valve insert remover (for draining sealant)

Repair
1. Take out the sealant bottle and air
compressor. Shake the sealant bottle
well.
Filler hose 2. Remove the cap of the sealant bottle,

and screw the supplied filler hose onto
Sealant bottle the sealant bottle, thereby piercing
Plug the inner cap of the sealant bottle.
NOTE
Cap • Shake the sealant bottle well before
screwing the filler hose onto the
sealant bottle.
• Screw the filler hose without
removing the inner cap of the
sealant bottle.
3. Unscrew the valve cap from the tire

Valve insert remover
valve. Remove the valve insert by
using the valve insert remover that
Valve cap is supplied. Put the valve insert in a
clean place for reuse.
Valve insert WARNING

Tire valve
• If air remains in the tire, the valve
insert could shoot out. Be careful
when removing the valve insert.
4. Remove the plug from the filler hose.

Insert the filler hose into the tire valve.
Tire valve

5. Hold the sealant bottle with the

bottom upward and pump the sealant
bottle to fill the entire contents of the
sealant bottle into the tire. After filling
the entire contents of the sealant
bottle into the tire, pull off the filler
hose. Firmly screw the valve insert
into the tire valve.
Tire valve If the valve insert is dirty or lost, use
the spare valve insert that is supplied.
Power plug
Air hose
Tire valve
Air compressor
6. Screw the air hose of the air

compressor into the tire valve to
connect them. Install the power plug
to an accessory power outlet. Turn the
starter switch to the "ACC" position
and turn "ON" the air compressor
power. Fill the tire to the specified air
pressure.
Tire Size and Tire Air Pressure
WARNING
• Do not stand next to the tire when
inflating it. It could burst.

CAUTION
• Push the button of the air
compressor to turn it ON/OFF.
• Do not operate the air compressor
for longer than 25 minutes. Doing so
could cause the air compressor to
overheat.
If the specified level of the tire air

pressure cannot be reached within
15 minutes, jack up the tire. Rotate
the jacked up tire 3 times or more to
spread the sealant throughout the
entire tire. Then, inflate the tire again
until the tire pressure reaches the
specified level.
NOTE
• If the air pressure cannot reach the
specified air pressure level, the tire
may be severely damaged. In this
case, the emergency flat tire repair
kit cannot be used to repair the tire.
Contact an Isuzu Dealer or roadside
assistance service.
• If the tire gets overinflated, deflate
the air by loosening the screw of the
air hose halfway.
7. Inflate the tire until the air pressure

in the tire reaches the specified air
pressure level, and switch the air
compressor switch "OFF". Next,
remove the air hoes and power plug.
Install the valve cap on the tire valve.
8. Immediately drive the vehicle a short
distance after inflating the tire to the
specified air pressure. Drive carefully
and do not exceed a maximum speed
of 80 km/h (50 MPH).

9. After 10 minutes or 5 km (3 miles)

of driving, check the tire pressure
with the pressure gauge of the air
compressor.
If the air pressure indicates more
than 130 kPa (1.3 kgf/cm² / 18 psi),
the emergency repair is completed.
However, if the air pressure level is
less than the specified air pressure,
correct the tire pressure to the
specified air pressure.
If the tire pressure has dropped below
130 kPa (1.3 kgf/cm² / 18 psi), the
emergency flat tire repair kit cannot
be used to repair the tire. Do not
drive the vehicle and contact an Isuzu
Dealer or roadside assistance service.
WARNING
• Be sure to check the tire pressure
and to confirm the completion of the
emergency repair.
10. Affix the supplied speed restriction

label in the driver's field of view, and
drive carefully to the nearest Isuzu
Labeling position Dealer or a tire repair shop.
WARNING
• Do not affix the speed restriction
label to the steering pad.
Also do not affix the label to the
warning and indicator lights, and to
the speedometer.

CAUTION
• Have the tire changed at the nearest
Isuzu Dealer.
Contact a tire repair shop to fix the
tire that was repaired using the
• The wheel can be reused after
completely wiping sealant off with a
cloth so that it does not rust, but the
tire valve must be replaced with a
new one.
• Give the used sealant bottle to an
Isuzu Dealer for extraction of the
sealant from the tire.

When the Engine Stops While Driving

As the brake booster will no longer operate,
brake effectiveness will be reduced. The
power steering system will not work so
the steering wheel will be hard to turn.
Stay calm and decrease vehicle speed by
pressing the brake pedal. Then, promptly
pull the vehicle over to a safe location and
inspect its condition. If the engine does not
start, contact the nearest Isuzu Dealer.
WARNING
• Vehicle operations will change, so stop the vehicle in a safe place with the
following in mind.
- The power steering system will not work so the steering wheel will be hard to
turn. It will require more strength than during normal operation.
- As the brake booster will no longer be functional, brake effectiveness will
be greatly reduced. Be sure to apply more pressure than usual to the brake
pedal.
NOTE
• If the engine stopped because the vehicle ran out of fuel while driving, refueling
alone will not be enough to restart the engine. Bleed the fuel system after
refueling the vehicle.


When the Engine Stalls and Cannot be Restarted

Place the gearshift lever (manual transmission models) or the selector lever (automatic
transmission models) in the "N" position and push the vehicle to a safe place.
CAUTION
• In case of emergency with manual transmission models, place the gearshift
lever in "R (reverse)", "1 (1st gear)" or "2 (2nd gear)" if the starter turns over.
Then, keep turning the starter switch with your foot off the clutch pedal to move
the vehicle.
When the Brakes Do not Work

If the brakes unexpectedly stop working,
reduce speed by quickly shifting gears
down incrementally to 1st gear. Gradually
pull the parking brake lever while firmly
holding on to the steering wheel and stop
the vehicle on the side of the road. After
stopping the vehicle, immediately contact
CAUTION
• It is very dangerous to suddenly pull the parking brake lever all the way while
moving at high speed. Reduce speed first by shifting down and then gradually
pull the parking brake lever.
• Do not continue driving with the brakes in a non-working condition.


Use a jumper cable (sold separately) and the batteries of another vehicle to start the
engine in this sequence.
CAUTION
• For safety and the protection of the vehicle, do not push-start the vehicle.
• Make sure that the booster batteries in the vehicle providing the charge have
the same voltage as the disabled vehicle.
• Never let the battery's positive and negative terminals to come into contact with
one another.
• Never let the clips come into contact with one another when connecting the
cables.
• Ask the nearest Isuzu Dealer to recharge the battery.
• Do not disconnect a battery terminal with the engine running. It could cause a
breakdown in the electrical system.
Upper level line 1. Check the battery fluid level in the

disabled vehicle.
Lower level line
2. Use a vehicle that has a charged
battery with the same voltage.

3. Connect the jumper cables in the numbered sequence in the drawing.
Vehicle with booster batteries Disabled vehicle
Use the vehicle frame

as the ground
4
2 1
3
Negative side jumper cable
Positive side jumper cable
4. After connecting the cables, start the engine of the vehicle with the booster
battery. Slightly rev up the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and start
the engine of the disabled vehicle.
Starting the Engine
5. If the engine in the disabled vehicle starts, remove the jumper cables in the
reverse sequence as they were connected.
WARNING
• Check the battery fluid level before connecting the jumper cables. Usage or
charging of the battery when the battery fluid is below the lower level line can
accelerate deterioration, and give rise to dangerous situations such as the
generation of heat and may even cause an explosion. Perform the work after
adding the battery fluid.
• A vehicle battery generates flammable gas that could explode. Be careful of the
following to avoid creating sparks.
- Do not connect one end of the jumper cable shown in step 4 in the drawing
directly to the battery's negative terminal. Connect the jumper cable to a metal
part of the engine that is away from the battery.
- Do not let the cable connected to the positive terminal come in contact with
the cable connected to the negative terminal or the body.
- Keep flames away from the battery.
• Be careful not to become entangled in any belts when connecting and removing
the cables.

NOTE
• When it is difficult to start the engine in a cold location, after connecting the
jumper cables, start the engine of the vehicle with the booster batteries. Wait a
few minutes before starting the engine of the disabled vehicle.

Model without MID When the fuel runs out, air will enter the
fuel system, so refueling alone will not
be enough to restart the engine. Use the
following methods to bleed the fuel system.
Model with MID

Bleeding the Fuel System
1. Operate the priming pump up
Priming pump and down to perform air bleeding.
Repeatedly operate the priming pump
up and down until its operational force
becomes strong.
2. Without depressing the accelerator
pedal, start the engine.
Starting the Engine
3. After the engine has started, allow it

to idle for 1 minute.
4. Slowly and fully depress the
accelerator pedal to increase the
engine r/min, then release your foot
from the pedal once the tachometer
pointer comes close to the red zone
(Repeat this operation a few times).
5. If the engine could not be started, try
again from step 1.
ADVICE
• Insufficient air bleeding can result in faulty engine operation. Be sure, therefore,
to always carry out the procedure described in after starting the engine.
• Insufficient air bleeding may cause the malfunction indicator light (MIL) or SVS
indicator light to illuminate, or improper engine performance.

When the Generator Warning Light Comes On

When this warning light comes on, the
charging system may have failed.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place, perform checks and take corrective
action.
Generator Warning Light
Check and Corrective Action

1. Check to see if the fan belt is broken
or loose.
2. If the fan belt is loose, adjust the
tension.
3. If there is no abnormality in the fan
belt, contact the nearest Isuzu Dealer.
Compressor Belt
CAUTION
• Do not drive the vehicle when the warning light is on. The battery can be
discharged.

When the Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light Comes On

When this warning light comes on, the oil
pressure is too low.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place, stop the engine, perform checks and
then take corrective action.
Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light
Check and Corrective Action

1. Check the engine oil level.
2. If the engine oil level is too low, check
for leaks and add oil.
3. When the oil level is normal and there
are no oil leaks, the oil filter may be
clogged.
Replace the oil filter. Have the engine
oil filter replacement performed at an
Isuzu Dealer.
4. When the oil level is normal and the
oil filter is not clogged, but there are
oil leaks, contact the nearest Isuzu
Dealer.
CAUTION
• Do not drive the vehicle when the warning light is on. It could damage the
engine.
NOTE
• In winter, when the engine oil temperature is low and the oil viscosity is high,
the light might come on for a time. It will go out when the engine warms up.
When the Warning Light Comes On

If the Warning Light and Indicator Light come on, refer to chapter 4.
Warning and Indicator Lights


If engine power drops and the gauge on the engine coolant temperature gauge goes
up above the upper limit of the safety zone and enters the "H" zone, the engine is
overheating. The engine overheat warning light will come on. Either steam or boiling
water will squirt out of the radiator. Take the following corrective actions immediately.
Model without MID 1. Operate the hazard warning flasher
and pull the vehicle immediately over
to a safe place that doesn't impede
Safety zone traffic (shoulder, verge) and park it.
2. Lower the temperature of the engine
for a while with the engine idling.
Model with MID
WARNING
• If steam or abnormal noises are
being emitted from within the engine
Safety zone compartment, immediately stop the
engine and contact the nearest Isuzu
Dealer. Should this happen, do not
open the engine hood as you may
Engine overheat warning light be scalded by hot water that could
possibly blow out.
ADVICE
• Do not stop the engine immediately.
Otherwise, the engine may seize.
• Turn off the air conditioner if it is
running.
• Stop the engine if the engine coolant
temperature gauge does not go
down even when the engine is idled.
Contact the nearest Isuzu Dealer.
3. When the gauge of the engine coolant

temperature gauge returns to the
middle of the safety zone, stop the
engine.

WARNING
• Even when the engine has been stopped, the engine coolant in the radiator
remains under pressure. Immediately removing the radiator cap could cause
steam or hot water to blow out, and you could be scalded as a result. The
engine coolant in the reserve tank may also be hot. Immediately removing the
cap could cause hot water to blow out, and possibly scald you.
• When removing the radiator cap and reserve tank cap, use a thick cloth to cover
the cap and turn it little by little.
4. Check the engine coolant level in

the reserve tank and radiator after
the engine has sufficiently cooled. If
the level is insufficient, add engine
coolant. Also, check to see if the fan
belt is loose or has been damaged.
ADVICE
• Make sure that the gauge on the engine coolant temperature gauge is below
"C" before adding engine coolant. Adding engine coolant when the engine is not
sufficiently cool could cause a breakdown in the engine or damage it.
• When tap water only has been used for engine coolant in an emergency, adjust
the engine coolant concentration as soon as possible.

Compressor Belt


1. Check each bulb for blowout.
2. If a bulb has blown out, replace it. Always place the starter switch in the "LOCK"
position and place all the other switches in the off position before replacing the
blown bulbs.
3. If the bulb has not blown out, the fault may be in the wiring. Contact the nearest
Isuzu Dealer.
CAUTION
• Using bulbs with a wattage other than that specified could cause the bulb or the
wiring to become hot. This could result in the warping of the lens and case, and
it could also lead to the outbreak of fire.
• Bulbs are hot immediately after they go out. When replacing the bulbs, avoid
being burned by making sure they are fully cooled.
• Never drive the vehicle with the bulbs not working. This could result in an
accident.
• Halogen bulbs contain pressurized gas. Be careful when handling halogen
bulbs as damaging or dropping them could cause an explosion.
ADVICE
• When one bulb of a pair of lights, such as a headlight blows out, the other bulb
is approaching the end of its useful life. We recommend that both be changed
at the same time.
NOTE
• Be sure to adjust the headlight aim to prevent other drivers from becoming
blinded. Have the headlight aim adjusted at the nearest Isuzu Dealer.
• For the lights (lighting equipment) such as headlights, inside of the lens can
mist up momentarily when driving in the rain or during the car wash. Also, the
temperature difference between inside and outside of the lights can sometimes
cause the water condensation inside the lens. This is not abnormal because this
is the same phenomenon as the windshield or door glass fogs up when it rains.
If it is demisted minutes after the light is turned on, things are normal.

Bulb Wattage
Position Lights Bulb wattage
Except
High beam/
projector 60/55 W
low beam
Halogen headlight type
Projector High beam 60 W
type Low beam 55 W
Model without daytime
Front 51 W
running light
Fog light
Model with daytime running
55 W
light
Daytime running light 13 W
Turn signal light 21 W (Amber)
Clearance light 5W
Front door mounted type 5W
Side Turn signal light Outside rearview mirror
LED
mounted type
Bulb type 5/21 W
Taillight and stop light
LED type LED
Standard type 21 W (Amber)
Turn signal light
Horizontal type 21 W
Rear
Back up light 21 W
License plate light 5W
Rear fog light 21 W
High mounted stop light 5W
Map lights 5W
Interior
Dome light 10 W
Contact the nearest Isuzu Dealer when replacing lights that aren't listed here.

Replacing the Headlight Bulbs

(Except Projector Type)
1. Open the engine hood and engage
the support.
Headlight connector 2. Disconnect the connector from the

bulb. Remove the connector by
pushing the tabs.
Rubber boot 3. Remove the rubber boot.
Retaining clip 4. Release the bulb retaining clip.

Remove the bulb.
5. Install a new bulb and secure it using
the retaining clip.
ADVICE
Headlight bulb • Do not touch the glass of the bulb
with your hand. Soiling the glass will
cause the bulb to blow out.

6. Attach a rubber boot. Connect the
connector.
ADVICE
• When attaching the rubber boot,
press in both the outside and inside
circumference of it. Make sure
that the rubber boot, the headlight
assembly, and the bulb are securely
installed without any raised section.
If the rubber boot is not firmly in
place, water could get inside the
headlight and lead to a malfunction.
Replacing the High Beam Headlight

Bulbs (Projector Type)
the support.
High beam headlight bulb 2. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to

remove it.
High beam headlight connector

High beam headlight bulb 3. Disconnect the connector from the

pushing the tab.
Tab
High beam headlight connector
4. Connect the connector to the new

bulb.
ADVICE
• Do not touch the glass of the bulb
cause the bulb to blow out.
5. Insert the bulb and turn it clockwise to

lock it securely.
ADVICE
• If the socket is not locked securely,
water could get inside the light and
lead to a malfunction.

Replacing the Low Beam Headlight
Bulbs (Projector Type)
the support.
Low beam headlight bulb 2. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to

remove it.
Low beam headlight connector
Low beam headlight bulb 3. Disconnect the connector from the

pushing the tab.
4. Connect the connector to the new
bulb.
ADVICE
• Do not touch the glass of the bulb
Tab cause the bulb to blow out.
5. Insert the bulb and turn it clockwise to

lock it securely.
Low beam headlight connector
ADVICE

Replacing the Front Turn Signal

Light Bulbs
CAUTION
• Do not replace a bulb with one other
than the specified wattage. This will
cause abnormal flashing, particularly
for turn signal lights.

the support.
Except Projector Type Headlights 2. Turn the socket counterclockwise to

Models remove it.
NOTE
• Pliers may be used if it is not
possible to turn the socket by
hand (models with projector type
headlights).
Turn signal light socket
Projector Type Headlights Models


Except Projector Type Headlights 3. Pull out the bulb from the socket.
Models
Turn signal light bulb

Turn signal light bulb
4. Insert a new bulb into the socket.

5. Insert the socket and turn it clockwise
to lock it securely.
ADVICE

Replacing the Clearance Light Bulbs

the support.
Except Projector Type Headlights 2. Turn the socket counterclockwise to

Models remove it.
Clearance light socket

Clearance light bulb 3. Pull out the bulb from the socket.

ADVICE
Replacing the Turn Signal Light

Bulbs (Front Door Mounted Type)
1. While sliding the turn signal light (front
door mounted type) toward the front
of the vehicle, slide and then pull it
to expose the rear part of the light.
Disengage the clip on the side of the
rear of the light from the door panel.
When the clip has been removed, pull
the light out while sliding it out toward
the rear of the vehicle.
2. Loosen the socket by turning it

counterclockwise.
Socket
3. Pull out the bulb from the socket.


6. Insert the clip on the back of the rear

part of the light into the door panel.
Push the front part of the light into the
door panel, and insert the clip on the
back of the front part of the light in the
door panel.
Replacing the Rear Combination

Light Bulbs
NOTE
• If the stop and tail light bulb is an
LED specification, have the stop
and tail light bulb replaced at an
Isuzu Dealer.
1. Open the tailgate. Remove the 2

screws. Remove the rear combination
lights.
2. Turn the socket of the replacing bulb

counterclockwise to remove it.
Socket

Socket Bulb

ADVICE
6. Install the rear combination lights,

and then tighten the 2 screws to affix
them.
Replacing the Bulbs of Rear Turn

Turn signal light Signal Lights, Taillights, Stop Lights,
and Back Up Lights (Horizontal
Tail and stop light Back up light
Type)
1. Loosen the screws and remove the
lens.
2. Loosen the bulb by turning it
counterclockwise while pressing on it.
3. To install the lights, follow the removal
Lens
Replacing the Rear Fog Light Bulb

1. Remove the screws retaining the lens
and remove the lens.
2. Loosen the bulb by turning it
counterclockwise while pressing on it.

Replacing the License Plate Light

Clip Bulbs
1. Push the clip on the back of the
Push A license plate light towards "A" to
release the lock.
Bumper panel
or cargo panel
Push 2. When the clip lock has been released,

Clip push the clip to remove the license
plate light.
Bumper panel
or cargo panel

counterclockwise.
Socket
Socket
Bulb


Lock 7. Insert the license plate light lock into
the bumper panel or cargo panel.
Bumper panel
or cargo panel
Clip 8. Push the license plate light at the clip

into the bumper panel or cargo panel
to install the clip.
Bumper panel
or cargo panel
Push
Replacing the Dome Light Bulb

1. Use a flat head screwdriver or similar
tool to remove the lens. Remove the
bulb.
Bulb
Lens
Replacing the Map Light Bulbs

(with Over Head Console)
1. Remove the lens and pull out the
bulb.
Bulb
Lens

Replacing the Map Light Bulbs

(without Over Head Console)
1. The light assembly can be removed
easily by pulling down by hand.

Socket
counterclockwise.
Bulb 3. Pull out the bulb from the socket.

Have the Following Bulb

Replacement Work Performed at an
Isuzu Dealer
• Front fog lights
• Daytime running lights
• Turn signal lights (Outside rearview
mirror mounted type)
• Taillights and stop lights (LED type)
• High mounted stop light

Replacing the Fuses and Relays

When the lights won't come on or flash, or the equipment in the electrical system does
not operate, check to see if a fuse has blown.
ADVICE
• It is not necessary to open or close the cover unless trouble is found.
• The fuse and relay box structure makes it difficult for water to enter. If you
should spill water or a beverage on the cover, however, wipe it off before
opening the cover.
• The area around the cover will get warm when the vehicle is being driven, but
this is not abnormal.
The Location of Fuses and Relays

The fuses and relays are inside the cab and the engine compartment. When inspecting
or replacing the fuses or relays in the cab, remove the small article storage pocket
that is located on the lower driver side part of the instrument panel. When inspecting
or replacing the fuses or relays in the engine compartment, open the cover of the fuse
and relay box that is located on the front left side of the engine compartment.
NOTE
• The fuse layout is shown on the opposite side of the small article storage
pocket.
Remove method Removing the Small Article Storage

Pocket
Pull the small article storage pocket
towards you to open it. While in the open
position, pull it up until it unlocks from the
hinge to remove it.
To install the small article storage pocket,
follow the removal procedure in reverse.
Install method

Replacing Fuses
Relay 1. Before replacing fuses, be sure to
place the starter switch in the "LOCK"
position and pull back on the parking
brake lever.
2. Place the fuse puller on the fuse and
pull it out. (The fuse puller is stored
in the fuse box inside the engine
Fuse compartment.)
Fuse Puller
Relay Fuse

3. If the fuse appears is as shown in
the right-hand side of the diagram at
left, the fuse is blown. Replace with a
spare fuse. (Spare fuses are stored
in the fuse box inside the engine
compartment.)
WARNING
Normal Blown
• Use fuses of the same amperage for
replacement. Do not use any other
fuses than those designated.
• Using fuses other than those
specified could result in fire or
damage to the equipment.
• If the new fuses blow right away,
Replacing Relays
When replacing the relays, contact the nearest Isuzu Dealer.

Fuse and Relay Location

Fuse locations: engine compartment
17
18
19
21
20
1 2 3 4 24
22 25
28 29 30 5 6 7 8 23 26
27
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

No. Description Rating No. Description Rating
1 H/LIGHT RH LO 10A 16 H/LIGHT RH HI 10A
2 H/LIGHT LH LO 10A 17 TAIL LIGHT LH/ILLUMI 10A
3 PCV HEATER 10A 18 TAIL LIGHT RH 10A
4 ENGINE 10A 19 A/C 10A
5 RR FOG LIGHT 10A 20 MAIN 120A
6 TRAILER 20A 21 IG-2 60A
7 ESC 10A 22 GLOW 60A
8 FRT FOG LIGHT 15A 23 BLOWER 30A
9 BLANK ― 24 ABS_1/ESC_1 50A
10 STOP LIGHT 15A 25 ECM 40A
11 HAZARD 15A 26 ABS_2/ESC_2 30A
12 HORN 10A 27 IG-1 40A
13 ACG(S) 10A 28 SPARE 10A
14 TCM_B/DRM_B 10A 29 SPARE 15A
15 H/LIGHT LH HI 10A 30 SPARE 20A
Depending on the equipment installed, or
on the vehicle destination or model, fuses
may not be installed at the location where
the fuse name is shown in the table.

Relay locations: engine compartment
8 9 10
5
6 11 12 13 14 2
1 3 4
Relay
No. Description No. Description

1 HEATER 8 HEAD LIGHT
2 ECM MAIN 9 TAIL LIGHT
3 GLOW 10 FOG LIGHT
4 STARTER 11 HORN
5 DRL1 12 A/C COMPRESSOR
6 STARTER CUT 13 THERMO
7 HEAD LIGHT DIMMER 14 REAR FOG LIGHT
Depending on the equipment installed, or
on the vehicle destination or model, relays
may not be installed at the location where
the relay name is shown in the table.

Fuse and relay locations: instrumental panel
Relay Relay
1 2
3 4
1 9 19
29 31
2 10 20
3 11 21
4 12 22
5 13 23
Fuse 30 32
6 14 24
7 15 25
8 16 26
17 27
Relay 18 28
Right-hand drive Left-hand drive Right-hand drive

7
8 8
5 6

No. Relay name No. Fuse name Rating

1 ACC SOCKET 1 KEY INT LOCK 10A
2 RR DEFOGGER 2 CIGAR LIGHTER 15A
3 BLANK 3 AUDIO 10A
4 POWER WINDOW 4 ELEC (IG2) 10A
5 SUPER LOCK 5 H/LAMP LEVELING 10A
6 BLANK 6 TURN LIGHT 10A
7 RR DEFOGGER TIMER 7 TRAILER 10A
8 DRL2 8 SEAT HEATER 15A
9 BLANK ―
10 BACK LIGHT 15A
11 ENGINE (IG) 10A
12 METER 10A
13 TCM 15A
14 4WD 10A
15 ABS 10A
16 FRT WIPER 20A
17 SRS 10A
18 DRL 10A
19 ELEC (IG1) 10A
20 ACC SOCKET 15A
21 DOOR LOCK 20A
22 BLANK ―
23 STARTER 10A
24 BCM 10A
25 AUDIO (+B) 15A
26 ROOM 10A
27 4WD (+B) 10A
28 METER (+B) 10A
29 BLANK ―
30 POWER SEAT 20A
31 RR DEFOGGER 20A
32 POWER WINDOW 30A
Depending on the equipment installed,
or on the vehicle destination or model,
fuses or relays may not be installed at the
location where the fuse or relay name is
shown in the table.

When Driving on Bad Roads

If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, pressing
the accelerator pedal more than necessary
will simply dig the vehicle deeper into the
mud and make it harder to extricate. Either
put stones, tree branches or blankets under
the tires to gain traction or repeatedly drive
forward and backward to use the vehicle's
momentum to extricate it.
NOTE
• On a muddy road with an automatic
transmission model, by depressing
the brake pedal you can make a
standing start in the manual mode
2nd gear and move the selector
lever to the "+" (upshift) position.
This provides better traction and
safer vehicle operation.
• When you want to free the vehicle
from mud where the tires may slip
slightly by increasing the engine
speed, you can press the ESC OFF
switch to disable just the traction
control system (TCS).


Towing
To move a disabled vehicle, it is best to rely on the nearest Isuzu Dealer or someone in
the wrecker or tow vehicle business. If that is not possible, follow these procedures.
When towing, use appropriate equipment and comply with local legal requirements.
Do not try to start the engine by towing or pushing the vehicle.
CAUTION
• Do not tow a vehicle at an angle of
greater than 15°. This could exert
too much stress on the vehicle and
damage it.
• Attach a rope to the towing hook
Hook only. Attaching a rope to other part
of the vehicle could damage it.
Hook
• Make sure there are no people near
the towing rope and hook before
towing a vehicle. If the rope snaps
or the vehicle falls off the hook and
is damaged, people nearby may be
injured or objects may be damaged.
• The towing hook is for use to tow a
vehicle with about the same weight
as the towing vehicle on good roads.
• Follow the instructions of the
equipment manufacturer.
• A separate safety chain must be
used.
Hook
Leaf spring • Do not tow a vehicle that is attached
to another vehicle.
• If the vehicle does not move even
Usable when towed, stop the towing
range of 15 procedure. Contact the nearest
towing 15
rope Isuzu Dealer or a towing service for
assistance.
Usable
range of 15
towing 15
rope

When Towed
WARNING
• Before towing, make sure that the towing hook is in good condition and that the
fixing bolts are tightened properly.
CAUTION
• Whenever possible, tow a vehicle with the engine started.
If the engine is not started:
- The brakes will not be as effective;
- The steering wheel will be hard to turn;
- The steering wheel could lock, making it impossible to turn. This is extremely
dangerous (particularly when the key is removed).
[Request a tow vehicle in case of one of the following conditions]
• When the vehicle will descend long hills. (The brakes could overheat and
become ineffective.)
• When the vehicle breaks down on a highway.
ADVICE
• Whenever possible, transport the vehicle with all wheels off the ground using a
flatbed truck, etc. If you cannot avoid towing the vehicle with the front wheels/
rear wheels/all wheels on the ground, tow at a speed of 30 km/h (19 MPH) or
less and a towing distance within 80 km (50 miles).
• For 4WD vehicles, set the 4WD switch to the "2H" position and confirm that the
4WD indicator light has turned off. If the 4WD indicator light does not turn off,
transport the vehicle with all four wheels off the ground using a flatbed truck,
etc.
• If the manual transmission, automatic transmission, or differential is damaged,
transport the vehicle with all four wheels off the ground using a flatbed truck,
etc.
NOTE
• Depending on the model, one or two front towing hooks will be equipped.

All Four Wheels On Ground

When it is possible to operate the steering
wheel, the vehicle can be towed with all
wheels on the ground.
However, the power steering will not be
able to provide any power assist when the
engine cannot be started.
1. Firmly attach a rope to the front
towing hook on the same side. The
driver must be inside the cabin to
control the steering wheels and brake.
Place the starter switch in the "ACC"
position.
2. For manual transmission vehicles,
Hook place the gearshift lever in the "N"
position and release the parking
Hook brake. For automatic transmission
vehicles, place the selector lever
in the "N" position and release the
parking brake. For 4WD vehicles, set
the 4WD switch to the "2H" position
and confirm that the 4WD indicator
light has turned off.
3. During towing, carefully watch the stop
lights of the towing vehicle in order
to prevent the rope from becoming
slack. Tow the vehicle gently, ensuring
that there are no strong impacts or
lateral forces applied to the vehicle.

Front Wheels Off the Ground
For manual transmission vehicles, place
the gearshift lever in the "N" position and
release the parking brake. For automatic
transmission vehicles, place the selector
lever in the "N" position and release the
parking brake. For 4WD vehicles, set
the 4WD switch to the "2H" position and
confirm that the 4WD indicator light has
turned off.
Rear Wheels Off the Ground

1. For manual transmission vehicles,
place the gearshift lever in the "N"
position. For automatic transmission
vehicles, place the selector lever in
the "N" position. For 4WD vehicles,
set the 4WD switch to the "2H"
position and confirm that the 4WD
indicator light has turned off.
2. Secure the steering wheel in order to
keep it in a straight position. Set the
starter switch to the "ACC" position.
ADVICE
• The lock mechanism may become damaged by setting the starter switch to the
"LOCK" position to secure the steering wheel.

When Towing
1. Firmly attach a rope to the front
towing hook on the same side.
2. During towing, tow the vehicle gently
ensure that there is no strong shock
or lateral force applied to the vehicle.
ADVICE
• Do not tow a vehicle heavier than
the towing vehicle. The traction
strength has been set up to be
Hook smaller than the weight of the towing
Leaf spring vehicle.
NOTE
• Depending on the model, a rear
towing hook may not be equipped.

MAIN DATA 8
● Main Data and Specifications 8-2

● Others 8-10
● Trailer Towing 8-21
4510393_sec08_MAIN DATA.indd 8-1 2015/01/16 9:27:05

8-2 MAIN DATA
Main Data and Specifications
Engine
4JK1 Engine Model
Specifications
Water-cooled, overhead camshaft, direct injection engine with an inter-cooled turbocharger
Compression ratio (to 1) 17.0
Displacement cc (cu. in) 2,499 (152.5)
Firing order 1-3-4-2
Fuel injection timing (static) degree Electronic control
Valve clearance (Between cam and roller) mm (in) Both intake and exhaust valves:
0.15 (0.006) in cold engine
Idling speed r/min 675 - 725
Belt tension mm (in)/Hz Fan belt:
7.7 - 8.5 (0.30 - 0.33) / 160 - 174
* New belt: 5.4 - 6.6 (0.21 - 0.26) / 188 - 210
Air conditioning compressor belt:
16.5 - 19.1 (0.65 - 0.75) / 79 - 91
* New belt: 12.5 - 16.5 (0.49 - 0.65) / 92 - 112
Oil filter Replaceable element type
Engine oil capacity [Reference value] When changing oil and filter:
liters (US gal./Imp gal.) 2WD: 5.4 (1.43/1.19)
4WD: 5.9 (1.56/1.30)
Engine coolant capacity [Reference value] Manual transmission model: 10.1 (2.67/2.22)
liters (US gal./Imp gal.) Automatic transmission model: 10.0 (2.64/2.20)
Preheating system Glow plugs
*: The new belt values only apply when replacing with a new belt.

MAIN DATA 8-3
Transmission
AY6 Model (Manual Transmission)
Specifications
Six-speed transmission (overdrive gear for 6th), synchromesh for 1st to 6th and reverse
Gear ratio (to 1) 1st 5.232
2nd 2.644
3rd 1.605
4th 1.219
5th 1.000
6th 0.728
Reverse 4.525
Transmission oil capacity [Reference value]
liters (US gal./Imp gal.) 1.8 (0.48/0.40)
TB-50LS Model (Automatic Transmission)

Specifications
Five-speed automatic transmission (overdrive gear for 5th), lock-up clutch for 5th
Gear ratio (to 1) 1st 3.520
2nd 2.042
3rd 1.400
4th 1.000
5th 0.716
Reverse 3.224
Transmission oil capacity [Reference value]

8-4 MAIN DATA
Transfer
T150 Model
Specifications
Transfer type Chain drive
Transfer gear ratio (to 1) 1.000 (High range), 2.482 (Low range)
Transfer oil capacity [Reference value]

MAIN DATA 8-5
Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
Ratings
Specifications
GAW: Front kg (lb) 2WD: 1,250 (2,756)
2WD High-Ride: 1,350 (2,977)
4WD: 1,350 (2,977)
GAW: Rear kg (lb) 1,870 (4,123)
GVW kg (lb) 2WD: 2,900 (6,395)
4WD: 3,000 (6,615) for Europe (left-hand drive models),
Hong Kong, Israel, and Singapore
4WD: 3,050 (6,725) for Europe (right-hand drive models)

8-6 MAIN DATA
Service Specifications
TFR86 Model
Engine
Model 4JK1-TC Hi-Power
Engine oil capacity
Engine coolant capacity Refer to page 8-2
Transmission
Model Manual transmission model: AY6
Automatic transmission model: TB-50LS
Transmission oil capacity Refer to page 8-3
Rear axle
Differential gear oil capacity [Reference value]
Fuel
Fuel tank capacity [Reference value]
liters (US gal./Imp gal.) 69 (18.2/15.2)
Steering
Steering wheel free play mm (in) 10 - 30 (0.39 - 1.18)
Power steering fluid capacity [Reference value]

MAIN DATA 8-7
Wheel
Wheel alignment : Toe-in mm (in) 0 (0)
: Camber (degree) 0°
: Caster (degree) 2WD: 3°35´, 2WD High-Ride: 3°20´
: King pin (degree) 12°30´
Service brakes
Brake pedal free play Refer to page 6-48
Brake pedal height Refer to page 6-48
Clearance between the brake pedal and the floor Refer to page 6-48
Parking brake
Lever effective stroke
(Under pull force of approximately 294 N (30 kgf/
66 lb)) 6 - 9 notches
Electrical system
Battery type (Volt-Amp.h.) × No. of units 80D26L (12 - 65), 95D31L (12 - 80)
(M/T) 75D26L (12 - 65) × 2, (A/T) 80D26L (12 - 65) × 2
Starter volt-kw 12 - 2.3
Generator volt/amp. 12/90

8-8 MAIN DATA
TFS86 Model
Engine
Model 4JK1-TC Hi-Power
Engine oil capacity
Engine coolant capacity Refer to page 8-2
Transmission
Model Manual transmission model: AY6
Automatic transmission model: TB-50LS
Transmission oil capacity Refer to page 8-3
Transfer oil capacity Refer to page 8-4
Rear axle
Front axle
Fuel
Fuel tank capacity [Reference value]
liters (US gal./Imp gal.) 69 (18.2/15.2)
Steering
Steering wheel free play mm (in) 10 - 30 (0.39 - 1.18)
Power steering fluid capacity [Reference value]

MAIN DATA 8-9
Wheel
Wheel alignment : Toe-in mm (in) 0 (0)
: Camber (degree) 0°
: Caster (degree) 3°20´
: King pin (degree) 12°30´
Service brakes
Brake pedal free play Refer to page 6-48
Brake pedal height Refer to page 6-48
Clearance between the brake pedal and the floor Refer to page 6-48
Parking brake
Lever effective stroke
(Under pull force of approximately 294 N (30 kgf/
66 lb)) 6 - 9 notches
Electrical system
Battery type (Volt-Amp.h.) × No. of units 80D26L (12 - 65), 95D31L (12 - 80)
(M/T) 75D26L (12 - 65) × 2, (A/T) 80D26L (12 - 65) × 2
Starter volt-kw 12 - 2.3
Generator volt/amp. 12/90

8-10 MAIN DATA
Others
Statement of Compliance with the Machinery Directive

(2006/42/EC)
This vehicle's screw jack conforms to the basic requirements of the Machinery
Directive (2006/42/EC) and related regulations.
Statement of Compliance

MAIN DATA 8-11
Statement of Compliance with the R&TTE Directive
(1999/5/EC)
This vehicle's immobilizer conforms to the basic requirements of the R&TTE Directive
(1999/5/EC) and related regulations.
Statement of Compliance

8-12 MAIN DATA
For Europe
This vehicle's keyless entry system (radio remote control units for door-lock) conforms
to the basic requirements of the R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC) and related regulations.
Hereby, Panasonic Electronic Devices Co.,Ltd. declares that this keyless entry
system (radio remote control units for door-lock) is in compliance with the essential
requirements.
The declaration of conformity may be consulted at http://www.doc.panasonic.de
For the State of Israel

This vehicle's keyless entry system (radio remote control units for door-lock) conforms
to the basic requirements of the Ministry of Communications (MOC) and related
regulations.
• Manufacturer: Panasonic Electronic Devices Co.,Ltd.
• Model name: Keyless entry system (radio remote control units for door-lock)
• Country of manufacture: Thailand
• Importer name and address: Universal Motors Israel Ltd.
5 Faltin Naftali St.,Rishon Lezion, Israel, P.O.Box
17011 Zcode 75070

MAIN DATA 8-13
Guidelines for Installation of Aftermarket Radio Frequency
Transmitting Equipment
Purpose
This installation guidelines give requirement and recommendations for the installation
in vehicles of
• radio frequency (RF) transmitting equipment.
• ancillary equipment associated with these.
NOTE
• These guidelines are intended to supplement, but not to be used in place of,
detailed instructions for such installations which are the sole responsibility of the
manufacturer of the involved radio telephone or land mobile radio.
General
1. Only the RF-transmitting equipment and ancillary equipment (microphone,
converter, booster, etc.) with 'CE' mark or 'e' may be installed in vehicle.
2. Installation of RF-transmitting equipment shall be performed by competent
personal permitted by the country regulation. The vehicle and RF-transmitting
equipment manufacturer's instruction manuals and installation notes shall be
followed.
NOTE
• Vehicle manufacturer's instructions take priority in case of conflict.
• Installation of RF-transmitting equipment to any part of the vehicle, other than
an authorized connection or mounting location, may invalidate the vehicle
warranty.
• If a problem is found and can not be rectified, and it is suspected that the RF-
transmitting equipment is out of specification, the appropriate manufacturer,
agent or supplier shall be consulted.
• Expenses incurred from any adverse effect of any such installation are not the
responsibility of vehicle manufacturer.

8-14 MAIN DATA
3. The installation shall comply with national legal requirements for the installation
and use of RF-transmitting equipment in vehicles.
4. Full consideration shall be given to the positioning of RF-transmitting equipment
such that electromagnetic interference (EMI) and radio frequency interference
(RFI) is minimized between the RF-transmitting equipment being installed and the
vehicle electrical and electronic systems.
5. Care shall be taken when planning the installation that any additional equipment
used does not constitute a safety hazard and does not contravene safety
regulations.
6. Care shall be taken to ensure that any microphone/handset lead is not such that
the lead can interfere with the vehicle controls or driver.
7. Where a hand portable or transportable unit is installed in road vehicles, the
correct car adapter kit specified for the product shall be used.
Installation
Care shall be taken in
• choosing the antenna,
• sitting it in a recommended location,
• installing it correctly,
• ensuring that all connection in the antenna feeder are sealed to prevent dirt and
water from entering the feeder and affecting its performance,
• ensuring that all connection are electrically tested after installation, and
• ensuring that a satisfactory VSWR reading is obtained.
Antenna
1. For RF-transmitting equipments with output power levels above 100mW (peak),
an external antenna is strongly recommended.
2. The external antenna and feeder cable shall be impedance matched with a
VSWR < 2.0.
3. The antenna should be a permanent-mount type located in the roof or the rear
trunk lid. If a magnet-mount antenna is used, care should be taken to mount the
antenna in the same location as a permanent-mount type.
NOTE
• Each vehicle model and body style reacts to radio frequency energy differently.
When dealing with an unfamiliar vehicle, it is suggested that a magnetic-mount
antenna be used to check the proposed antenna location for unwanted effects
on the vehicle. An antenna location is a major factor in these effects.
• The best position for an antenna is on the metallic roof, preferably towards the
center, but where possible with a distance of > λ/4 (λ = wavelength) from any
opening, such as a sunroof or windows.

MAIN DATA 8-15
4. Care shall be taken when sitting an antenna next to an existing one or when
mounting antennas with magnetic bases, as this could affect the accuracy or
operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped.
[Radiation patterns and ground planes]

1. In order to create a symmetrical, non-directional radiation pattern, an antenna
needs to be mounted vertically on a horizontal ground plane with – ideally – a
radius of > λ/4 at the lowest frequency band used (see Table 1).
2. The antenna should not be located close to any electrically resonant structure.
3. Care shall be taken when sitting the antenna close to another, existing antenna. It
is necessary to separate them by > λ/4 for transmit frequency f < 600 MHz and >
λ for transmit frequency f > 600 MHz (see Table 1).
Table 1. Approximate frequency-to-wavelength conversion
Frequency Wavelength
λ/4
f λ
cm
MHz cm
50 600 150
80 375 94
150 200 50
450 66 17
600 49.5 12
900 33 8
1800 16.5 4
[Ground-plane provision]
When the antenna installation is to be carried out on a non-metallic surface
• a ground-plane-independent antenna can be fitted directly to any surface (glass-
fiber etc.) or onto a mounting bracket which may be supplied by the manufacturer,
• a standard antenna can be used with a ground plane fitted to the underside of the
panel, for example a metallic plate complying with dimensions Table 1.

8-16 MAIN DATA
[Antenna position at vehicle]

Installation and use of RF transmitters with antenna outside the vehicle is shown by
Table 2.
Table 2. Installation and use of RF transmitters with antenna outside the vehicle
Frequency bands Max. output Antenna position Specific conditions for installation
(MHz) power (W) at vehicle and/or use
1. 1.8-30 50 4.5 Ham Radio
2. 50-54 50 1.2.3.4.5 Ham Radio
3. 142-176 50 1.2.3.4.5 Ham Radio / General Service Radio
4. 380-470 50 1.2.3.4.5 Ham Radio / General Service Radio
General Service Radio / Mobile
5. 870-915 5 1.2.3.4.5
Telephone
6. 1200-1300 10 1.2.3.4.5 Ham Radio
7. 1710-1785 2 1.2.3.4.5 Mobile Telephone
8. 1885-2025 1 1.2.3.4.5 Mobile Telephone
5 Antenna location;
0: all location (vehicle exterior)
2
3 1: front left of roof
1 2: front right of roof
4 3: center of roof
4: left of bumper
Figure 1. Drawing showing antenna
installation points in the vehicle 5: right of bumper
[Case of "On-glass" antennas]

Glass mounted antennas should be kept as high as possible in the center of the rear
window or windshield.
NOTE
• Care shall be taken to ensure that the glass is within the specified temperature
range when fixing the antenna mount in order to obtain a good bond.

MAIN DATA 8-17
Antenna Cable
1. Use a high quality, one piece coaxial cable (at least 95% shield coverage) that is
impedance matched for the RF-transmitting equipment (VSWR < 2.0).
2. Excess coaxial cable shall not be coiled, as this may affect the tuning of the
antenna as well as producing electrical interference.
3. If possible, the antenna cable should be cut to the correct length.
4. The cable should be routed so as to avoid sharp bends.
5. Safety-sensitive electronic unit (e.g. airbag and ABS systems), circuits and
harnesses shall not be used for parallel wiring.
6. If it is necessary to cross other wiring, cross at right angles.
7. If an extension feeder cable is required, suitable coaxial cable shall be used and
correctly terminated with good quality, low-loss connectors.
NOTE
• Fit the correct antenna connectors at each end of the feeder cable to match the
equipment using either crimp or soldered connectors as appropriate.
8. If the antenna cable provided is too short, wherever possible the cable should be
replaced by a suitable feeder cable of correct length.
NOTE
• Extending the length of the feeder cable will result in additional losses,
particularly at frequencies > 800 MHz.
9. Ensure that the feeder cable is not strained or distorted by, for example,
excessive tightening of cable ties.
10. When vehicle trim is replaced, make sure that the panels do not trap the feeder
cable.
11. Additional care should be taken when installing a glass mount to the rear screen
of a hatch-back type vehicle to allow opening and to prevent damage to the
feeder cable.

8-18 MAIN DATA
RF-transmitting Equipment
[Mounting of RF-transmitting equipment]
1. Location of a RF-transmitting equipment should be selected that provides a solid
mounting point which does not interfere with the vehicle operator controls and
provides adequate ventilation.
2. RF-transmitting equipment shall not be able to be damaged or its ventilation
restricted. Special care should be taken to ensure that RF-transmitting equipment
can not be damaged by ingress of water.
3. Access to vehicle equipment in the load storage area shall not be barred, e.g. by
wheel jack, fire extinguishers or spare wheel.
4. The connections to the RF-transmitting equipment should be easily accessible in
order that the equipment may be removed for operation in transportable mode, or
for repairs and servicing.
5. It shall not hinder the operation of airbags or other safety equipment.
NOTE
• Great care should be taken not to mount any RF-transmitting equipment,
microphones or any other item in the deployment path of a Supplemental
Inflatable Restraint or "Air Bag."
[Routing of RF-transmitting equipment's cables]

1. Where possible, all cables should pass inside or underneath trim and through
moldings in such a way as to afford maximum protection. If necessary, use
sleeving, a proprietary protector and/or cable ties where required.
2. Select a route for the cable, ideally on the opposite side of the vehicle to the
fuel pipe, clear of brake pipes, cables, controls, vehicle wiring and any hot
components. Under no circumstances shall any cables be attached to the
foregoing.
3. Cable shall be routed so that they avoid
• sharp edges,
• continual bending,
• stress or strain,
• abrasion,
• extreme temperature, and
• becoming a hazard to the occupants of the car.

MAIN DATA 8-19
Power Supply for RF-transmitting Equipment
[General]
1. A dedicated supply cable should be used for the RF-transmitting equipment
installation which should be as short as possible to the battery positive and
negative connections. Do not connect directly to the battery pillars, but use the
battery terminals provided.
NOTE
• Connections shall not be made to any electronic control unit feeds under any
circumstances. For example, avoid using cigar lighter as power sources for a
RF-transmitting equipment.
2. It is also recommended that, unless a molded twin supply cable is used, the two
supply lines be twisted together along their length in order to reduce radiated
noise or induce noise.
NOTE
• The supply cable from the RF-transmitting equipment should approach
the battery in such a way that, when terminated, the two wires can not be
inadvertently reversed, e.g. one wire is shorter than the other.
3. If ignition switch control is desired, the handset or control unit positive lead may
be connected through an appropriate in-line fuse to an available accessory circuit
or ignition circuit not powered during cranking.

8-20 MAIN DATA
[Supply cable and routing]

1. Heavy-duty cable of a low electrical resistance should be used on long cable runs
to minimize voltage drop.
2. The cable shall be of a higher current capacity than the protection fuse, and the
correct fuse shall be fitted.
3. The cable should be as short as possible.
4. The cable shall be secured well clear of moving parts, (shock absorbers, steering,
drive shaft, control pedals, etc.).
5. The cable shall be secured well clear of the engine, exhaust system or other hot
items.
6. The supply cable run should, where possible, be separate from that of the in-
car entertainment equipment control cables, although they may pass through the
same holes in the chassis and body for ease of fitting; suitable grommets should
be fitted if additional holes are drilled.
7. The cable shall be supported, avoiding sharp bends, and shall not be subjected
to strain.
8. The cable shall be sited away from ignition coil, the high voltage circuits of the
ignition systems and electronic control units and, where possible, other vehicle
wiring.
Statement of Compliance with ECE R13

Information required by European brake regulation ECE R13 is disclosed on the
following website.
URL: http://www.isuzu.co.jp/world/index.html

MAIN DATA 8-21
Trailer Towing
The vehicle is designed for passenger and cargo transportation, however, when using
the appropriate equipment, you can tow a trailer under certain conditions.
Towing a trailer has a significant influence on handling, performance, braking, durability
and fuel consumption.
For your safety and that of others too, use equipment specifically designed for your
vehicle. Improper equipment or installation can cause damage to your vehicle and
possibly personal injury. Additional care and cautious driving habits are essential when
towing a trailer.
Damage or malfunction caused by towing a trailer for commercial purposes are not
covered by Isuzu warranties.
When a new vehicle has been driven or when a vehicle that has had powertrain parts
changed (engine, transmission and differential) to new parts, it is recommend not to
tow the vehicle until the driving distance reaches 800 km (497 miles).
When towing a trailer, the following gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus cargo load)
shown in the table must not be exceeded.
2WD models
Gross trailer weight
Trailer hitch kit 2,500 kg (5,513 lb)
4WD models
Gross trailer weight
3,500 kg (7,718 lb) (models for the European market)
Trailer hitch kit 3,000 kg (6,615 lb) (models for the Hong Kong and Singapore markets)
2,500 kg (5,513 lb) (models for the Israel market)
The trailer hitch kit is available from your Isuzu Dealer. The trailer hitch kit contains the
trailer hitch, bracket and hardware.
Additional equipment for trailer brake systems will be required. The additional
equipment can be purchased at a recreational vehicle dealer.
Follow the recommendations in this manual before towing a trailer. For further details,

8-22 MAIN DATA
WARNING
• The loading and weight limitations
shown below must be followed for
your continued driving satisfaction.
Gross trailer weight - The gross trailer weight (trailer
(GTW) weight plus cargo load) must
never exceed the designed towing
capacity of the vehicle. The
maximum weight limit for vehicles
equipped with a trailer hitch kit is
as follows:
2WD model: 2,500 kg (5,513 lb)
4WD model: 3,500 kg (7,718 lb)
(models for the European market),
3,000 kg (6,615 lb) (models for
the Hong Kong and Singapore
markets), 2,500 kg (5,513 lb)
(models for the Israel market)
Exceeding the weight limits is
dangerous. It will cause damage
to your vehicle and possibly result
in personal injury.
- The gross combined weight
(GCW) rating equals the combined
weight including passengers and
cargo of your vehicle plus the
total trailer load. The following
limitations apply.
2WD model: 5,400 kg (11,907 lb)
4WD model: 6,000 kg (13,230 lb)
(models for the European, Hong
Kong, and Singapore markets),
5,500 kg (12,128 lb) (models for
the Israel market)
WARNING (Continued)

MAIN DATA 8-23
WARNING (Continued)
- The gross vehicle weight (GVW)
rating equals the combined
weight of an unloaded vehicle,
passengers, cargo, trailer hitch,
trailer tongue load and optional
equipment. This value is indicated
on the vehicle identification
number (VIN) plate attached to
the left front end of the engine
compartment.
- The gross axle weight (GAW)
rating values are also indicated on
the vehicle identification number
(VIN) plate. The load on either the
front or rear axles resulting from
distribution of the gross vehicle
weight on both axles must not
exceed the values listed on the
vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate. Remember to account for
additional equipment and the
tongue load.
Tongue load - Be sure not to allow the tongue
load to exceed: 2WD model: 100
kg (221 lb)/4WD model: 245 kg
(540 lb)
Never exceed the maximum
weight limits of the trailer or trailer
towing equipment. Improper
loading can result in damage to
your vehicle and possible personal
injury. Check weights and loading
at a commercial scale or highway
patrol office that is equipped with
scales.
CAUTION
• Never exceed the weight limits
indicated above.

8-24 MAIN DATA
Equipment
1060mm(41.7in)
1120mm(44.1in)
Front
158.5mm
(6.2in)
Frame
58.5mm(2.3in)
Rear tire
40mm(1.6in)
Mounting point 66mm

(LH/RH) (2.6in)
65.5mm
114mm(4.5in) 27mm (2.6in)
131mm(5.2in) (1.1in)
50mm
(2.0in)
Maximum permissible overhang

1397mm(55.0in)(Regular cab)
1377mm(54.2in)(Extended/Crew cab)
Trailer Hitch
The trailer hitch kit is available from your Isuzu Dealer. The kit includes all the
necessary hardware and instructions for proper installation.
See the drawing for the mounting points of the coupling device and the maximum
permissible overhang of the coupling device.
Check with your recreational vehicle dealer for additional required equipment.
Only a trained mechanic should install your vehicle towing equipment.
Do not use axle-mounted hitches or equipment not designed for your vehicle.
Do not modify the electrical systems of the vehicle to accommodate towing a trailer
other than those specified in the instructions contained in the Isuzu trailer hitch kit.
Improper modifications can affect vehicle durability.
Improper equipment or installation can cause damage to your vehicle and possible
personal injury.
After installation of the Isuzu trailer hitch kit is complete, periodic inspections of the
equipment are necessary to assure continued safe operation.

MAIN DATA 8-25
Safety Chain
Always use a safety chain that is suitable for your vehicle and trailer. Check with your
trailer manufacturer regarding the required equipment. Cross the safety chain under
the hitch and attach it to the trailer hitch connections.
The safety chain will prevent the trailer from dropping to the ground in the event that
the hitch disengages. For proper use and installation, consult the trailer manufacturer.
Trailer lights
Trailer lights and equipment should comply with local legal requirements. Check with
your recreational vehicle dealer for the specific requirements. Use only equipment that
is designed for your vehicle. Improper equipment or installation can cause damage
to the electrical system of your vehicle and affect your vehicle warranty. Consult your
Isuzu Dealer for installation.
Tires
Always check the condition of the tires of the vehicle and trailer before operation.
Replace worn or damaged tires before operation.
Inflate tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the tire
pressure label on the driver's door opening frame and according to the values
recommended by the manufacturer of your trailer.
When the vehicle is towing a trailer and the GAW is 1,870 kg (4,123 lb) or more, the
vehicle should be driven at 60 km/h (37 MPH) or under. For the vehicle equipped with
215/70R15C, 245/70R16, or 255/65R17 tires, their rear tire pressure should set as
specified below:
215/70R15C → 440 kPa (4.40 kg/cm² / 64 psi)
245/70R16 → 290 kPa (2.90 kg/cm² / 42 psi)
255/65R17 → 260 kPa (2.60 kg/cm² / 38 psi)
Trailer Brakes
Trailers with a gross weight of 750 kg (1,654 lb) or more require trailer brakes. If
your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to local legal
requirements.
WARNING
• Never connect a trailer braking system to your vehicle braking system. Braking
efficiency and operation will be seriously affected.
Consult your trailer manufacturer and an Isuzu Dealer for proper installation and use of
trailer brakes.

8-26 MAIN DATA
Equipment Check
Before operating your vehicle, check all safety equipment to ensure safe operation. Be
sure your vehicle is properly serviced to avoid a mechanical malfunction.
Be sure trailer cargo is securely loaded. Check that your rear view mirrors conform to
local legal requirements.
Perform an equipment check of all braking, lighting and safety equipment to ensure
they are working properly.
Your safety depends on proper operation and installation of equipment. Never operate
a vehicle with malfunctioning equipment.
Supplementary exterior rear view mirrors should be added to the vehicle if the traffic
to the rear cannot be seen clearly with standard mirrors. Adjust the extending arms
of these mirrors on both sides of the vehicle so that they always provide maximum
visibility of the road behind.
Maintenance
Towing a trailer will affect vehicle maintenance requirements due to the additional load.
More frequent maintenance intervals will be required to assure continued satisfaction
with the vehicle. Regarding the recommended maintenance and service, contact the

INDEX 9-1
A D
Accessory Socket 5-32 Daily Checks (Preoperational Checks) 6-14
Air Cleaner 6-38 Dashboard Tray 5-37
Air Outlets 5-2 Diesel Particulate Defuser (DPD)
2-73, 4-120
Antenna 5-45
Discarded Parts, Oils and Other Liquids 6-6
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) 4-100
Driving 2-23
Anti-theft System 3-12
Ashtray 5-33
Automatic Air Conditioner 5-15 E
Automatic Transmission Fluid (Automatic Electronic Braking force Distribution (EBD)
Transmission Model) 6-77 4-103
Automatic Transmission Model 2-42 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 4-104

Engine Conditions 6-18
B Engine Coolant 6-30

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge 4-14
Before Driving 2-2
Engine Hood 6-10
Bottle Holder and Small Article Storage
Pocket (Front and Rear Doors) 5-43 Engine Oil 6-20
Brakes 6-46 Exterior (PICTORIAL INDEX) 0-13
Exterior Maintenance 6-98
C
Carrying Children 2-21 F
Cautions for Driving in Cold Regions 2-58 Fan Belt and Air Conditioning Compressor
Belt 6-36
Cautions for Driving in Hot Regions 2-57
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Model 2-46, 4-112
Center Console Box 5-39
Front Fog Light Switch 4-69
Changing Tires 6-67
Front Seat Belt with Pretensioner and SRS
Checking Components that Showed
Airbag System 2-77, 3-67
Abnormalities during Previous Operation
6-16 Fuel Filter 6-41
Child Restraint System (CRS) 3-55 Fuel Gauge 4-15
Child-proof Door Locks (Crew Cab Model) Fuel Tank Filler Cap 3-33
3-22
Cigarette Lighter 5-30
G
Clock Display 4-16
Gearshift Lever 4-82
Clutch (Manual Transmission Model) 6-76
Getting In and Out of the Vehicle 3-26
Coat Hook 5-44
Glove Compartment 5-36
Combination Light Control Switch 4-66
Grip 5-43
Cruise Control 4-95
Cup Holder 5-40
Cup Holder and Small Article Storage
Pocket 5-41
4510393_sec09_INDEX.indd 9-1 2015/01/16 9:27:30

9-2 INDEX
H O
Handling the Battery 6-87 Odometer and Trip Meter 4-11
Handling the Jack 6-62 Off-road Driving 2-41
Handling the Radiator and Intercooler 6-35 Opening and Closing Doors 3-15
Hazard Warning Flasher Switch 4-70 Others 8-10
Headlight Leveling Switch 4-68 Overhead Console 5-28
Headlights and Turn Signal Lights 6-86
Heated Seat Switch 4-76 P
Heater/Manual Air Conditioner 5-4 Parking Brake 6-51
Horn Button 4-73 Parking Brake Lever 4-81
How to Read the Instruments (Instruments Pedals 4-80
Layout) 4-10
Power Steering Fluid 6-79
Power Windows 3-27
I Precautions for Checking and Adjustments
Illumination Control Switch 4-75 6-4
Illumination of Center Display 4-19 Preventing Breakdowns 2-66
Inspection and Maintenance 6-106
Interior (PICTORIAL INDEX) 0-6 R
Interior Lights 5-26 Rear Fog Light Switch 4-69
Interior Maintenance 6-101 Rear Window Defogger Switch 4-77
Isuzu Genuine Oils and Grease 6-6 Refrigerant 6-96
Remote Control Mirror Switch 4-73
K Replacing the Fuses and Relays 7-43
Key 3-2 Retractable Power Mirror Switch 4-74
Key with Immobilizer Transponder Chip 3-4
Keyless Entry System (Radio Remote
Control Units for Door-lock) 3-7
M
Main Data and Specifications 8-2
Manually Operated Windows 3-32
Mirrors 3-46
Model with Automatic Transmission 4-85
Multi-Information Display (MID) 4-20
4510393_sec09_INDEX.indd 9-2 2015/01/16 9:27:30

INDEX 9-3
S V
Seat Belts 3-48 Vanity Mirror 5-30
Seats 3-36 Vehicle Data Collection 2-82
Selector Lever 4-83 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and
Engine Number 1-2
Small Article Storage Pocket 5-34
Small Article Storage Pocket (Driver's Side)
5-38 W
Small Article Storage Pocket (Passenger's Warm-up System 4-6
Side) 5-35
Warning and Indicator Lights 4-39
Small Article Storage Pocket (Upper Side of
Warning and Indicator Lights Layout 4-17
Dashboard) 5-37
Warning Buzzer 4-62
Spare Tire 6-58
Warning/Caution Labels in Your Vehicle
Speed Limit Device 2-76
0-21
Speedometer 4-11
Warning/Indicator Light Index 0-14
Starter Switch 4-64
Wheels and Tires 6-51
Starting the Engine 4-4
When Driving on Bad Roads 7-51
Staying Safe 2-62
When the Battery Goes Flat 7-20
Steering Wheel 6-78
When the Brakes Do not Work 7-19
Steering Wheel Remote Control 5-47
When the Bulb Does not Come On 7-28
Stopping and Parking 2-49
When the Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light
Stopping the Engine 4-7 Comes On 7-25
Sun Visor 5-29 When the Engine Overheats 7-26
When the Engine Stalls and Cannot be
T Restarted 7-19
When the Engine Stops While Driving 7-18
Tachometer 4-13
When the Fuel Runs Out 7-22
Tailgate 3-23
When the Generator Warning Light Comes
Ticket Holder 5-29
On 7-24
Tilt Steering 3-45
When the Tire Goes Flat 7-7
Tire Rotation 6-57
When the Vehicle Breaks Down during
Tools 6-7 Driving 7-6
Towing 7-52 When the Warning Light Comes On 7-25
Trailer Towing 8-21 When to Visit Your Isuzu Dealer 2-69
Troubleshooting 7-2 Windshield Washer Fluid 6-82
Turbocharger 2-82 Windshield Wiper and Windshield Washer
Switch 4-71
U Windshield Wiper Blades 6-83
Using Tire Chains 2-72
4510393_sec09_INDEX.indd 9-3 2015/01/16 9:27:30

MEMO
4510393_sec09_INDEX.indd 9-4 2015/01/16 9:27:30

MEMO
4510393_sec09_INDEX.indd 9-5 2015/01/16 9:27:30

MEMO
4510393_sec09_INDEX.indd 9-6 2015/01/16 9:27:30

MEMO
4510393_sec09_INDEX.indd 9-7 2015/01/16 9:27:30

MEMO
4510393_sec09_INDEX.indd 9-8 2015/01/16 9:27:30

Isuzu D Max Owners Manual Combined 12 17my

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Isuzu D Max Owners Manual Combined 12 17my

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Isuzu D Max Owners Manual Combined 12 17my

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BLACK PANTONE185C 23mm (0.

OWNERS AND IMPORTANT INFORMATION

OWNER’S AND DRIVER’S MANUAL

TF-IE-1331E5_4306960_Cover.indd 1 2013/01/24 9:01:39

Keep this Owner's Manual in the vehicle for handy reference

Notes on Reading This Manual

TF-IE-1331E5_4306960_Cover.indd 2 2013/01/24 9:01:43

4510393_sec00_PICTORIAL INDEX.in1 1 2015/01/16 9:02:41

4510393_sec00_PICTORIAL INDEX.in2 2 2015/01/16 9:02:42

● HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 0-2

4510393_sec00_PICTORIAL INDEX.in0-1 0-1 2015/01/16 9:02:42

Chapter/section titles Chapter index tab

IMPORTANT INFORMATION 2-21

Using Seat Belts with Children

Seat Belts → Refer to page 3-48

Do not Leave a Child Alone in the Vehicle

4510393_sec00_PICTORIAL INDEX.in0-2 0-2 2015/01/16 9:02:42

Use chapter/section titles as keys

Use the pictorial indexes

Use device names as keys

Use the Warning/Indicator Light

If you have a problem with your

4510393_sec00_PICTORIAL INDEX.in0-3 0-3 2015/01/16 9:02:42

4510393_sec00_PICTORIAL INDEX.in0-4 0-4 2015/01/16 9:02:43

PICTORIAL INDEX ··································· 0-6

VEHICLE INFORMATION ···························· 1

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ······················ 2

PRE-DRIVING OPERATIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS ·· 3

COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE ··············· 5

SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE·················· 6

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ························· 7

MAIN DATA ·················································· 8

4510393_sec00_PICTORIAL INDEX.in0-5 0-5 2015/01/16 9:02:43

No. Equipment Page No. Equipment Page

1 Air flow direction control tab 5-3 Windshield wiper and

3 Audio system ― Cup holder and small article

Fuse box 7-43

11 Engine hood release lever 6-10

4510393_sec00_PICTORIAL INDEX.in0-6 0-6 2015/01/16 9:02:43

No. Equipment Page No. Equipment Page

Heater/manual air conditioner 5-4 Small article storage pocket

14 Cigarette lighter 5-30 Accessory socket 5-32

Small article storage pocket Cup holder and small article

16 Glove compartment 5-36

4510393_sec00_PICTORIAL INDEX.in0-7 0-7 2015/01/16 9:02:43

No. Equipment Page No. Equipment Page

Cup holder and small article

Windshield wiper and Small article storage pocket

4 Audio system ― Accessory socket 5-32

10 Glove compartment 5-36

12 Cigarette lighter 5-30

4510393_sec00_PICTORIAL INDEX.in0-8 0-8 2015/01/16 9:02:43

No. Equipment Page No. Equipment Page

Small article storage pocket

Small article storage pocket Fuse box 7-43

16 Fuel lid opener 3-35

4510393_sec00_PICTORIAL INDEX.in0-9 0-9 2015/01/16 9:02:43

No. Equipment Page No. Equipment Page

Hazard warning flasher 9 Illumination control switch 4-75

OWNERS AND IMPORTANT INFORMATION